Home

32293824 - heidenhain

1. 6 Programming Programming Contours The only effect of CC is to define a position as circle center The tool does not move to this position The circle center is also the pole for polar coordinates Circular path C around circle center CC Before programming a circular path C you must first enter the circle center CC The last programmed tool position before the C block is used as the circle starting point Move the tool to the circle starting point Paa Enter the coordinates of the circle center ae Enter the coordinates of the arc end point Direction of rotation DR Further entries if necessary Feed rate F Miscellaneous function M Example NC blocks Full circle Enter the same point you used as the starting point for the end point in a C block The starting and end points of the arc must lie on the circle Input tolerance up to 0 016 mm selected with MP 7431 HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 105 6 4 Path Contours m i Coordinates 6 4 Path Contours Bi artesian Coordinates Circular path CR with defined radius The tool moves on a circular path with the radius R Bo Enter the coordinates of the arc end point Radius R Note The algebraic sign determines the size of the arc Direction of rotation DR Note The algebraic sign determines whether the arc IS concave or convex Further entries if necessary Feed rate F Miscellaneous func
2. tb HAZ i Example NC blocks 199 8 5 SL Cycles CONTOUR TRAIN Cycle 25 In conjunction with Cycle 14 CONTOUR GEOMETRY this cycle facilitates the machining of open contours where the starting point of the contour is not the same as its end point Cycle 25 CONTOUR TRAIN offers considerable advantages over machining an open contour using positioning blocks 8 5 SL Cycles m The TNC monitors the operation to prevent undercuts and surface blemishes It is recommended that you run a graphic simulation of the contour before execution m f the radius of the selected tool is too large the corners of the contour may have to be reworked E The contour can be machined throughout by up cut or by climb milling The type of milling even remains effective when the contours are mirrored E The tool can traverse back and forth for milling in several infeeds This results in faster machining m Allowance values can be entered in order to perform repeated rough milling and finish milling operations 200 8 Programming Cycles 26 Milling depth Q1 incremental value Distance AASIA between workpiece surface and contour floor Finishing allowance for side Q3 incremental value Finishing allowance in the working plane gt Workpiece surface coordinate O5 absolute value Absolute coordinate of the workpiece surface referenced to the workpiece datum gt Clea
3. 21 O S N N Sos O e p amp Q gt Q m Cycles for Multipass Milling N 18 lt lt 100 Define the workpiece blank Define the tool Call the tool Retract the tool Cycle definition MULTIPASS MILLING Pre position near the starting point Call the cycle Retract in the tool axis end program 8 Programming Cycles 8 7 Coordinate Transformation Cycles Once a contour has been programmed you can position it on the workpiece at various locations and in different sizes through the use of coordinate transformations The TNC provides the following coordinate transformation cycles 7 DATUM SHIFT For shifting contours directly within the program or with datum tables t 8 MIRROR IMAGE For mirroring contours 8 10 ROTATION For rotating contours in the working plane a P 11 SCALING FACTOR T For increasing or reducing the size of contours p 26 AXIS SPECIFIC SCALING For increasing or reducing the size of contours with axis specitic scaling factors P 19 WORKING PLANE For executing machining operations in a tilted coordinate system on machines with swivel heads and or tilting tables a Effect of coordinate transformations A coordinate transformation becomes effective as soon as It Is defined it is not called It remains in effect until it is changed or canceled To cancel co
4. Center in X axis Center in Y axis Starting angle in space Z X plane End angle in space Z X plane Angle increment in space Radius of the sphere Starting angle of rotational position in the X Y plane End angle of rotational position in the X Y plane Angle increment in the X Y plane for roughing Allowance in sphere radius for roughing Setup clearance for pre positioning in the tool axis Feed rate for milling Define the workpiece blank Define the tool Call the tool Retract the tool Call machining operation Reset allowance Angle increment in the X Y plane for finishing Call machining operation Retract in the tool axis end program 10 Programming O Parameters HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 Subprogram 10 Machining operation Calculate Z coordinate for pre positioning Copy starting angle in space Z X plane Compensate sphere radius for pre positioning Copy rotational position in the plane Account for allowance in the sphere radius Shift datum to center of sphere Account for starting angle of rotational position in the plane Set pole in the X Y plane for pre positioning Pre position in the plane Pre position in the tool axis Set pole in the Z X plane offset by the tool radius Move to working depth Move upward in an approximated arc Update solid angle Inquire whether an arc is finished If not finished return to LBL 2 Move to the end angle in space Retract in the tool axis Pre position
5. Select the directory in which you wish to store the new program Enter the new program name and confirm your entry with the ENT key E To select the unit of measure press the MM or mn INCH soft key The TNC switches the screen layout and initiates the dialog for defining the BLK FORM z Enter the spindle axis 0 Enter in sequence the X Y and Z coordinates of the MIN point ENT l p Enter in sequence the X Y and Z coordinates of the MAX point 100 ENT 0 ENT O1 Programming and editing Def BLK FORM max corner BEGIN PGM BLK MM BLK FORM 0 1 Z X Yt 2 48 BLK FORM 0 2 X 100 Y 1 END PGM BLK MM If you do not wish to define a blank form cancel the dialog with the DEL key 4 4 Programming Fundamentals of NC File Management Programming Aids Pallet Management The program blocks window shows the following BLK FORM definition N 0 BEGIN PGM NEW MM O 1 BLK FORM 0 1 Z X 0 Y 0 Z 40 O ia 2 BLK FORM 0 2 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 A 3 END PGM NEW MM mn The TNC automatically generates the block numbers as well as the BEGIN and END blocks Programming tool movementstool movements in conversational format To program a block initiate the dialog by pressing a function key In the screen headline the TNC then asks you for all the information necessary to program the desired function Example of a dialog Initiate the dialog 10 Enter the targe
6. d mar V lt q q Information on tools M _Tool data RT T T Tool number and name e RT Number and name of a replacement tool ree Tool axis DL DR Tool length and radii 0 0100 8 1006 0 10600 0 1000 Oversizes delta values from TOOL CALL PGM and the tool table TAB 5 Tool life maximum tool life TIME 1 and maximum tool life for 6 Display of the active tool and the next replacement tool T CUR TIME TIME 1 TIME 01 43 03 20 03 00 2 m re a ad V gt q STATUS coord Coordinate transformations TRANSF fil Programs STAT Name of main program Datum shift Rotation Active datum shift Cycle 7 152 8000 E 3 Active rotation angle Cycle 10 eee li Mirrer image 4 Mirrored axes Cycle 8 S3 KY Active scaling factor s Cycles 11 26 scaling Scaling datum 8 8808 0 399500 7 p 0 008 a 399500 See also section 8 7 Coordinate Transformation Cycles 8 0006 3 999506 STATUS tool Tool measurement PROBE i Tool data 41 Number of the tool to be measured ties g yin 2 1 9664 2 Display whether the tool radius or the tool length is being foal L MAX 3 2 0035 measured DyN 8 MIN and MAX values of the individual cutting edges and the 1 9903 result of measuring the rotating tool DYN dynamic ae j measurement 1 9986 4 Cutting edge number with the corresponding measured value If the measured value is followed by an ast
7. io Q D T or O or c D a Q r n r o lt 1A D V 14 CONTOUR GEOMETRY essential i gS w E gz ag a Pe a 20 CONTOUR DATA essential 21 PILOT DRILLING optional Do 22 ROUGH OUT essential TEN 23 FLOOR FINISHING optional Ep 24 SIDE FINISHING optional I Enhanced cycles 25 CONTOUR TRAIN N 27 CYLINDER SURFACE 3 amp 192 8 Programming Cycles CONTOUR GEOMETRY Cycle 14 All subprograms that are superimposed to define the contour are listed in Cycle 14 CONTOUR GEOMETRY E Before programming note the following Cycle 14 is DEF active which means that it becomes effective as soon as it is defined in the part program You can list up to 12 subprograms subcontours in Cycle 14 gt Label numbers for the contour Enter all label 2n numbers for the individual subprograms that are to be superimposed to define the contour Confirm every label number with the ENT key When you have entered all numbers conclude entry with the END key Example NC blocks Overlapping contours Pockets and islands can be overlapped to form a new contour You can thus enlarge the area of a pocket by another pocket or reduce it by an island Subprograms Overlapping pockets The subsequent programming examples are contour subprograms that are called by Cycle 14 CONTOUR
8. lt c9 Programming and editing RND R1 FC DR R2 5 CLSD FLT AN 180 925 FCT DR R10 5 CCX 0 CCY solution 2 is not correct FSELECT 1 FLT AN 269 025 RND R2 5 FL AN 0 975 FCT DR R10 5 CCX 0 CCY 6 FLT AN 89 025 FCT DR R2 5 CLSD RND R1 LP IPR 2 RO F MAX L 2 5 RO F MAX MB 59 ae earns Foe ENAS You can use the TNC s text editor to write and edit texts Typical applications This is a text file In the text file you may Recording test results record test results Documenting working procedures E working preeaAuFeE store formulas and tables N LL J 3 O Creating formularies write messages record machine parameters Text files are type A files ASCII files If you want to edit other types of files you must first convert them into type A files Opening and exiting text files Select the Programming and Editing mode of operation 4 9 To call the file manager press the PGM MGT key To display type A files press the SELECT TYPE and then the SHOW A soft keys select a file and open it with the SELECT soft key or ENT key or create a new file by entering the new file name and confirming your entry with the ENT key Move one word to the right a To leave the text editor call the file manager and select a file of a MOVE different file type for example a part program Move one word to the left We Editing texts The first line of the te
9. The TNC executes the spline block according to the following third degree polynomials t K3X t K2X t K1X t X t K3Z t8 K2Z t2 K1Z t Z whereby the variable t runs from 1 to 0 N X 30 Spline starting point Spline end point Spline parameters for X axis Spline parameters for Z axis Spline end point Spline parameters for X axis Spline parameters for Z axis 6 Programming Programming Contours Example Block format for five axes Spline starting point Spline end point Spline parameters for X axis Spline parameters for Y axis Spline parameters for Z axis Spline parameters for A axis Spline parameters for B axis with exponential notation Spline Interpolation The TNC executes the spline block according to the following third degree polynomials X t K3X t K2X t K1X t xX t KBY 8 K2Y t2 K1Y t Y t K3Z t3 K2Z t K1Z t Z A t K3A t K2A t K1A t A t K3B t3 K2B t K1B t B whereby the variable t runs from 1 to O N lt 6 7 Path Cont For every end point coordinate in the spline block the spline parameters K3 to K1 must be programmed The end point coordinates can be programmed any sequence within the spline block The TNC always expects the spline parameters K for each axis in the sequence K3 K2 K1 Besides the principal axes X Y and Z the TNC can also process the secondary axes U V and W and the rotary axes A B
10. p Q a Q RULED SURFACE Cycle 231 1 From the current position the TNC positions the tool in a linear 3 D movement to the starting point 1 2 The tool subsequently advances to the stopping point 2 at the feed rate for milling 3 From this point the tool moves in rapid traverse FMAX by the tool diameter in the positive tool axis direction and then back to starting point M 4 At the starting position fil the TNC moves the tool back to the the last traversed Z value 5 Then the TNC moves the tool in all three axes from point f in the direction of point 4 to the next line 6 From this point the tool moves to the stopping point on this pass The TNC calculates the stopping point using point2 and an offset in the direction of point8 7 Multipass milling is repeated until the programmed surface has been completed 8 At the end of the cycle the tool is positioned above the highest programmed point in the tool axis offset by the tool diameter Cutting motion You can freely choose the starting point and thus the milling direction since the TNC always performs the individual cuts from point to point 2 and the process sequence is executed from point 1 2 to point 8 2 You can position point f in any corner of the surface to be machined If you are using an end mill for the machining operation you can optimize the surface finish in the following ways a shaping cut tool axis coordinate of point A greater
11. D Dl 56 4 Programming Fundamentals of NC File Management Programming Aids Pallet Management 4 6 Interactive Programming Graphics While you are writing the part program you can have the TNC generate a graphic illustration of the programmed contour To generate not generate graphics during programming To switch the screen layout to displaying program blocks to the left and graphics to the right press the SPLIT SCREEN key and PGM GRAPHICS soft key AUTO Set the AUTO DRAW soft key to ON While you are orrom entering the program lines the TNC generates each path contour you program in the graphics window in the right screen half If you do not wish to have graphics generated during programming set the AUTO DRAW soft key to OFF Even when AUTO DRAW is switched ON graphics are not generated for program section repeats Generating a graphic for an existing program Use the arrow keys to select the block up to which you want the graphic to be generated or press GOTO and enter the desired block number RESET To generate graphics press the RESET START soft Additional functions are listed in the table at right Block number display ON OFF gt Shift the soft key row see figure at right To show block numbers Set aLock we the SHOW OMIT BLOCK NR soft key to SHOW To omit block numbers Set the SHOW OMIT BLOCK NR soft key to OMIT To erase the graphic eS Shift the soft key row see figure at r
12. If you cannot correct the error write down the error message and contact your repair service agency Mid program startup block scan 7 The RESTORE POS AT N feature must be enabled and adapted by the machine tool builder Your machine manual provides more detailed information With the RESTORE POS AT N feature block scan you can start a part program at any block you desire The TNC scans the program blocks up to that point Machining can be graphically simulated If you have interrupted a part program with an INTERNAL STOP the TNC automatically offers the interrupted block N for mid program startup 294 11 Test Run and Program Run 11 4 Program Run To go to the first block of the current program to start a block scan enter GOTO 0 To select mid program startup press the RESTORE POS AT N soft key Program run full sequence and editing BEGIN PGM AYD_DAU MM RESTORE Start up at N Enter the block number N at which the BLK FORM 0 1 2 X 0 Y 0 24200 block scan should end BLK FORM 0 2 X 400 Y 400 2 400 o gt gt gt WUZ 1 2 3 4 5 10 15 20 lt lt lt Program Enter the name of the program containing LBL 1 block N TOOL CALL Z 6300 F500 7 L X 200 R F MAX M3 gt Repetitions If block N is located in a program section X 500 repeat enter the number of repetitions to be TOOL CALL 1 2 N W2 calculated in the block scan To start the block scan press the machine START 30 143
13. You can use Cycle 30 to run digitizing data and PNT files ae If you want to run PNT files in which no tool axis coordinate is programmed the milling depth is derived trom the programmed MIN point in the tool axis PGM Name digitizing data Enter the name of the file ala in which the digitizing data is stored If the Tile is not stored in the current directory enter the complete path If you wish to execute a point table enter also the Tile tyoe PNT Min point range Lowest coordinates X Y and Z coordinates in the range to be milled Max point range Highest coordinates X Y and Z coordinates in the range to be milled Cycles for Multipass Milling Setup clearance f incremental value Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface for tool movements in rapid traverse Plunging depth 2 incremental value Dimension by which the tool is advanced in each infeed Feed rate for plunging p Traversing speed of the tool in mm min during penetration Feed rate for milling p Traversing speed of the tool in mm min while milling Miscellaneous function M Optional entry of a miscellaneous function for example M13 Example NC blocks HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 213 O N N E Oo p Q a Q MULTIPASS MILLING Cycle 230 1 From the current position the TNC positions the tool in rapid traverse in the working plane to the starting positio
14. 214 RULED SURFACE Cycle 231 216 Example Multipass milling 219 8 7 CoordinateTransformation Cycles 219 DATUM SHIFT Cycle 7 220 DATUM SHIFT with datum tables Cycle 7 221 MIRROR IMAGE Cycle 8 224 ROTATION Cycle 10 225 SCALING FACTOR Cycle 11 226 AXIS SPECIFIC SCALING Cycle 26 227 WORKING PLANE Cycle 19 228 Example Coordinate transformation cycles 233 8 8 Special Cycles 235 DWELLTIME Cycle 9 235 PROGRAM CALL Cycle 12 235 ORIENTED SPINDLE STOP Cycle 13 236 TOLERANCE Cycle 32 237 HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 Contents Contents 9 1 Marking Subprograms and Program Section Repeats 240 9 2 Subprograms 240 9 3 Program Section Repeats 241 9 4 Program as Subprogram 242 9 5 Nesting 243 Subprogram within a subprogram 243 Repeating program section repeats 244 Repeating a subprogram 245 9 6 Programming Examples 246 Example Milling a contour in several infeeds 246 Example Groups of holes 247 Example Groups of holes with several tools 248 10 1 Principle and Overview 252 10 2 Part Families Q Parameters in Place of Numerical Values 254 10 3 Describing Contours Through Mathematical Functions 255 10 4 Trigonometric Functions 257 10 5 Calculating Circles 258 10 6 If Then Decisions with Q Parameters 259 10 7
15. Effect M204 remains in effect until a new voltage is output through M200 M201 M202 M203 or M204 149 7 6 Miscellaneous Function ily Laser Cutting Machines jeneral Information on Cycles 8 1 General Information on Cycles Frequently recurring machining cycles that comprise several working steps are stored in the TNC memory as standard cycles Coordinate transformations and other special cycles are also provided as standard cycles The table at right lists the various cycle groups Fixed cycles with numbers 200 and over use O parameters as transfer parameters Parameters with specific functions that are required in several cycles always have the same number For example Q200 is always assigned the setup clearance Q202 the plunging depth etc Defining a cycles via soft key structure DEF g Select the desired cycle for example PECKING The Zz TNC initiates the programming dialog and asks all required input values At the same time a graphic of the input parameters is displayed in the right screen window The parameter that is asked for in the dialog prompt is highlighted The soft key row shows the available groups of cycles Press the soft key for the desired group of cycles for example DRILLING for the drilling cycles Enter all parameters asked by the TNC and conclude each entry with the ENT key The TNC terminates the dialog when all required data have been entered Defining a cycle using the GOTO functi
16. The TNC needs a fixed point from which it can calculate the contour elements Use the gray path function keys to program a position that contains both coordinates of the working plane immediately before programming the FK contour Do not enter any Q parameters in this block If the first block of an FK contour is an FCT or FLT block you must program at least two NC block with the gray path function keys to fully define the direction of contour approach Do not program an FK contour immediately after an LBL label HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 Contour element Soft key FLT Straight line with tangential connection Straight line without tangential connection r x x FCT Circular arc with tangential connection j Circular arc without tangential connection 119 6 6 Path Contours FK Free Contour Programming 6 6 Path Contours FK m nou Programming Free programming of straight lines To display the soft keys for free contour programming press the FK key To initiate the dialog for free programming of straight lines press the FL soft key The TNC displays additio nal soft keys see table at right Enter all known data in the block by using these soft keys The FK graphic displays the programmed contour element in red until sufficient data are entered If the entered data describe several solutions the graphic will display the contour element in green See Graphics during FK programming See next p
17. left are to be understood as based on the direction of tool movement along the workpiece contour see illustrations on the next page HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 79 c J e c e Q ol Compensation I Between two program blocks with different radius compensations RR and RL you must program at least one block without radius compensation that is with RQ Radius compensation does not come into effect until the end of the block in which it is first programmed You can also activate the radius compensation for secondary axes in the working plane Program the secondary axes too in each following block since otherwise the TNC will execute the radius compensation in the principal axis again Whenever radius compensation is activated with RR RL or canceled with RO the TNC positions the tool perpendicular to the programmed starting or end position Position the tool at a sufficient distance from the first or last contour point to prevent the possibility of damaging the contour Entering radius compensation When you program a path contour the following dialog question is displayed after entry of the coordinates To select tool movement to the left of the contour press the RL soft key or To select tool movement to the right of the O RR contour press the RR soft key or TA To select tool movement without radius compensation or to cancel radius compensatio
18. 63 4 11 HELP for NC error messages 64 4 12 Managing PalletTables 65 Contents 5 1 Entering Tool Related Data 68 5 2 Tool Data 69 5 3 Tool Compensation 78 5 4 Three DimensionalTool Compensation 82 5 5 Working with Cutting DataTables 84 6 1 Overview ofTool Movements 92 6 2 Fundamentals of Path Functions 93 6 3 Contour Approach and Departure 96 Overview Types of paths for contour approach and departure 96 Important positions for approach and departure 96 Approaching on a straight line with tangential connection APPR LT 97 Approaching on a straight line perpendicular to the first contour point APPR LN 98 Approaching on a circular arc with tangential connection APPR CT 98 Approaching on acircular arc with tangential connection from a straight line to the contour APPR LCT 99 Departing tangentially on a straight line DEP LT 100 Departing ona straight line perpendicular to the last contour point DEP LN 100 Departing tangentially on a circular arc DEP CT 101 Departing on acircular arc tangentially connecting the contour and a straight line DEP LCT 101 6 4 Path Contours Cartesian Coordinates 102 Overview of path functions 102 Straight line L 103 Inserting a chamfer CHF between two straight lines 103 Circle center CC 104 Circular path C around circle center CC 105 Circular path CR wi
19. AXIS SPECIFIC SCALING Cycle 26 E Before programming note the following Coordinate axes sharing coordinates for arcs must be enlarged or reduced by the same factor You can program each coordinate axis with its own axis specific scaling factor In addition you can enter the coordinates of a center for all scaling factors The size of the contour is enlarged or reduced with reference to the center and not necessarily as in Cycle 11 SCALING FACTOR with reference to the active datum Effect The SCALING FACTOR becomes effective as soon as it is defined in the program It is also effective in the Positioning with MDI mode of operation The active scaling factor is shown in the additional status display 26 cc Axis and scaling factor Enter the coordinate axis axes Pa as well as the factor s involved in enlarging or reducing Enter a positive value up to 99 999 999 Center coordinates Enter the center of the axis specific enlargement or reduction The coordinate axes are selected with soft keys Cancellation Program the AXIS SPECIFIC SCALING cycle once again with a scaling factor of 1 for the same axis Example Axis specific scaling factors in the working plane Preset Quadrangle see figure at lower right Corner 1 X 20 0 mm Y 2 5mm Corner 2 K 32 5 mm Y 15 0 mm Corner 3 X 20 0 mm Y 275 mm Corner 4 X 9mm Y 15 0 mm Enlarge X axis by factor 1 4 Reduce Y axis by factor 0 6 Center at CCX 15 mm
20. HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 Example NC block You wish to be able to use the handwheel during program run to move the tool in the working plane X Y by 1 mm of the programmed value E M118 is always effective in the original coordinate system even if the working plane is tilted M118 also functions in the Positioning with MDI mode of operation If M118 is active the MANUAL OPERATI ON function is not available after a program interruption 143 7 4 Miscellaneous Functions for Contouring Behavior N as lt gt or Oo am S O e 7e c S J S C 7 5 Miscellaneous 7 5 Miscellaneous Functions for Rotary Axes Feed rate in mm min on rotary axes A B C M116 Standard behavior The TNC interprets the programmed feed rate in a rotary axis in degrees per minute The contouring feed rate therefore depends on the distance from the tool center to the center of the rotary axis The larger this distance becomes the greater the contouring feed rate Feed rate in mm min on rotary axes with M116 y The machine geometry must be entered in machine parameters 7510 ff by the machine tool builder The TNC interprets the programmed feed rate in a rotary axis in mm min With this miscellaneous function the TNC calculates the feed rate for each block at the start of the individual block The feed rate is not changed during execution of the block even if the tool moves toward the center o
21. Parameters that are primarily used for cycles Q200 to Q399 globally effective for all programs that are stored in the TNC memory Programming notes You can mix Q parameters and fixed numerical values within a program Q parameters can be assigned numerical values between 99 999 9999 and 99 999 9999 Internally the TNC can calculate up to a width of 57 bits before and 7 bits after the decimal point 32 bit data width corresponds to a decimal value of 4 294 967 296 252 10 Programming Q Parameters Cee Some Q parameters are always assigned the same data by the TNC For example Q108 is always assigned the current tool radius For further information see section 10 10 Preassigned O Parameters If you are using the parameters Q1 to Q99 in OEM cycles define via MP7251 whether the parameters are only to be used locally in the OEM cycles or may be used globally Calling Q parameter functions When you are writing a part program press the Q key below the key in the keypad for numerical input and axis selection The TNC then displays the following soft keys Basic arithmetic assign add subtract multiply aie divide square root ARITHM TRIGO Trigonometric functions NOME TRY CIRCLE Function for calculating circles LATION If then conditions jumps sume DIVERSE Other functions FUNCTION Entering Formulas Directly FORMULA oO D oO Cc HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B T
22. The algebraic sign for the depth parameter determines the working direction The machining data entered in Cycle 20 are valid for Cycles 21 to 24 If you are using the SL cycles in Q parameter programs the cycle parameters Q1 to Q19 cannot be used as program parameters Milling depth Q1 incremental value Distance ony between workpiece surface and pocket floor Path overlap factor Q2 Q2 x tool radius stepover factor k Finishing allowance for side Q3 incremental value Finishing allowance in the working plane Finishing allowance for floor O4 incremental value Finishing allowance in the tool axis Workpiece surface coordinate Q5 absolute value Absolute coordinate of the workpiece surface HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 QO 195 8 5 SL Cycles 8 5 SL Cycles m x D 3 D lt O O 2 Set up clearance Q6 incremental value Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface Clearance height Q7 absolute value Absolute height at which the tool cannot collide with the workpiece for intermediate positioning and retraction at the end of the cycle Inside corner radius Q8 Inside corner rounding radius entered value is referenced to the tool midpoint path Direction of rotation Clockwise 1 Q9 Machining direction for pockets m Clockwise Q9 1 up cut milling for pocket and island m Counterclockwise Q9 1 climb milling for pocket and
23. Y coordinate of the straight line end point v 7 DNNE Polar coordinate radius Polar coordinate angle m Ne Length of a straight line D al Gradient angle of a straight line Beginning or end of a closed contour For data that are based on other blocks see Relati ve data for auxiliary points see Auxiliary points in this section X coordinate of the arc end point Y coordinate of the arc end point vV 7 BS Ee Polar coordinate radius Polar coordinate angle Oo wa Rotational direction of the arc 1 e d Radius of the arc Angle of the leading axis to the arc end point 8 G 6 Programming Programming Contours Gradient angle of an arc The gradient angle AN of an arc is the angle of the entry tangent See figure at right Chord length of an arc The chord length LEN of an arc is the linear distance LEN between its end points See figure at right Centers of free programmed circles The TNC calculates a circle center for free programmed arcs from the data you enter This makes it possible to program full circles in an FK program block If you wish to define circle centers in polar coordinates you must use FPOL not CC to define the pole FPOL is entered in Cartesian coordinates and remains in effect until the TNC encounters a block in which another FPOL is defined A circle center that was calculated or programmed conventionally is then no longer valid as a pole or cir
24. gt No to 9 to 9 to 9 to 9 to 9 Basic rotation in MANUAL OPERATION mode Active mirror axis 1 X axis mirrored 2 Y axis mirrored 128 V axis mirrored 256 W axis mirrored Active scaling factor in Y axis Active scaling factor in V axis 3D ROT A axis 3D ROT B axis Index 1 X axis 2 Y axis 3 Z axis Index 4 A axis 5 B axis 6 C axis Index 7 U axis 8 V axis 9 W axis Negative software limit switch Axes 1 to 9 Positive software limit switch Index 1 X axis 2 Y axis 3 Z axis Index 4 A axis 5 B axis 6 C axis Index 1 X axis 2 Y axis 3 Z axis Index 4 A axis 5 B axis 6 C axis Index 7 U axis 8 V axis 9 W axis Touch probe axis Effective length Radius setting ring 267 ions Funct itiona 10 8 Add ions Funct itiona 10 8 Add Tool touch probe 120 20 21 Measuring touch probe 350 30 31 37 30 34 35 36 Data from the active datum table 500 datum number Datum table selected 505 1 Data from the active pallet table 510 1 Machine parameter exists 1010 MP number Example Assign the value of the active scaling factor for the Z axis to O25 268 CO NM GI NOJ a CO RO A Rh gt j 1to9 MP index Center point X axis REF system Center point Y axis REF system Center point Z axis REF system Probe contact radius Calibrated stylus length Stylus radius 1 Stylus radius 2 Setting ring diameter Center misalignment in m
25. 8 Programming Cycles L m UO m Z afe gt Z Z O IRs NO O U Z D Ow O Tool change Call tool for roughing finishing Cycle definition ROUGH OUT Cycle call ROUGH OUT Cycle definition FLOOR FINISHING Cycle call FLOOR FINISHING Cycle definition SIDE FINISHING Cycle call SIDE FINISHING Retract in the tool axis end program Contour subprogram 1 left pocket Contour subprogram 2 right pocket Contour subprogram 3 square left island Contour subprogram 4 triangular right island 207 8 5 SL Cycles 8 5 SL Cycles N 08 Define the workpiece blank Define the tool Call the tool Retract the tool Define contour subprogram Define machining parameters Call the cycle Retract in the tool axis end program 8 Programming Cycles HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 Contour subprogram 209 8 5 SL Cycles E Cylinder centered on rotary table Datum at center of rotary table 8 5 SL Cycles N 10 Define the tool Call tool tool axis is Y Retract the tool Position tool on rotary table center Define contour subprogram Define machining parameters Pre position rotary table Call the cycle Retract in the tool axis end program 8 Programming Cycles aD eee Contour subprogram 2b cgo 2420 RE Data for the rotary axis are entered in mm Q17 1 HEID
26. BLK FORM 2 X 400 Y 400 2 400 3 s gt gt gt W2 1 2 3 4 5 18 15 28 lt lt lt a 4 LBL 1 Show the blank form and test the entire program 5 TOOL CALL Z 6380 F5008 6 L X 200 R F MAX M3 7 X 500 STOP 8 TOOL CALL 1 Z N WZ Interrupt the test run a a E X 500 TOOL CALL 2 Z N WZ Running a program test up to a certain block X 2 ORTER N With the STOP AT N function the TNC does a test run up to the iih Program RYD ORU H block with block number N Z oe Go to the beginning of program in the Test Run mode of ie es H START operation To run a program test up to a specific block press the STOP AT N soft key STOP Stop at N Enter the block number at which you wish AT m the test to stop Program Enter the name of the program that contains the block with the selected block number The TNC displays the name of the selected program If the test run is to be interrupted in a program that was called with PGM CALL you must enter this name Repetitions If N is located in a program section repeat enter the number of repeats that you want to run To test a program section press the START soft key The TNC will test the program up to the entered block 290 11 Test Run and Program Run ee Pear eae BEGIN PGM 3507 MM BLK FORM 1 2 K 28 Y 20 2 20 BLK FORM 2 K 2 Y 20 2 0 TOOL CALL 1 2 81000 L 2 5 RO F MAX M3 L K 5 5 RO F MAX M8 L 2 5 RO F MAX CC K Y 0 LP PR 14 PA 45 RR F500 In the Pro
27. Define the tool Call the tool Retract the tool Define THREAD CUTTING cycle Approach hole 1 Call subprogram 1 Approach hole 2 Call subprogram 1 Retract tool end of main program Subprogram 1 Thread cutting Orient spindle makes it possible to cut repeatedly Tool offset to prevent collision during tool infeed dependent on core diameter and tool Pre position in rapid traverse Move to starting depth Reset the tool to hole center Call Cycle 18 Retract tool End of subprogram 1 167 8 3 Cycles for milling pockets studs and slots 4 POCKET MILLING rectangular r Roughing cycle without automatic pre positioning 212 POCKET FINISHING rectangular Finishing cycle with automatic pre positioning and 2nd set up clearance 213 STUD FINISHING rectangular Finishing cycle with automatic pre positioning and 2nd set up clearance 5 CIRCULAR POCKET MILLING z Roughing cycle without automatic pre positioning 214 CIRCULAR POCKET FINISHING Finishing cycle with automatic pre positioning and 2nd set up clearance 8 3 Cycle for Milling Pockets Studs and Slots 215 CIRCULAR STUD FINISHING Finishing cycle with automatic pre positioning and 2nd set up clearance 3 SLOT MILLING 5 Roughing finishing cycle without automatic pre positioning vertical downteed 210 SLOT WITH RECIPROCATING PLUNGE CUT Roughing finishing cycle with automatic pre positioning and reciprocating plunge cut 211 CIRCULAR SLOT TE Ro
28. FN2 SUBTRACTION Example FN2 Q1 10 5 x y Calculates and assigns the difference of two values FN3 MULTIPLICATION Example FN3 Q2 3 3 Kay Calculates and assigns the product of two values 7 Ww FN4 DIVISION a Example FN4 O4 8 DIV 02 KV Calculates and assigns the product of two value Not permitted Division by 0 FN5 SQUARE ROOT aE Example FN5 O20 SORT 4 SORT Calculates and assigns the square root of a number Not permitted square root of a negative number At right of the character you can enter the following Two numbers Two Q parameters A number and a O parameter The Q parameters and numerical values in the equations can be entered with positive or negative signs HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 255 e c 9 J c gt LL i 2 J 2 re os O O Som A 7e gt 10 3 Describing Cont urs Through Mathematical Functions n g Co NTO 10 3 Descri Example Programming fundamental operations O To select the Q parameter functions press the O key To select the mathematical functions Press the deel BASIC ARITHMETIC FNO To select the Q parameter function ASSIGN press the FNO X Y soft key Enter a parameter number for example 5 Assign a value to O5 for example 10 o O To select the Q parameter functions press the O key To select the mathematical functions Press the Z BAS
29. G J 2 A To execute the pallet file In machine parameter 7683 set whether the pallet table is to be executed blockwise or continuously see 13 1 General User Parameters Select the file manager in the operating mode Program Run Full Sequence or Program Run Single Block Press the PGM MGT key Display all P files Press the soft keys SELECT TYPE and SHOW P Select pallet table with the arrow keys and confirm with ENT 4 12 Managing To execute pallet table Press the NC Start button The TNC executes the pallets as set in Machine Parameter 7683 66 4 Programming Fundamentals of NC File Management Programming Aids Pallet Management lool Related Data 5 1 Entering 5 1 Entering Tool Related Data Feed rate F The feed rate is the speed in millimeters per minute or inches per minute at which the tool center moves The maximum feed rates can be different for the individual axes and are set in machine parameters Input You can enter the feed rate in the TOOL CALL block and in every positioning block See section 6 2 Fundamentals of Path Contours Rapid traverse If you wish to program rapid traverse enter FMAX To enter FMAX press the ENT key or the FMAX soft key as soon as the dialog question Feed rate F appears on the TNC screen Duration of effect A feed rate entered as a numerical value remains in effect until a block with a different feed rate is
30. Iz Setting the data interface In the menu option PRINT or PRINT TEST you must enter the path for storing the texts or Q parameters See 12 MOD Functions Setting the Data Interface The function FN15 PRINT transfers Q parameter values and error messages through the data interface for example to a printer When you save the data in the TNC memory or transfer them to a PC the TNC stores the data in the Tile FN15RUN A output in program run mode or in the file FN15SIM A output in test run mode To output dialog texts and error messages with FN15 PRINT numerical value Numerical values from 0 to 99 Dialog texts for OEM cycles Numerical values exceeding 100 PLC error messages Example Output of dialog text 20 67 FN 15 PRINT20 00 To output dialog texts and error messages with FN 15 PRINT Q parameter Application example Recording workpiece measurement You can transfer up to six Q parameters and numerical values simultaneously The TNC separates them with slashes Example Output of dialog text 1 and numerical value for Q1 Programming and editing full sequence RS232 interface RS422 interface ey ee Mode of op FE1 Baud rate Mode of op Baud rate 115200 57600 19200 115200 Assign Print TNC NKN SCRODP Print test PGM MGT RS232 USER O r RS422 On SETUP PARAMETER HELP Enhanced 10 Programming Q Parameters FN16 F PRINT Formatted output of text and O parameter v
31. M110 M111 M114 M115 M116 M117 M118 M120 M126 M127 M128 M129 M130 M134 M135 M200 M201 M202 M203 M204 Stop program run spindle STOP coolant OFF Stop program Spindle STOP Coolant OFF Clear status display depending on machine parameter Go to block 1 Spindle ON clockwise Spindle ON counterclockwise Spindle STOP Tool change Stop program run depending on machine parameter Spindle STOP Coolant ON Coolant OFF Spindle ON clockwise coolant ON Spindle ON counterclockwise Coolant ON Same function as M02 Vacant miscellaneous function or Cycle call modally effective depending on machine parameter Only in lag mode Constant contouring speed at corners Within the positioning block Coordinates are referenced to machine datum Within the positioning block Coordinates are referenced to position defined by machine tool builder such as tool change position Reduce display of rotary axis to value under 360 Machine small contour steps Machine open contours completely Blockwise cycle call Automatic tool change with replacement tool if maximum tool life has expired Reset M101 Reduce feed rate during plunging to factor F percentage Machining with second kv factor Machining with first kv factor Suppress error message for replacement tools Reset M107 Constant contouring speed at tool cutting edge increase and decrease feed rate Constant contouring speed at tool cutting edge feed rate decrease only Re
32. Polar coordinates Q If the production drawing is dimensioned in Cartesian coordinates you also write the part program using Cartesian coordinates For parts containing circular arcs or angles it is often simpler to give the lt dimensions in polar coordinates ad c While the Cartesian coordinates X Y and Z are three dimensional and can describe points in space polar coordinates are two dimensional and describe points in a plane Polar coordinates have their datum at a circle center CC or pole A position in a plane can be clearly defined by the Polar Radius the distance from the circle center CC to the position and the Polar Angle the size of the angle between the reference axis and the line that connects the circle center CC with the position See figure at lower right Definition of pole and angle reference axis The pole is set by entering two Cartesian coordinates in one of the three planes These coordinates also set the reference axis for the polar angle PA XY X YZ Y ZX Z 30 4 Programming Fundamentals of NC File Management Programming Aids Pallet Management Absolute and relative workpiece positions Absolute workpiece positions Absolute coordinates are position coordinates that are referenced to the datum of the coordinate system origin Each position on the workpiece is uniquely defined by its absolute coordinates Example 1 Holes dimensioned in absolute coor
33. The tool will advance to the depth in one movement if the plunging depth equals the depth the plunging depth is greater than the depth Feed rate for plunging Traversing speed of the tool during penetration 1st side length 4 Pocket length parallel to the main axis of the working plane 2nd side length 5 Pocket width Feed rate F Traversing speed of the tool in the working plane HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 ZN A i TTL Example NC blocks 16 co Pockets Studs and Slots ing 8 3 Cycle o M Pockets Studs and Slots Direction of the milling path DR climb milling with M3 DR up cut milling with M3 Rounding radius Radius of the pocket corners If radius 0 is entered the pocket corners will be rounded with the radius of the cutter Calculations Stepover factork KxR where K is the overlap factor preset in machine parameter 7430 and R is the cutter radius POCKET FINISHING Cycle 212 1 The TNC automatically moves the tool in the tool axis to set up clearance or if programmed to the 2nd set up clearance and subsequently to the center of the pocket 2 From the pocket center the tool moves in the working plane to the starting point for machining The TNC takes the allowance and tool radius into account for calculating the starting point It necessary the TNC plunge cuts into the pocket center 3 If the tool is at the 2nd set up clearance it moves
34. Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute value Coordinate of the workpiece surface 2nd set up clearance Q204 incremental value Coordinate in the tool axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece clamping devices can Occur Disengaging direction 0 1 2 3 4 Q214 Determine the direction in which the TNC displaces the tool by the off center distance after spindle orientation Displace tool in the negative main axis direction Displace tool in the negative secondary axis direction Displace tool in the positive main axis direction f S Displace tool in the positive secondary axis direction Ts Danger of collision Check the position of the tool tip when you program a spindle orientation to O for example in the Positioning with Manual Data Input mode of operation Align the tool tip so that It is parallel to a coordinate axis Select a disengaging direction in which the tool can plunge into the hole without danger of collision 162 8 Programming Cycles TAPPING with a floating tap holder Cycle 2 1 The tool drills to the total hole depth in one movement 2 Once the tool has reached the total hole depth the direction of spindle rotation is reversed and the tool is retracted to the Starting position at the end of the DWELL TIME 3 At the starting position the direction of spindle rotation reverses once again L Before programming note the following Program a positioning block for the st
35. m 3 D view 284 11 Test Run and Program Run Limitations during program run A graphical representation of a running program is not possible if the microprocessor of the TNC is already occupied with complicated machining tasks or if large areas are being machined Example Multipass milling over the entire blank form with a large tool The TNC interrupts the graphics and displays the text ERROR in the graphics window The machining process is continued however Plan view DO Press the soft key for plan view Eas 32 Select the number of depth levels after shifting the soft key row You can choose between 16 or 32 shades of depth The deeper the surface the darker the shade Plan view is the fastest of the three graphic display modes Projection in 3 planes Similar to a workpiece drawing the part is displayed with a plan view and two sectional planes A symbol to the lower left indicates whether the display is in first angle or third angle projection according to ISO 6433 selected with MP7310 Details can be isolated in this display mode for magnification see Magnifying details In addition you can shift the sectional planes with the corresponding soft keys Press the soft key for projection in three planes a y proj p Shift the soft key row until the TNC displays the following soft keys Shift the vertical sectional plane to the right or left Shift the horizontal sectional plane upwards o
36. note the following The memory capacity for programming an SL cycle is limited For example you can program up to 128 straight line blocks in one SL cycle The algebraic sign for the depth parameter determines the working direction This cycle requires a centercut end mill ISO 1641 The cylinder must be set up centered on the rotary table The tool axis must be perpendicular to the rotary table If this is not the case the TNC will generate an error message Pre position tool in X axis Y for spindle axis on rotary table center before the cycle call This cycle can also be used in a tilted working plane The TNC checks whether the compensated and non compensated tool paths lie within the display range of the rotary axis which is defined in Machine Parameter 810 x If the error message Contour programming error is output set MP 810 x O 202 8 Programming Cycles 27 Milling depth Q1 incremental value Distance G between the cylindrical surface and the floor of the contour Finishing allowance for Q3 incremental value Finishing allowance in the plane of the unrolled cylindrical surface This allowance is effective in the direction of the radius compensation Set up clearance O6 incremental value Distance between the tool tip and the cylinder surface Plunging depth Q10 incremental value Dimension by which the tool plunges in each infeed Feed rate
37. restart the spindle with M3 or M4 Setup clearance f incremental value Distance between tool tip at starting position and workpiece surface Total hole depth 2 incremental value Distance between workpiece surface beginning of thread and Retracting after a program interruption end of thread If you interrupt program run during tapping with the machine stop button the TNC will display the soft PITCH key MANUAL OPERATION If you press the MANU Pitch of the thread The algebraic sign differentiates AL OPERATION key you can retract the tool under between right hand and left hand threads program control Simply press the positive axis right hand thread direction button of the active tool axis left hand thread 164 8 Programming Cycles THREAD CUTTING Cycle 18 7 Machine and control must be specially prepared by the machine tool builder to enable thread cutting Cycle 18 THREAD CUTTING is performed by means of spindle control The tool moves with the active spindle speed from its current position to the entered depth As soon as it reaches the end of thread spindle rotation is stopped Tool approach and departure must be programmed separately The most convenient way to do this is by using OEM cycles The machine tool builder can give you further information L Before programming note the following The TNC calculates the feed rate from the spindle speed If the spindle speed override is used dur
38. t 0 Ss e mD C Sem Lam g P m Decimal numbers Enter only the number Pure binary numbers Enter a percent sign before the number Hexadecimal numbers Enter a dollar sign before the number Example Instead of the decimal number 27 you can also enter the binary number 11011 or the hexadecimal number 1B The individual machine parameters can be entered in the different number systems Some machine parameters have more than one function The input value for these machine parameters is the sum of the individual values For these machine parameters the individual values are preceded by a plus sign Selecting general user parameters General user parameters are selected with code number 123 in the MOD functions The MOD functions also include machine specific user parameters 318 13 Tables and Overviews External data transfer Integrating TNC interfaces EXT1 5020 0 and EXT2 5020 1 to an external device MP5020 x 7 data bits ASCII code 8th bit parity 0 8 data bits ASCII code 9th bit parity 1 Block Check Character BCC any 0 Block Check Character BCC control character not permitted 2 Transmission stop through RTS active 4 Transmission stop through RTS inactive 0 Transmission stop through DCS active 8 Transmission stop through DC3 inactive 0 Character parity even 0 Character parity odd 16 Character parity not desired 0 Character parity desired
39. 3 Standard 4 4 File Management with Addition Functions 4 4 File Management with Additional Functions Directories To ensure that you can easily find your files we recommend that you organize your hard disk into directories You can divide a directory up into further directories which are called subdirectories Directory names The name of a directory can contain up to 8 characters and does not have an extension If you enter more than 8 characters for the directory name the TNC will shorten the name to 8 characters Paths A path indicates the drive and all directories and subdirectories under which a file is saved The individual names are separated by AUFTR1 the symbol NCPROG Example On drive TNC the directory AUFTR1 was created Under WZTAB this directory the subdirectory NCPROG was created and the part program PROG1 H copied into this subdirectory The part program now has the following path A35kK941 TNC AUFTR1 NCPROG PROG1 H ZYLM The chart at right illustrates an example of a directory display with TESTPROG different paths HUBER KAR25T 40 4 Programming Fundamentals of NC File Management Programming Aids Pallet Management Overview Functions of the expanded file manager COPY Copy and convert individual files 4 Display a specific file type e c 2 me 5 LL wo m r Nin m Lap Display the last 10 files that were selected ey DELE
40. 41 filets 914800 kbyte vacant PAGE PAGE COPY TNC EXT was e ej fe EIE Transfer a single file Press the COPY soft key or T i fil TAG Transfer several files Press aoe a dens TAG marking functions see table on right or Tag all files a ye transfer all files by pressing the TNC EXT soft Untag a single file DO A key l UNTAG Untag all files a COPY TAG Copy all tagged files A A 36 4 Programming Fundamentals of NC File Management Programming Aids Pallet Management Confirm with the EXECUTE or with the ENT key A status window appears on the TNC informing about the copying progress or _ a O c If you wish to transfer more than one file or longer files press the PARALLEL EXECUTE soft key The TNC then copies the file in the background Ee To stop transfer press the TNC soft key The P rhe standard file manager window is displayed 5 again c 15 V M Selecting one of the last 10 files selected Programming and editing FR 0 MAN Ea Calling the file manager 1 TNC NK XSCRDP 3507 H 2 TNC NK SCRDP 1GB H 3 TNC NK SCRDP 3516 H 4 TNC NK SCRDP 35071 H 5 TNC NK SCRDP BLK H LAST Display the last 10 files selected Press LAST G TNC FRAESEN CDT FILES soft key 7 TNC FRAESEN A 8 TNC WTAB FRAESER CDT 9 TNC CUTTING FRAESER CDT Use the arrow keys to move the highlight to the file you wish to select SELECT Move the highlight up or down t
41. CCY 20 mm Resulting NC blocks HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 227 N Q gt Q Q J Home Oo i e fam Pu ordinate Transformation Cycles WORKING PLANE Cycle 19 m The functions for tilting the working plane are interfaced lt to the TNC and the machine tool by the machine tool builder With some swivel heads and tilting tables the machine tool builder determines whether the entered angles are interpreted as coordinates of the tilt axes or as solid angles Your machine manual provides more detailed information The working plane is always tilted around the active datum fi The fundamentals of this TNC function are described in section 2 5 Tilting the Working Plane It is important that you read through this section thoroughly Effect In Cycle 19 you define the position of the working plane by entering tilt angles The entered angles describe either the individual positions of the tilting axes see figure to the upper right or the angular components of a spatial vector see figures at center and lower right If you program the angular components of the spatial vector the TNC automatically calculates the angular position of the tilt axes The position of the spatial vector that is the position of the tool axis is calculated by the TNC by rotating the machine based coordinate system The axes are always rotated in the same sequence
42. Contours Closed contours You can identify the beginning and end of a closed contour with the CLSD soft key This reduces the number of possible solutions for the last contour element Enter CLSD as an addition to another contour data entry in the first and last blocks of an FK section Converting FK programs You can convert an FK program into HEIDENHAIN conversational format by using the file manager Call the file manager and display the files Move the highlight to the file you wish to convert Press the soft keys MORE FUNCTIONS and then i CONVERT FK gt H The TNC converts all FK blocks into HEIDENHAIN dialog blocks HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 125 6 6 Path Contours FK i ia Programming O t S O O shoe 0 S gt e a a Oo 6 6 Path Contours FK Free 26 Define the workpiece blank Define the tool tool call Retract the tool Pre position the tool Move to working depth Approach the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection FK contour Program all known data for each contour element Depart the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection Retract in the tool axis end program 6 Programming Programming Contours HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 Define the workpiece blank Define the tool tool call Retract the tool Pre position the tool Pre position th
43. FORM 2 K 9 Y 90 2 0 TOOL CALL 1 2 81400 L 2 5 RO F MAX CALL LBL 1 L 2 100 RO F MAX M2 LBL 1 L X 0 8 RL F250 FPOL K Y 0 FC DR R80 CCK CCY 0 FCT DR R 5 FCT DR R90 CC 69 282 CCY 40 FSELECT 2 Vorschlag 1 entsprich Select the soft key row for detail magnification reduction second row see figure at right The following functions are available Show and move the frame overlay Press and hold the desired soft key to move the frame overlay g Programs O 1 2 3 4 5 6 gt 8 9 t nicht der zeichnung WINDOL WINDOW f lt lt gt gt BLK FORM DETAIL A AE Sum q4 a j Reduce the frame overlay press and lt lt hold the soft key to reduce the detail Enlarge the frame overlay press and S gt hold the soft key to magnify the detail T With the WINDOW DETAIL soft key Confirm the selected area With the WINDOW BLK FORM soft key you can restore the original section m M l i 1 j 4 7 Structuring Programs jai ee BEGIN PGM 1GB MM BEGIN PGM 1GB This TNC function enables you to comment part programs in BLK FORM 0 1 Z X Y 0 Z 40 Make hole pattern ID 27943KL1 structuring blocks Structuring blocks are short texts with up to 244 abe HORE tee eee Perey erent characters and are used as comments or headlines for the subse Senne ee i TOOL CALL 1 2 84500 Rough out quent program lines L z 100 RO F MAX Finishing i i i i CYCL DEF 203 UNIVERSAL BOHREN Mak
44. GEOMETRY in a main program Pockets A and B overlap The TNC calculates the points of intersection S4 and S they do not have to be programmed The pockets are programmed as full circles Subprogram 1 Left pocket Subprogram 2 Right pocket HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 193 8 5 SL Cycles 8 5 SL Cycles E oP PY A 3 a DT Z Do2 n Q Fi gt Oo Dg 7 gt wo z OD 2 a gO o 7a a o 3 o o 3 ww D ot p et Dp 2 9 WG gt FS a P a U 2 0 2 2 O 5 O Z D Z feb Oo O D O o lt Ww Area of inclusion Both surfaces A and B are to be machined including the mutually overlapped area E The surfaces A and B must be pockets H The first pocket in Cycle 14 must start outside the second pocket Surface A Surface B Surface A Surface B 94 8 Programming Cycles Area of intersection Only the area overlapped by both A and B is to be machined The areas covered by A or B alone are to be left unmachined A and B must be pockets A must start inside of B Surface A N ZC O 0 UJ CONTOUR DATA Cycle 20 Machining data for the subprograms describing the subcontours are entered in Cycle 20 Before programming note the following Cycle 20 is DEF active which means that it becomes effective as soon as it is defined in the part program
45. HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 5 2 Tool Data Tool radius R You can enter the tool radius R directly Delta values for lengths and radii Delta values are offsets in the length and radius of a tool A positive delta value describes a tool oversize DL DR DR2 gt 0 If you are programming the machining data with an allowance enter the oversize value in the TOOL CALL block of the part program A negative delta value describes a tool undersize DL DR DR2 lt 0 An undersize is entered in the tool table for wear Delta values are usually entered as numerical values In a TOOL CALL block you can also assign the values to Q parameters Inout range You can enter a delta value with up to 99 999 mm Entering tool data into the program The number length and radius of a specific tool is defined in the TOOL DEF block of the part program To select tool definition press the TOOL DEF key DEF Enter the Tool number Each tool is uniquely identified by its number Enter the tool length Enter the compensation value for the tool length Enter the Tool radius E In the programming dialog you can transfer the value for tool length directly into the input line with the actual position capture key You only need to make sure that the highlight in the status display is placed on the tool axis Resulting NC block 70 5 Programming Tools Entering tool data in tables You can define and store up to 3
46. HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 153 8 2 Drilling Cycles 8 2 Drilling Cycles The TNC offers 9 cycles for all types of drilling operations 1 PECKING Without automatic pre positioning 200 DRILLING With automatic pre positioning and 2nd set up clearance 201 REAMING With automatic pre positioning and 2nd set up clearance 202 BORING With automatic pre positioning and 2nd set up clearance 203 UNIVERSAL DRILLING With automatic pre positioning 2nd setup clearance chip breaking and decrement 204 BACK BORING With automatic pre positioning 2nd set up clearance 2 TAPPING With a floating tap holder 17 RIGID TAPPING Without a floating tap holder 18 THREAD CUTTING 154 Nis NS N N e _ SS N i SS N Nis AS 204 F 8 Programming Cycles PECKING Cycle 1 1 The tool drills from the current position to the first plunging depth at the programmed feed rate F 2 When it reaches the first plunging depth the tool retracts in rapid traverse FMAX to the starting position and advances again to the first plunging depth minus the advanced stop distance t 3 The advanced stop distance is automatically calculated by the control At a total hole depth of up to 30 mm t 0 6 mm At a total hole depth exceeding 30 mm t hole depth 50 Maximum advanced stop distance 7 mm 4 The tool then advances with another infeed at the programmed feed rate F 5 The TNC repeats th
47. M201 outputs the voltage in dependence on the distance to be covered The TNC increases or decreases the current voltage linearly to the value programmed for V Input range O to 9 999 V Effect M201 remains in effect until a new voltage is output through M200 M201 M202 M203 or M204 Output voltage as a function of speed M202 The TNC outputs the voltage as a function of speed In the machine parameters the machine tool builder defines up to three characteristic curves FNR in which specific feed rates are assigned to specific voltages Use miscellaneous function M202 to select the curve FNR from which the TNC is to determine the output voltage Input range 1 to 3 Effect M202 remains in effect until a new voltage is output through M200 M201 M202 M203 or M204 HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 Output voltage as a function of time time dependent ramp M203 The TNC outputs the voltage V as a function of the time TIME The TNC increases or decreases the current voltage linearly to the value programmed for V within the time programmed for TIME Input range Voltage V O to 9 999 Volt TIME O to 1 999 seconds Effect M203 remains in effect until a new voltage is output through M200 M201 M202 M203 or M204 Output voltage as a function of time time dependent pulse M204 The TNC outputs a programmed voltage as a pulse with a programmed duration TIME Input range Voltage V O to 9 999 Volt TIME O to 1 999 seconds
48. MP7267 0 Tool number T 0 to 5 MP7267 1 Special tool ST 0 to 5 MP7267 2 Fixed pocket F 0 to 5 MP7267 3 Pocket locked L 0 to 5 MP7267 4 PLC status PLC 0 to 5 MP7270 Display feed rate F only if an axis direction button is pressed 0 Display feed rate F even if no axis direction button is pressed feed rate defined using F soft key or feed rate of the slowest axis 1 MP7280 The decimal character is a comma 0 The decimal character is a point 1 MP7285 Display is referenced to the tool datum 0 Display in the tool axis is referenced to the tool face 1 MP7290 0 0 1 mm 0 0 05 mm 1 0 001 mm 4 0 01 mm 2 0 0005 mm 5 0 005 mm 3 0 0001 mm 6 MP7290 1 For input values see MP7290 0 MP7290 2 For input values see MP7290 0 MP7290 3 For input values see MP7290 0 MP7290 4 For input values see MP7290 0 327 e aa q4 0 Sms N _ C So c g a m q 13 1 General User Parameters Display step for the 6th axis Display step for the 7th axis Display step for the 8th axis Display step for the 9th axis Disable datum setting Disable datum setting with the orange axis keys Reset status display Q parameters and tool data 328 MP7290 5 For input values see MP7290 0 MP7290 6 For input values see MP7290 0 MP7290 7 For input values see MP7290 0 MP7290 8 For input values see MP7290 0 MP7295 Do not disable datum
49. PAGE BEGIN END RESTORE P B es Go to the end of the program T gt a iL A 11 3 Test run In the Test Run mode of operation you can simulate programs and program sections to prevent errors from occurring during program 5 run The TNC checks the programs for the following e Geometrical incompatibilities Missing data Impossible jumps Violation of the machine s working space The following functions are also available Blockwise test run Interrupt test at any block Optional block skip 11 2 Functions for Functions for graphic simulation Measuring the machining time Additional status display HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 289 e Running a program test If the central tool file is active a tool table must be active status S Ce to run a program test Select a tool table via the file manager PGM 4 MGT in the Test Run mode of operation N With the MOD function BLANK INWORD SPACE you can activate k work space monitoring for the test run see Chapter 12 MOD v Functions Showing the Workpiece in the Working Space q Select the Test Run mode of operation Call the file manager with the PGM MGT key and select the file you wish to test or Go to the program beginning Select line 0 with the GOTO key and confirm you entry with the ENT key The TNC then displays the following soft keys BEGIN PGM AYD_DAU MM oe START 1 BLK FORM 1 Z X Y Q 2 20 Test each program block individually gt
50. Polar radius polar angle of the straight line end point Circular arc CP P Circular path around circle center Polar angle of the arc end point pole CC to arc end point direction of rotation Circular arc CTP err P Circular path with tangential Polar radius polar angle of the connection to the preceding arc end point contour element Helical interpolation P Combination of a circular and a Polar radius polar angle of the linear movement arc end point coordinate of the end point in the tool axis Polar coordinate origin Pole CC You can define the pole CC anywhere in the part program before Y blocks containing polar coordinates Enter the pole in Cartesian coordinates as a circle center in a CC block ge Coordinates CC Enter Cartesian coordinates for the pole or If you want to use the last programmed position do y not enter any coordinates ay 112 6 Programming Programming Contours Straight line LP The tool moves in a straight line from its current position to the straight line end point The starting point is the end point of the preceding block Polarcoordinates radius PR Enter the distance from the pole CC to the straight line end point gt Polarcoordinates angle PA Angular position of the straight line end point between 360 and 360 The sign of PA depends on the angle reference axis Angle from angle reference axis to PR is counterclockwise PA gt 0 Angle from angle ref
51. Press the MANUAL OPERATI ON soft key Move the axes with the machine axis direction buttons Resuming program run after an interruption If you interrupt a program run during execution of a subprogram or program section repeat use the RESTORE POS AT N function to return to the position at which the program run was interrupted When a program run is interrupted the TNC stores The data of the last defined tool E Active coordinate transformations The coordinates of the circle center that was last defined HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 293 aa i O fo am gt c 5 cc z Bam O Dm A lt The stored data are used for returning the tool to the contour after manual machine axis positioning during an interruption RESTORE POSITION Resuming program run with the START button You can resume program run by pressing the machine START button if the program was interrupted in one of the following ways The machine STOP button was pressed A programmed interruption Resuming program run after an error If the error message is not blinking Remove the cause of the error To clear the error message from the screen press the CE key Restart the program or resume program run at the place at which it was interrupted If the error message s blinking Press and hold the END key for two seconds This induces a TNC system restart Remove the cause of the error Start again
52. TNC interrupts program run and generates an error message Although you can use M97 to inhibit the error message see Machining small contour steps M97 this will result in dwell marks and will also move the corner If the programmed contour contains undercut features the tool may damage the contour See figure at right Behavior with M120 The TNC checks radius compensated paths for contour undercuts and tool path intersections and calculates the tool path in advance from the current block Areas of the contour that might be damaged by the tool are not machined dark areas in figure at right You can also use M120 to calculate the radius compensation for digitized data or data created on an external programming system This means that deviations from the theoretical tool radius can be compensated Use LA Look Ahead behind M120 to define the number of blocks maximum 99 that you want the TNC to calculate in advance Note that the larger the number of blocks you choose the higher the block processing time will be 142 7 Programming Miscellaneous functions Input If you enter M120 in a positioning block the TNC continues the dialog for this block by asking you the number of blocks LA that are to be calculated in advance Effect M120 must be located in an NC block that also contains radius compensation RL or RR M120 is then effective from this block until radius compensation is canceled or M120 LA
53. Word W O to 2047 Double word D 2048 to 4095 The following conditions are permitted in the FN 20 block Equals Less than lt Greater than gt Less than or equal lt Greater than or equal Example Stop program run until the PLC sets marker 4095 to 1 HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 FN25 PRESET Setting a new datum I This function can only be programmed if you have entered the code number 555343 see 12 3 Entering Code Number With the function FN 25 PRESET it is possible to set a new datum in an axis of choice during program run To select the Q parameter function press the Q key at the right in the keypad for numerical input The Q parameter functions are displayed in a soft key row Select the miscellaneous functions press the DIVERSE FUNCTION soft key Select FN25 Switch the soft key row to the second level press the FN25 DATUM SET soft key Axis Enter the axis where you wish to set the new datum and confirm with ENT Value to be calculated Enter the coordinate for the new datum point in the active coordinate system New datum Enter the value that the new datum point will have in the new coordinate system Example Set a new datum at the current coordinate X 100 Example The current coordinate Z 50 will have the value 20 in the new coordinate system 269 ions Funct 10 8 Add 10 9 Entering Formulas Directly 10 9 Entering Formulas Directly You can enter mathemat
54. Y 153 700 Z 19 203 button B 32 500 C 45 000 To return to the contour proceed as described below Klar F in Returning to the contour BEGIN RESTORE 0 TOOL fi POS AT F MAX i OFF ON TABLE HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 295 Returning to the contour With the RESTORE POSITION function the TNC returns to the workpiece contour in the following situations Return to the contour after the machine axes were moved during a program interruption that was not performed with the INTERNAL STOP function Return to the contour after a block scan with RESTORE POS AT N for example after an interruption with INTERNAL STOP To select a return to contour press the RESTORE POSITION soft key To move the axes in the sequence that the TNC suggests on the screen press the machine START button 11 5 Optional Block Skip To move the axes in any sequence press the soft keys RESTORE X RESTORE Z etc and activate each axis with the machine START key To resume machining press the machine START key 11 5 Optional block skip In a test run or program run the TNC can skip over blocks that begin with a slash To run or test the program without the blocks lsd preceded by a slash set the soft key to ON ai To run or test the program with the blocks preceded 7 ON by a slash set the soft key to OFF Iz This function does not work for TOOL DEF blocks After a power interruption the TNC returns to the most re
55. a dwell time is entered the tool will pause at the top of the bore hole and will then be retracted from the hole again The TNC carries out another oriented spindle stop and the tool is once again displaced by the off center distance 6 The TNC moves the tool at the pre positioning feed rate to the set up clearance and then if entered to the 2nd set up clearance with FMAX HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 161 8 2 Drilling Cycles 8 2 Drilling Cycles Set up clearance Q200 incremental value Distance between tool tio and workpiece surface Z N Ry E E Depth of counterbore Q249 incremental value Distance between underside of workpiece and the top of the hole A positive sign means the hole will be bored in the positive spindle axis direction Material thickness Q250 incremental value Thickness of the workpiece Q200 ae Q200 a Off center distance Q251 incremental value Off center distance for the boring bar value from tool data sheet Q250 Tool edge height Q252 incremental value Distance between the underside of the boring bar and the main cutting tooth value from tool data sheet Feed rate for pre positioning Q253 Traversing speed of the tool when moving in and out of the workpiece In mm min Feed rate for counterboring Q254 Traversing speed of the tool during counterboring in mm min Dwell time Q255 Dwell time in seconds at the top of the bore hole
56. and C The respective corresponding axis must then be programmed in the spline parameter K e g K3A 0 0953 K2A 0 441 K1A 0 5724 If the absolute value of a spline parameter K becomes greater than 9 999 999 99 then the post processor must output K in exponential notation e g K3X 1 2750 E2 The TNC can execute a program with spline blocks even when the working plane is tilted Input ranges Spline end point 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Spline parameter K 9 999 999 99 to 9 999 999 99 Exponent for spline parameter K 255 to 255 whole number HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 131 Functions M and STOP Bis Q Bt O Lam I q Lam LLI N 7 1 Entering Miscellaneous Functions M and STOP With the TNC s miscellaneous functions also called M functions you can affect Program run e g a program interruption Machine functions such as switching spindle rotation and coolant supply on and off Contouring behavior of the tool 7 The machine tool builder may add some M functions that are not described in this User s Manual Your machine manual provides more detailed information M functions are always entered at the end of a positioning block The TNC then displays the following dialog question You usually enter only the number of the M function in the programming dialog Some M functions can be programmed with additional parameters In this case the dialog is continued for the parameter
57. angle of tool traverse along the helix in incremental dimensions After entering the angle identify the tool axis with an axis selection key Enter the coordinate for the height of the helix in incremental dimensions Direction of rotation DR Clockwise helix DR Counterclockwise helix DR Radius compensation RL RR RO Enter the radius compensation according to the table above Example NC blocks HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 115 6 5 Path contd Polar Coordinates 16 Define the workpiece blank Define the tool tool call Define the datum for polar coordinates Retract the tool Pre position the tool Move to working depth Approach the contour at point 1 on a circular arc with tangential connection Move to point 2 Move to point 3 Move to point 4 Move to point 5 Move to point 6 Move to point 1 Depart the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection Retract in the tool axis end program 6 Programming Programming Contours z O C ot a ot 2 y 49 a oO D O 49 ot 2 eb O 99 lt a Cc F O Yn HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 D x Sar Define the workpiece blank Define the tool tool call Retract the tool Pre position the tool Transter the last programmed position as the pole Move to working depth Approach the contour on a circular arc with tangential co
58. as the TNC You defined the TNC as a router The device name is either too long or It contains illegal characters You have already defined a device with this name You have attempted to connect more than seven network drives to the TNC The value that you entered for DEFINE MOUNT RS is too small The TNC sets RS to 512 bytes The value that you entered for DEFINE MOUNT RS is too large The TNC sets RS to 4096 bytes 309 S e S Pu am Sl al oe rar LLI LO N Q Error message Case amp NFS2 lt Device name gt W WRITESIZE SMALLER THEN x SET TO x The value that you entered for DEFINE D MOUNT WS is too small The TNC sets WS to E 512 bytes NFS2 lt Device name gt W WRITESIZE LARGER THEN x SET TO x The value that you entered for DEFINE 4 MOUNT WS is too large The TNC sets WS to 4096 bytes D NFS2 lt Device name gt E MOUNTPATH TOO LONG The value that you entered for DEFINE lt MOUNT PATH is too long tu NFS2 lt Device name gt E NOT ENOUGH MEMORY At the moment there is too little main memory available to establish a network connection Lo NFS2 lt Device name gt E HOSTNAME TOO LONG The name you entered in DEFINE NET HOST h is too long NFS2 lt Device name gt E CAN NOT OPEN PORT The TNC cannot open the port required to establish the network connection NFS2 lt Device name gt E ERROR FROM PORTMAPPER The TNC has received implausible data from the port
59. bytes Selecting a file STATUS Property of the file Calling the file manager E A a pa me Programming and Editing mode of operation Use the arrow keys to move the highlight to the file you wish to select S Program is in the Test Run Move the highlight Up OF down mode of operation M Program is in a N or Select a file Press the SELECT soft key Program Run mode of or ENT operation P File is protected against editing and erasure Protected Move pagewise up through PAGE the file directory t Move pagewise down through the file directory J 34 4 Programming Fundamentals of NC File Management Programming Aids Pallet Management Deleting a file Calling the file manager Use the arrow keys to move the highlight to the file you wish to delete Move the highlight up or down DELETE 3 Delete a file Press the DELETE soft key YES Press the YES soft key to confirm or the NO soft key to abort Copying a file Calling the file manager Use the arrow keys to move the highlight to the file you wish to copy Move the highlight up or down COPY pag xv2 Copy a file Press the COPY soft key Enter the name of the new file and confirm your entry with the ENT key or EXECUTE soft key A status window appears on the TNC informing about the copying progress As long as the TNC is Copying you can no longer work or If you wish to copy very long programs enter the new file name and confirm
60. coordinates are Pallet tables contain the following information PAL PGM entry obligatory Identification for pallet or NC program c N ae vr Select beginning of table Select end of table male ES D e m Es D e m Select next page in table INSERT referenced to the pallet datum Insert the last line in the table ere If you have not defined a pallet before an NC program a DELETE the programmed coordinates are then referenced to the Delete the last line in the table LINE machine datum If you do not define an entry the datum that was set manually remains active NEXT Go to the beginning of the next line INE To select a pallet table Call the file manager in the Programming and Editing or Program Add the entered number of lines diaa Run mode Press the PGM MGT key to the end of the table N LINES Display all P files Press the soft keys SELECT TYPE and o SHOW P Copy the highlighted field COPY l l 2nd soft key row FIELD Select a pallet table with the arrow keys or enter a new file name to create a new table Insert the copied field PASTE Confirm your entry with the ENT key Ond so ikkey ron ae HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 65 To leave the pallet file To select the file manager press the Taste PGM MGT key To select a different type of file press the SELECT TYPE soft key and the soft key for the desired Tile type for example SHOVW H Select the desired file N
61. copy this file to the TNC the TNC asks if you wish to overwrite the existing TOOL T tool table If you press the YES soft key the TNC will completely overwrite the current TOOL T tool table After this copying process the new TOOL T table consists of 10 lines The only remaining columns in the table are tool number tool length and tool radius If you press the REPLACE FIELDS soft key the TNC merely overwrites the first 10 lines of the columns number length and radius in the TOOL T file The files of the remaining lines and columns are not changed by the TNC You can also overwrite individual lines provided that the file to be copied contains the corresponding line numbers Copying a directory Move the highlight in the left window onto the directory you want to copy Press the COPY DIR soft key instead of the COPY soft key Subdirectories are also copied at the same time HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 45 4 4 File Management with _ f Functions 4 4 File Management with adit Functions Selecting one of the last 10 files selected Calling the file manager Display the last 10 files selected Press LAST s FILES soft key Use the arrow keys to move the highlight to the file you wish to select Move the highlight up or down SELECT or Select a file Press the SELECT soft key or ENT Deleting a file Move the highlight to the file you want to delete DELETE To select the erasing function pr
62. current position to the straight line end point The starting point is the end point of the preceding block Le Enter the coordinates of the end point for the line Further entries if necessary Radius compensation RL RR RO Feed rate F Miscellaneous function M Example NC blocks Actual position capture You can also generate a straight line block L block by using the actual position capture key In the Manual Operation mode move the tool to the position you wish to capture Switch the screen display to Programming and Editing Select the program block after which you want to insert the L block Press the actual position capture key The TNC generates an L block with the actual position coordinates a In the MOD function you define the number of axes that the TNC saves in an L block see Chapter 14 MOD Functions section Selecting the Axes for Generating L Blocks Inserting a chamfer CHF between two straight lines The chamfer enables you to cut off corners at the intersection of two straight lines The blocks before and after the CHF block must be in the same working plane The radius compensation before and after the chamfer block must be the same An inside chamfer must be large enough to accommodate the current tool Chamfer side length Enter the length of the chamfer Further entries if necessary Feed rate F only effective in CHF block Please observe the notes on the next page HEIDENH
63. display a soft key with which you can retract the tool HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 Example NC blocks 163 8 2 Drilling Cycles RIGID TAPPING Cycle 17 lt Machine and control must be specially prepared by the S machine tool builder to enable rigid tapping The TNC cuts the thread without a floating tap holder in one or more passes Rigid tapping offers the following advantages over tapping with a floating tap holder 8 2 Drilling Cycles Higher machining speeds possible Repeated tapping of the same thread is possible repetitions are enabled via spindle orientation to the 0 position during cycle call depending on machine parameter 7160 Increased traverse range of the spindle axis due to absence of a floating tap holder Program a positioning block for the starting point hole center in the working plane with radius compensation RO E Before programming note the following Example NC blocks Program a positioning block for the starting point in the tool axis set up clearance above the workpiece surface The algebraic sign for the parameter total hole depth determines the working direction The TNC calculates the feed rate from the spindle speed If the spindle speed override is used during tapping the feed rate is automatically adjusted The feed rate override knob is disabled At the end of the cycle the spindle comes to a stop Before the next operation
64. for calculating circles Logical comparisons greater than less than equal to not equal to c or O u5 i 2 Cc co D M m q TNC Specifications Block processing time 4 milliseconds per block Control loop cycle time TNC 426 CB TNC 430 CA Contouring interpolation 3 ms Fine interpolation 0 6 ms contour TNC 426 PB TNC 430 PB Contouring interpolation 3 ms Fine interpolation 0 6 ms speed Data transfer rate Maximum 115 200 baud via V 24 V 11 Maximum 1 megabaud via Ethernet interface optional Ambient temperature Operation 0 C to 445 C 32 to 113 F Storage 30 C to 70 C 22 to 158 F Traverse range Maximum 100 m 2540 in Traversing speed Maximum 300 m min 11 811 ipm Spindle speed Maximum 99 999 rom Input range Minimum 0 1 um 0 000 01 In or 0 0001 Maximum 99 999 999 mm 3937 in oF 99 999 999 HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 339 13 4 Exchanging the Buffer Battery 13 4 Exchanging the Buffer Battery A buffer battery supplies the TNC with current to prevent the data in RAM memory from being lost when the TNC is switched off If the TNC displays the error message Exchange buffer battery then you must replace the batteries The buffer batteries are located next to the power supply unit in the logic unit round black case The TNC also has an power storage device that provide the control with current while you are exchanging the batteries for a maximum of
65. for next arc Update rotational position in the plane Reset solid angle Activate new rotational position Unfinished If not finished return to label 1 Reset the rotation Reset the datum shift End of subprogram 281 10 11 Programming Examples 11 1 Graphics In the program run modes of operation as well as in the Test Run mode the TNC provides the following three display modes Using soft keys select whether you desire Plan view Projection in 3 planes 11 1 Graphics 3 D view The TNC graphic depicts the workpiece as if it were being machined with a cylindrical end mill If a tool table is active you can also simulate the machining operation with a spherical cutter For this purpose enter R2 R in the tool table The TNC will not show a graphic if the current program has no valid blank form definition no program is selected With machine parameters 7315 to 7317 you can have the TNC display a graphic even if no tool axis is defined or moved E A graphic simulation is not possible for program sections or programs in which rotary axis movements or a tilted working plane are defined In this case the TNC will display an error message The TNC graphic does not show a radius oversize DR that has been programmed in the TOOL CALL block Overview of display modes The TNC displays the following soft keys in the program run and Test Run modes of operation Plan view Projection in 3 planes E
66. from the last contour point P c to the end point Py The line lies in the extension of the last contour element Py is located at the distance LEN from Pe Program the last contour element with the end point Pe and radius compensation Initiate the dialog with the APPR DEP key and DEP LT soft key LEN Enter the distance from the last contour element Pe to the end point Py v bm T Q m To O Example NC blocks Last contour element Pe with radius compensation Depart contour by LEN 12 5 mm Retract in Z return to block 1 end program 6 3 Contour A Departing on a straight line perpendicular to the last contour point DEP LN The tool moves on a straight line trom the last contour point Pe to the end point Py The line departs on a perpendicular path from the last contour point Pe Py is separated from Pe by the distance LEN plus the tool radius Program the last contour element with the end point Pe and radius compensation Initiate the dialog with the APPR DEP key and DEP LN soft key LEN Enter the distance from the last contour element Pe to the end point Py Important Always enter LEN as a positive value Example NC blocks Last contour element Pe with radius compensation Depart perpendicular to contour by LEN 20 mm Retract in Z return to block 1 end program 100 6 Programming Programming Contours Departing tangentially on a circular a
67. have to be a multiple of the plunging depth Dwell time at top Q210 Time in seconds that the tool remains at set up clearance after having been retracted from the hole for chip release 156 JA Z Cyt Example NC blocks 8 Programming Cycles Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute value Coordinate of the workpiece surface 2nd set up clearance Q204 incremental value Coordinate in the tool axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece clamping devices can Occur REAMING Cycle 201 1 The TNC positions the tool in the tool axis at rapid traverse FMAX to the programmed set up clearance above the workpiece surface 2 The tool reams to the entered depth at the programmed feed rate F 3 If programmed the tool remains at the hole bottom for the entered dwell time 4 The tool then retracts to set up clearance at the feed rate F and from there if programmed to the 2nd set up clearance in FMAX I Before programming note the following Program a positioning block for the starting point hole center in the working plane with RADIUS COMPENSATION RO The algebraic sign for the depth parameter determines the working direction 201 fj Set up clearance Q200 incremental value Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface SS Depth Q201 incremental value Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of hole Feed rate for plunging Q206 Traversing speed of th
68. incremental value Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface Depth Q201 incremental value Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of slot gt Feed rate for milling Q207 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min while milling gt Plunging depth Q202 incremental value Total extent by which the tool is fed in the tool axis during a reciprocating movement Machining operation 0 1 2 Q215 Define the extent of machining 0 Roughing and finishing 1 Roughing only 2 Finishing only gt Workpiece SURFACE COORDINATE Q203 absolute value Coordinate of the workpiece surface gt 2nd set up clearance Q204 incremental value Z coordinate at which no collision between tool and workpiece clamping devices can occur gt Center in 1st axis Q216 absolute value Center of the slot in the main axis of the working plane Center in 2nd axis Q217 absolute value Center of the slot in the secondary axis of the working plane First side length Q218 value parallel to the main axis of the working plane Enter the length of the slot gt Second side length 0219 value parallel to the secondary axis of the working plane Enter the slot width If you enter a slot width that equals the tool diameter the TNC will carry out the roughing process only slot milling gt Angle of rotation Q224 absolute value Angle by which the entire slot is rotated The center of rotation lies in the center
69. input In the operating modes Manual and Electronic Handwheel you enter the miscellaneous functions with the soft key M Please note that some F functions become effective at the start of a positioning block and others at the end M functions come into effect in the block in which they are called Unless the M function is only effective blockwise it is canceled in a subsequent block or at the end of the program Some M functions are effective only in the block in which they are called Entering an M function in a STOP block If you program a STOP block the program run or test run is interrupted at the block for example for tool inspection You can also enter an M function in a STOP block To program an interruption of program run press the STOP key Enter miscellaneous function M Example NC block 134 7 Programming Miscellaneous functions 7 2 Miscellaneous Functions for Pro gram Run Control Spindle and Coolant Moo Stop program run Block end Spindle STOP Coolant OFF M02 Stop program run Block end Spindle STOP Coolant OFF Go to block 1 Clear the status display dependent on machine parameter 7300 M03 Spindle ON clockwise Block start M04 Spindle ON counterclockwise Block start M05 Spindle STOP Block end M06 Tool change Block end Spindle STOP Program run stop dependent on machine parameter 7440 M08 Coolant ON Block start M09 Coolant OFF Block end M13 Spindle ON clockwise Block start Coolan
70. island You can check the machining parameters during a program interruption and overwrite them if required 96 8 Programming Cycles PILOT DRILLING Cycle 21 When calculating the infeed points the TNC does not account for the delta value DR programmed in a TOOL CALL block Process Same as Cycle 1 Pecking see 8 2 Drilling Cycles Application Cycle 21 is for PILOT DRILLING of the cutter infeed points It accounts for the allowance for side and the allowance for floor as well as the radius of the rough out tool The cutter infeed points also serve as Starting points for roughing ag Plunging depth Q10 incremental value ZL Dimension by which the tool drills in each infeed negative sign for negative working direction Feed rate for plunging Q11 Traversing speed in mm min during drilling gt Rough out tool number Q13 Tool number of the roughing mill Example NC blocks HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 197 8 5 SL Cycles 8 5 SL Cycles ROUGH OUT Cycle 22 1 The TNC positions the tool over the cutter infeed point taking the allowance for side into account 2 In the first plunging depth the tool mills the contour from inside outward at the milling feed rate 3 First the island contours C and D in the figure at right are rough milled until the pocket contour A B is approached 4 Then the pocket contour is rough milled and th
71. line gt Spacing in 2nd axis Q238 incremental Spacing between the individual lines Number of columns Q242 Number of machining operations on a line Number of lines Q243 Number of passes gt Angle of rotation Q224 absolute value Angle by which the entire pattern is rotated The center of rotation lies in the starting point Set up clearance Q200 incremental value Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute value Coordinate of the workpiece surface gt 2nd set up clearance Q204 incremental value Coordinate in the tool axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece clamping devices can Occur Q225 8 Programming Cycles HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 Define the workpiece blank Define the tool Call the tool Retract the tool Cycle definition drilling 189 Point Patterns ining E S S Oo t 2 7 CYCL DEF 220 POLAR PATTERN Define cycle for circular pattern 1 CYCL 200 is called automatically T Q216 30 CENTER IN 1ST AXIS 0200 Q203 and Q204 are effective as defined in Cycle 220 t Q217 70 CENTER IN 2ND AXIS Q244 50 PITCH CIRCLE DIA 7 Q245 0 STARTING ANGLE ma amp Q246 360 STOPPING ANGLE Q247 0 STEPPING ANGLE A Q241 10 NR OF REPETITIONS Q200 2 SET UP CLEARANCE t Se S Q204 100 2ND SET UP CL
72. negative secondary axis direction Retract tool in the positive main axis direction gt eS NY SS Retract tool in the positive secondary axis direction Ys Danger of collision Check the position of the tool tip when you program a spindle orientation to O for example in the Positioning with Manual Data Input mode of operation Align the tool tip so that it is parallel to a coordinate axis Select a disengaging direction in which the tool moves away trom the edge of the hole UNIVERSAL DRILLING Cycle 203 1 The TNC positions the tool in the tool axis at rapid traverse FMAX to the programmed set up clearance above the workpiece Surface 2 The tool drills to the first plunging depth at the programmed feed rate F 3 If you have programmed chip breaking the tool then retracts by the setup clearance If you are working without chip breaking the tool retracts at the RETRACTION FEED RATE to setup clearance remains there if programmed for the entered dwell time and advances again in FMAX to the setup clearance above the first PLUNGING DEPTH 4 The tool then advances with another infeed at the programmed feed rate If programmed the plunging depth is decreased after each infeed by the decrement 5 The TNC repeats this process 2 to 4 until the programmed total hole depth is reached 6 The tool remains at the hole bottom if programmed for the entered DWELL TIME to cut free and then retracts to set up clear
73. network optional then use tile management with additional functions aL oa c am Files When you write a part program on the TNC you must first enter a FilesintheTNC Type file name The TNC then stores the program on the hard disk as a Proarams file with this name You can also store texts and tables as files hee b in HEIDENHAIN conversational format H The TNC provides a special file management window in which you in ISO format l can easily find and manage your files Here you can call copy rename and erase files Tables for gt You can manage any number of files on the TNC s hard disk Their Tools T total size however must not exceed 1500 MB Pallets P File names a a E The name of a file can have up to 16 characters When you store ios Sagan ie 7 ea N programs tables and texts as files the TNC adds an extension to E g S q the file name separated by a point This extension identifies the file Cutting data CDT type see table at right Cutting materials and other materials TAB PRO GZO H Texte as ASCII files A File name File type Data security We recommend saving newly written programs and files on a PC at regular intervals You can do this with the cost free backup program TNCBACK EXE from HEIDENHAIN Your machine tool builder can provide you with a copy of TNCBACK EXE You also need a floppy disk on which all the machine specific data PLC program ma
74. new file name and confirm with ENT YES Press the YES soft key to confirm or the NO soft key to abort 44 4 Programming Fundamentals of NC File Management Programming Aids Pallet Management Copying a file Move the highlight to the file you wish to copy COPY Press the COPY soft key to select the copying Pe skr function Enter the name of the destination file and confirm your entry with the ENT key or EXECUTE soft key The TNC copies the file into the active directory The original file is retained Press the PARALLEL EXECUTE soft key to copy the file in the background Copying in the background permits you to continue working while the TNC is copying This can be useful if you are copying very large files that take a long time While the TNC is copying in the background you can press the INFO PARALLEL EXECUTE soft key under MORE FUNCTIONS second soft key row to check the progress of copying Copying a table If you are copying tables you can overwrite individual lines or columns in the target table with the REPLACE FIELDS soft key Prerequisites The target table must exist The file to be copied must only contain the columns or lines you want to replace Example With a tool presetter you have measured the length and radius of 10 new tools The tool presetter then generates the tool table TOOL T with 10 lines for the 10 tools and the columns Tool number Tool length Tool radius If you wish to
75. of the slot Q203 Q217 Q216 m X D ace D Z O z zA A 8 Programming Cycles CIRCULAR SLOT with reciprocating plunge cut Cycle 211 Roughing process 1 At rapid traverse the TNC positions the tool in the tool axis to the 2nd set up clearance and subsequently to the center of the right circle From there the tool is positioned to the programmed set up clearance above the workpiece surface 2 The tool moves at the milling feed rate to the workpiece surface From there the cutter advances plunge cutting obliquely into the material to the other end of the slot 3 The tool then moves at a downward angle back to the starting point again with oblique plunge cutting This process 2 to 3 Is repeated until the programmed milling depth is reached 4 At the milling depth the TNC moves the tool for the purpose of face milling to the other end of the slot Finishing process 5 For finishing the slot the TNC advances the tool tangentially to the contour of the finished part The tool subsequently climb mills the contour with M3 The starting point for the finishing process is the center of the right circle 6 When the tool reaches the end of the contour it departs the contour tangentially 7 At the end of the cycle the tool is retracted in rapid traverse FMAX to set up clearance and if programmed to the 2nd set up clearance Be
76. of your address e g 160 1 13 4 Name of the printer that the TNC shows when the PRINT soft key is pressed see also 4 4 File Management with Additional Functions Name of the printer in your network Ask your network manager Checking the network connection Press the PING soft key Enter the Internet address of the device with which you wish to check the connection and confirm your entry with ENT The TNC transmits data packets until you exit the test monitor by pressing the END key In the TRY line the TNC shows the number of data packets that were transmitted to the previously defined addressee Behind the number of transmitted data packets the TNC shows the status HOST RESPOND TIMEOUT CAN NOT ROUTE 308 Data packet was received again connection is OK Data packet was not received check the connection Data packet could not be transmitted Check the Internet address of the server and of the router to the TNC 111101000 Oa Network configuration operation PING MONITOR INTERNET ADDRESS FARRER 2 HOST RESPOND 12 MOD Functions Displaying the error log Press the SHOW ERROR soft key if you would like to see the error log Here the TNC records all errors that have occurred in the network since the TNC was last switched on The listed error messages are divided into two categories Warnings are indicated with W Warnings occur when the TNC was able to e
77. points for a circular arc For circular arcs you can enter 1 2 or 3 auxiliary points on the contour The available soft keys are listed in the table at lower right Example NC blocks 13 FC DR R10 P1X 42 929 P1Y 60 071 14 FLT AN 70 PDX 50 PDY 53 D10 See figure at lower right 122 X coordinate auxiliary point P1 or P2 Y coordinate auxiliary point P1 or P2 X coordinate of an auxiliary point y Y coordinate of an auxiliary point 7 Distance auxiliary point straight line X coordinate of an auxiliary point P1 P2 or P3 PDX PDV Y coordinate of an auxiliary point P1 P2 or P3 Coordinates of an auxiliary point in the proximity of a circular arc Distance from an auxiliary point in the proximity of a circular arc D kg 6 Programming Programming Contours Relative data Data whose values are based on another contour element are called relative data The soft keys and program words for entries begin with the letter R for Relative The figure at right shows the entries that should be programmed as relative data The coordinates and angles for relative data are always programmed in incremental dimensions You must also enter the block number of the contour element on which the data are based Ys The block number of the contour element on which the relative data are based can only be located up to 64 positioning blocks before the block in which you program the reference If you delete a block on which re
78. press the arrow keys repeatedly until the highlight is on the desired word Select a block with the arrow keys The word that is highlighted in the new block is the same as the one you selected previously Finding any text To select the search function press the FIND soft key The TNC displays the dialog prompt FIND TEXT Enter the text that you wish to find To find the text press the EXECUTE soft key Inserting blocks at any desired location Select the block after which you want to insert a new block and initiate the dialog Editing and inserting words Select a word in a block and overwrite it with the new one The plain language dialog is available while the word is highlighted To conclude editing press the END key If you want to insert a word press the horizontal arrow key repeatedly until the desired dialog appears You can then enter the desired value Go to the previous page v D Qo m v D Qo m Go to the next page BEGIN Jump to beginning of program END Jump to beginning of program ad E Move from one block to the next Y Select individual words in a block Set the selected word to zero Erase an Incorrect number Clear a non blinking error message 1618 6 uS EuS Gu ms 46 Delete the selected word Delete the selected block a Erase cycles and program sections First select the last block of the cycle or program section to be erased then erase with the DEL key
79. range 1 to 6505 2 traverse range 3 Positive probing direction in the angle reference axis 0 axis 0 Positive probing direction in the 90 axis 1 Negative probing direction in the angle reference axis 0 axis 2 Negative probing direction in the 90 axis 3 Probing feed rate for second measurement withTT 120 stylus shape corrections in TOOL T MP6507 Calculate feed rate for second measurement with TT 120 with constant tolerance 0 Calculate feed rate for second measurement with TT 120 with variable tolerance 1 Constant feed rate for second measurement with TT 120 2 Maximum permissible measuring error with TT 120 during measurement with rotating tool Required for calculating the probing feed rate in connection with MP6570 MP6510 0 001 to 0 999 mm recommended input value 0 005 mm Feed rate for probing a stationary tool with the TT 120 MP6520 1 to 3000 mm min Radius measurement with theTT 120 Distance from lower edge of tool to upper edge of stylus MP6530 0 traverse range 1 to MP6530 2 traverse range 3 Clearance zone around the stylus of the TT 120 for pre positioning MP6540 0 001 to 99 999 999 mm Rapid traverse for TT 120 in the probe cycle MP6550 10 to 10 000 mm min M function for spindle orientation when measuring individual teeth MP6560 O to 88 322 13 Tables and Overviews Measuring rotating tools Permissible rotational speed at the circumference of the milling tool Required for cal
80. setting 0 Disable datum setting in the X axis 1 Disable datum setting in the Y axis 2 Disable datum setting in the Z axis 4 Disable datum setting in the IV axis 8 Disable datum setting in the V axis 16 Disable datum setting in the 6th axis 32 Disable datum setting In the 7th axis 64 Disable datum setting In the 8th axis 128 Disable datum setting in the 9th axis 256 MP7296 Do not Inhibit datum setting 0 Disable datum setting with the orange axis keys 1 MP7300 Reset them all when a program is selected 0 Reset them all when a program is selected and with M02 M30 END PGM 1 Reset only status display and tool data when a program is selected 2 Reset only status display and tool data when a program is selected and with M02 M30 END PGM 3 Reset status display and Q parameters when a program is selected 4 Reset status display and O parameters when a program is selected and with M02 M30 END PGM 5 Reset status display when a program is selected 6 Reset status display when a program is selected and with M02 M30 END PGM 7 13 Tables and Overviews Graphic display mode MP7310 Projection in three planes according to ISO 6433 projection method 1 0 Projection in three planes according to ISO 6433 projection method 2 1 Do not rotate coordinate system for graphic display 0 Rotate coordinate system for graphic display by 90 2 Display new BLK FORM in Cycle 7 DATUM SHIFT referenced to the previous da
81. stud 2 From the stud center the tool moves in the working plane to the Starting point for machining The starting point lies to the right of the stud by a distance approx 3 5 times the tool radius 3 If the tool is at the 2nd set up clearance it moves in rapid traverse FMAX to set up clearance and from there advances to the first plunging depth at the feed rate for plunging 4 The tool then moves tangentially to the contour of the finished part and using climb milling machines one revolution 5 After this the tool departs the contour tangentially and returns to the starting point in the working plane 6 This process 3 to 5 is repeated until the programmed depth Is reached 7 At the end of the cycle the TNC retracts the tool in FMAX to set up clearance or if programmed to the 2nd set up clearance and finally to the center of the stud end position starting position lt lt Before programming note the following The algebraic sign for the depth parameter determines the working direction If you want to clear and finish the stud with the same tool use a centercut end mill ISO 1641 and enter a low feed rate for plunging Set up clearance Q200 incremental value Distance between tool tio and workpiece surface Depth Q201 incremental value Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of stud Feed rate for plunging Q206 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min when moving to depth If you ar
82. succession The number behind the slash after REP indicates the number of repetitions remaining to be run The total number of times the program section is executed is always one more than the programmed number of repeats HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 0 BEGIN PGM END PGM 241 en 9 3 Program Section Repeats m 9 4 Program as Subprogram Programming a program section repeat To mark the beginning press the LBL SET key and Pel enter a LABEL NUMBER for the program section you wish to repeat Enter the program section Calling a program section repeat LBL Press the LBL CALL key and enter the label number of moe the program section you want to repeat as well as the number of repeats with Repeat REP 9 4 Program as Subprogram 1 The TNC executes the part program up to the block in which another program is called with CALL PGM 2 Then the other program is run from beginning to end 3 The TNC then resumes the first calling part program with the block behind the program call Programming notes No labels are needed to call any program as a subprogram The called program must not contain the miscellaneous functions M2 or M30 The called program must not contain a program call into the calling program Calling any program as a subprogram To call the program press the PGM CALL key and aes enter the program name of the program you wish to call The program you are calling must be stored on the
83. table PCDT Path for cutting data tables Example ofTNC SYS HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 89 of Tool Movements D gt O q 6 1 Overview of Tool Movements Path functions A workpiece contour is usually composed of several contour elements such as straight lines and circular arcs With the path functions you can program the tool movements for straight lines and circular arcs Free contour FK programming If a production drawing is not dimensioned for NC and the dimensions given are not sufficient for creating a part program you can program the workpiece contour with the FK free contour programming and have the TNC calculate the missing data With FK programming you also program tool movements for straight lines and circular arcs Miscellaneous functions M With the TNC s miscellaneous functions you can affect Program run e g a program interruption Machine functions such as switching spindle rotation and coolant supply on and off Contouring behavior of the tool Subprograms and program section repeats If a machining sequence occurs several times in a program you can save time and reduce the chance of programming errors by entering the sequence once and then defining it as a subprogram or program section repeat If you wish to execute a specific pro gram section only under certain conditions you also define this machining sequence as a subprogram In addition you can have a part program cal
84. table is superimposed Press the SELECT WORKPIECE MATERIAL soft key and the TNC displays in a second window the list of materials that are stored in the WMAT TAB table Select your workpiece material by using the arrow keys to move the highlight onto the material you wish to select and confirming with the ENT key The TNC transfers the selected material to the WMAT block To scroll through the table more quickly press and hold SHIFT and then the arrow keys The TNC then moves page by page To terminate the dialog press the END key If you change the WMAT block in a program the TNC outputs a warning Check whether the cutting data stored in the TOOL CALL block are still valid HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 DOC oO Yerg Stahl 1 7707 30 CrNiMo 8 Verg Stahl 1 6580 31 CrMo 12 Nitrier Stahl 1 8515 31 CrMoV 9 Nitrier Stahl 1 8519 32 CrMo 12 Yerg Stahl 1 7361 34 CrAl amp Nitrier Stahl 1 8504 34 CrAlMo 5 Nitrier Stahl 1 8507 34 CrAINi Nitrier Stahl 1 8550 34 CrAls 5 Nitrier Stahl 1 8506 34 CrMo 4 Yerg Stahl 1 7220 35 NiCr 18 Yerg Stahl 1 5864 35 NiCrMo 16 Werkz Stahl 1 2766 24 40 CrMnMo Werkz Stahl 1 2311 BEGIN END PAGE PAGE i q i INSERT DELETE NEXT ORDER NY LINE LINE LINE 85 Data Tables ing eit ing wi 5 55 Work Data Tables tting ing wi 5 55 Work Table for tool cutting materials Tool cutting materials are defined in the TMAT TAB table TMAT TAB is stored in the TNC di
85. text Press the DELETE WORD or DELETE LINE soft key The text is deleted and stored temporarily Move the cursor to the location where you wish insert the text and press the RESTORE LINE WORD soft key Editing text blocks You can copy and erase text blocks of any size and insert them at other locations Before carrying out any of these editing functions you must first select the desired text block To select a text block move the cursor to the first character of the text you wish to select Press the SELECT BLOCK soft key BLOCK Move the cursor to the last character of the text you wish to select You can select whole lines by moving the cursor up or down directly with the arrow keys the selected text is shown in a different color After selecting the desired text block you can edit the text with the following soft keys Delete the selected text and store temporarily BLOCK Store marked block temporarily without erasing copy BLOCK If necessary you can now insert the temporarily stored block at a different location Move the cursor to the location where you want to insert the temporarily stored text block INSERT Press the INSERT BLOCK soft key _ the text block in inserted You can insert the temporarily stored text block as often as desired HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 DELETE Delete and temporarily store a line LINE DELETE Delete and temporarily store a word DORE i DELETE Delete and temp
86. the active axis in the positive or negative direction 16 2 Manual Operation and Setup Incremental jog positioning With incremental jog positioning you can move a machine axis by a preset distance A Select Manual or Electronic Handwheel mode of operation INCRE Select incremental jog positioning Switch the EF ON INCREMENT soft key to ON 8 ENT Enter the jog increment in millimeters here 8 mm x Press the machine axis direction button as often as desired 2 3 Spindle Speed S Feed Rate F and Miscellaneous Functions M In the operating modes Manual and Electronic Handwheel you can enter the spindle speed S feed rate F and the miscellaneous functions M with soft keys The miscellaneous functions are described in Chapter 7 Programming Miscellaneous Functions HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 17 LL e Oo c a ro Q RL xe LL oa am Oo LL y op 2 v At N 2 4 Setting i Entering values Example Entering the spindle speed S s To enter the spindle speed press the S soft key 1000 Enter the desired spindle speed Q and confirm your entry with the machine START button The spindle speed S with the entered rom is started with a miscellaneous function Proceed in the same way to enter the feed rate F and the miscellaneous functions M The following is valid for feed ra
87. the specific tool The TNC will consider all the data entered for the tool when executing the part program A we i Po i AL gt 0 Tool numbers and tool names Each tool is identified by a number between 0 and 254 If you are working with tool tables you can use higher numbers and you can also enter a tool name for each tool _ 5 2 Tool Data The tool number O is automatically defined as the zero tool with the length L 0 and the radius R 0 In tool tables tool O should also be defined with L 0 and R 0 Tool length L There are two ways to determine the tool length L 1 The length L is the difference between the length of the tool and that of a zero tool Lo For the algebraic sign The tool is longer than the zero tool L gt Lo The tool is shorter than the zero tool L lt Lo To determine the length Move the zero tool to the reference position in the tool axis e g workpiece surface with Z 0 Set the datum in the tool axis to O datum setting Insert the desired tool Move the tool to the same reference position as the zero tool The TNC displays the difference between the current tool and the zero tool Enter the value in the TOOL DEF block or in the tool table by pressing the actual position capture key 2 Determine the tool length L with a tool presetter This allows you to enter the determined value directly in the TOOL DEF tool definition block or in the tool table without further calculations
88. tool for measuring the tool during rotation TT R OFFS Tool length measurement tool offset between stylus center and tool center Preset value Tool radius R NO ENT means R TT LOFFS Tool radius measurement tool offset in addition to MP6530 see 13 1 General User Parameters bet ween upper surface of stylus and lower surface of tool Preset value 0 LBREAK Permissible deviation from tool length L for break detection If the entered value is exceeded the TNC locks the tool status L Input range O to 0 9999 mm RBREAK Permissible deviation from tool radius R for break detection If the entered value is exceeded the TNC locks the tool status L Input range O to 0 9999 mm Tool table Additional tool data for automatic speed feed rate calculations Number of teeth Wear tolerance length Wear tolerance radius Cutting direction M3 Tool offset radius Tool offset length Breakage tolerance length Breakage tolerance radius TYPE Tool type MILL for milling DRILL for drilling or boring TAP for tapping Press the SELECT TYPE soft key 3rd soft key row The TNC superimposes a window where you can select the type of tool you want TMAT Tool material Press the SELECT MATERIAL soft key 3rd soft key row The TNC superimposes a window where you can select the type of material you want CDT Cutting data table Press the SELECT CDT soft key 3rd soft key row The TNC superimposes a w
89. touch probe during calibration 0 M function for 180 rotation of the 3 D touch probe during calibration 1 to 88 Multiple measurement for programmable probe function MP6170 1to3 Confidence range for multiple measurement MP6171 0 001 to 0 999 mm Infeed of the stylus when digitizing with the measuring touch probe MP6310 0 1 to 2 0000 mm recommended input value 1 mm Measure center misalignment of the stylus when calibrating a measuring touch probe MP6321 Measure center misalignment 0 Do not measure center misalignment 1 320 13 Tables and Overviews Assign touch probe axis to machine axis for a measuring touch probe MP6322 0 E Ensure that the touch probe e Aa Machine X axis parallel to touch probe axis X 0 Y 1 Z 2 correctly assigned to the machine axes Wrong assignment could lead to a MP6322 1 stylus break Machine Y axis parallel to touch probe axis X 0 Y 1 Z 2 MP6322 2 Machine Z axis parallel to touch probe axis X 0 Y 1 Z 2 Maximum stylus deflection of the measuring touch probe MP6330 0 1 to 4 0000 mm Feed rate for positioning measuring touch probes at MIN point and approaching the contour MP6350 1 to 3000 mm min Probe feed rate for measuring touch probes MP6360 1 to 3000 mm min Rapid traverse for measuring touch probes in the probe cycle MP6361 10 to 3 000 mm min Feed rate reduction when the stylus of a measuring touch probe is deflected to the side The TNC decreases the fee
90. window instead or display only program blocks in one large window The available screen windows depend on the selected operating mode To change the screen layout Press the switch over key The soft key row 7 shows the available layout options see section 1 3 Modes of Operation PGM Select the desired screen layout GRAPHICS 1 Introduction Keyboard The figure at right shows the keys of the keyboard grouped according to their functions f Alphanumeric keyboard for entering texts and file names as well as for programming in ISO format 2 File management pocket calculator MOD functions HELP functions Programming modes Machine operating modes 1 3 Modes of Oper Initiation of programming dialog Arrow keys and GOTO jump command Numerical input and axis selection The functions of the individual keys are described on the inside front cover Machine panel buttons e g NC START are described in the manual for your machine tool 1 3 Modes of Operation The TNC offers the following modes of operation for the various functions and working steps that you need to machine a workpiece The Manual Operation mode is required for setting up the machine tool In this operating mode you can position the machine axes manually or by increments set the datums and tilt the working pla ne 350 0000 C 350 0000 350 0000 350 0000 The Electronic Handwheel mode of operation allows you
91. 0 The functions for contour approach and departure are activated with END PGM NEU MM the APPR DEP key You can then select the desired path function with the corresponding soft key Straight line with tangential connection Straight line perpendicular to a contour point Circular arc with tangential connection Circular are with tangential connection to the contour Approach and departure to an auxiliary point outside of the contour on a tangentially connecting line Approaching and departing a helix The tool approaches and departs a helix on its extension by moving in a circular arc that connects tangentially to the contour You program helix approach and departure with the APPR CT and DEP CT functions Important positions for approach and departure Starting point Ps You program this position in the block before the APPR block Ps lies outside the contour and is approached without radius compensation RO Auxiliary point Py Some of the paths for approach and departure go through an auxiliary point Py that the TNC calculates from your input in the APPR or DEP block First contour point Pa and last contour point Pe You program the first contour point Pa in the APPR block The last contour point Pe can be programmed with any path function If the APPR block also contains a Z axis coordinate the TNC will first move the tool to Py in the working plane and then move it to the entered depth in the tool axis E
92. 08 1009 1010 1011 1012 1013 1014 1015 1016 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 1023 1024 1025 1026 1027 1028 1029 1030 1031 1032 1033 1034 1035 1036 1037 1038 1039 1040 1041 Spindle Tool axis is missing Slot width too large Tool radius too large Range exceeded Start position incorrect ROTATION not permitted SCALING FACTOR not permitted MIRRORING not permitted Datum shift not permitted Feed rate is missing Entry value incorrect Wrong sign programmed Entered angle not permitted Touch point inaccessible Too many points Contradictory entry CYCL incomplete Plane wrongly defined Wrong axis programmed Wrong RPM Radius comp undefined Rounding off undefined Rounding radius too large Program start undefined Excessive subprogramming Angle reference missing No fixed cycle defined Slot width too large Pocket too small Q202 not defined Q205 not defined Enter Q218 greater than Q219 CYCL 210 not permitted CYCL 211 not permitted Q220 too large Q222 must be greater than Q223 Q244 must be greater than 0 Q245 must not equal Q246 Angle range must be under 360 Q223 must be greater than Q222 Q214 O not permitted 261 ions Funct itiona 10 8 Add ions Funct itiona 10 8 Add Qa 299 FN 14 Error code 0 299 300 999 Machine dependent dialog 1000 1099 Internal error messages see table at right FN15 PRINT Unformatted output of texts or Q parameter values
93. 24 hours Y To exchange the buffer battery first switch off the TNC The buffer battery must be exchanged only by trained service personnel Battery type Three AA size cells leak proof IEC designation LR6 340 13 Tables and Overviews 3 D compensation 82 delta values 83 tool shapes 82 3 D view 286 Accessories 11 Adding comments 59 Additional functions 134 entering 134 for contouring behavior 138 for coordinate data 135 for laser cutting machines 149 for program run control 135 for rotary axes 144 for the spindle 135 ASCII files 60 Automatic cutting data calculations 72 84 Automatic tool measurement 72 Auxiliary axes 29 Back boring 161 Blank form 53 Blocks editing 56 erasing 56 inserting 56 Bolt hole circle 186 Boring 158 HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 Chamfer 103 Circle calculations 258 Circle center CC 104 Circular path 105 106 107 113 114 Circular pocket finishing 175 roughing 173 Circular slot milling 181 Circular studs finishing 176 Code number 299 Constant contouring speed M90 138 Contour approach 96 Contour cycles See SL cycles Contour departure 96 Contour train 200 Conversational format 55 Convert an FK program into HEIDEN HAIN conversational format 38 Coordinate transformation overview 219 Corner rounding 108 Creating a new part program 54 Creating text files 60 Cutting data calculation 84 Cutting data table 84 data transfer 89 Cycle calling 153 defi
94. 2767 tools and their tool data in a tool table In Machine Parameter 7260 you can define how many tool places are to be reserved by the TNC when a new table is set up See also the Editing Functions at a later stage in this Chapter Tool table Available input data NAME R2 DL DR DR2 LCUTS ANGLE TL RT TIME1 TIME2 CUR TIME DOG PLC Number by which the tool is called in the program Name by which the tool is called in the program Value for tool length compensation L Compensation value for the tool radius R Tool radius R2 for toroid cutters only for 3 D radius compensation or graphical representation of a machining operation with spherical cutter Delta value for tool length Delta value for tool radius R Delta value for tool radius R2 Tooth length of the tool for Cycle 22 Maximum plunge angle of the tool for reciprocating plunge cut in Cycle 22 Set tool lock TL Tool Locked Number of a replacement tool if available see also TIME2 Maximum tool life in minutes This function can vary depending on the Individual machine tool Your machine manual provides more information on TIME Maximum tool life in minutes during a TOOL CALL It the current tool age exceeds this value the TNC changes the tool during the next TOOL CALL see also CUR TIME Time in minutes the tool has been in use The TNC automatically counts the current tool life A starting value can be entered for used tools Comment on tool u
95. 32 11 stop bits 0 2 stop bits 64 1 stop bit 128 1 stop bit 192 N i 0 Sms 7e mD g i m q Example Use the following setting to adjust the TNC interface EXT2 MP 5020 1 to an external non HEIDENHAIN device 8 data bits any BCC transmission stop through DC3 even character parity character parity desired 2 stop bits Input for MP 5020 1 1 0 8 0 32 64 105 Integrating TNC interfaces EXT1 5030 0 and EXT2 5030 1 to external device MP5030 x Standard transmission 0 Interface for blockwise transfer 1 HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 319 3 D touch probes and digitizing Select touch probe only with option for digitizing with measuring touch probe MP6200 Triggering touch probe 0 Measuring touch probe 1 Select signal transmission MP6010 Touch probe with cable transmission 0 Touch probe with infrared transmission 1 Probing feed rate for triggering touch probes MP6120 1 to 3000 mm min Maximum traverse to first probe point MP6130 0 001 to 99 999 9999 mm e lt oa aos 0 Sos 7e mD C Som jam g ae m Safety clearance to probing point during automatic measurement MP6140 0 001 to 99 999 9999 mm Rapid traverse for triggering touch probes MP6150 1 to 300 000 mm min Measure center misalignment of the stylus when calibrating a triggering touch probe MP6160 No 180 rotation of the 3 D
96. 357 Cancellation Program the ROTATION cycle once again with a rotation angle of 0 HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 225 8 7 Transformation Cycles 8 7 a Transformation Cycles SCALING FACTOR Cycle 11 The TNC can increase or reduce the size of contours within a program enabling you to program shrinkage and oversize allowances Effect The SCALING FACTOR becomes effective as soon as it is defined in the program It is also effective in the Positioning with MDI mode of operation The active scaling factor is shown in the additional status display The scaling factor can be applied in the working plane or on all three coordinate axes at the same time depending on machine parameter 7410 to the dimensions in cycles to the parallel axes U V W Prerequisite It is advisable to set the datum to an edge or a corner of the contour before enlarging or reducing the contour 11 Scaling factor Enter the scaling factor SCL The TNC multiplies the coordinates and radii by the SCL factor as described under Activation above Enlargement SCL greater than 1 up to 99 999 999 Reduction SCL less than 1 down to 0 000 001 Example NC blocks 83 CYCL DEF 11 0 SCALING gt 84 CYCL DEF 11 1 SCL0 99537 00 Cancellation Program the SCALING FACTOR cycle once again with a scaling factor of 1 You can also enter scaling factors for axis specific scaling see Cycle 26 8 Programming Cycles
97. AIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 103 Cartesian Coordinates e m gt Oo Pwr c Oo Q k re 0 lt o 6 4 Path Contours B si Coordinates Example NC blocks I You cannot start a contour with a CHF block A chamfer is possible only in the working plane A feed rate programmed in the CHF block is effective only in that block After the CHF block the previous feed rate becomes effective again The corner point is cut off by the chamfer and is not part of the contour Circle center CC You can define a circle center CC for circles that are programmed with the C key circular path C This is done in the following ways Entering the Cartesian coordinates of the circle center Using the circle center defined in an earlier block Capturing the coordinates with the actual position capture key Se Coordinates CC Enter the circle center coordinates If you want to use the last programmed position do not enter any coordinates Example NC blocks The program blocks 10 and 11 do not refer to the illustration Duration of effect The circle center definition remains in effect until a new circle center is programmed You can also define a circle center for the secondary axes U V and W Entering the circle center CC incrementally If you enter the circle center with incremental coordinates you have programmed it relative to the last programmed position of the tool 04
98. C continues the dialog by asking you the factor F Effect M103 becomes effective at the start of block To cancel M103 program M103 once again without a factor Example NC blocks The feed rate for plunging is to be 20 of the feed rate in the 500 500 100 141 500 500 O D 5 7 4 Miscellaneous Functions M103 is activated with machine parameter 7440 see section 13 1 General User Parameters HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 Actual contouring feed rate mm min 141 for Contouring Behavior 7 4 Miscellaneous punct il for Contouring Behavior Feed rate at circular arcs M109 M110 M111 Standard behavior The TNC applies the programmed feed rate to the path of the tool center Behavior at circular arcs with M109 The TNC adjusts the feed rate for circular arcs at inside and outside contours such that the feed rate at the tool cutting edge remains constant Behavior at circular arcs with M110 The TNC keeps the feed rate constant for circular arcs at inside contours only At outside contours the feed rate is not adjusted M110 is also effective for the inside machining of circular arcs using contour cycles Effect M109 and M110 become effective at the start of the block To cancel M109 or M110 enter M111 Calculating the radius compensated path in advance LOOK AHEAD M120 Standard behavior If the tool radius is larger than the contour step that is to be machined with radius compensation the
99. Checking and Changing Q Parameters 260 10 8 Additional Functions 261 10 9 Entering Formulas Directly 270 10 10 Preassigned O Parameters 273 10 11 Programming Examples 276 Example Ellipse 276 Example Concave cylinder machined with spherical cutter 278 Example Convex sphere machined with end mill 280 11 1 Graphics 284 11 2 Functions for Program Display in Program Run and Test Run 289 11 3 Testrun 289 11 4 Program Run 291 11 5 Optional block skip 296 X Contents 12 1 Selecting Changing and Exiting the MOD Functions 298 12 2 Software Numbers and Option Numbers 299 12 3 Code Number 299 12 4 Setting the Data Interfaces 300 12 5 Ethernet Interface 304 12 6 Configuring PGM MGT 311 12 7 Machine Specific User Parameters 311 12 8 Showing theWorkpiece in theWorking Space 311 12 9 Position Display Types 313 12 10Unit of Measurement 313 12 11 Programming Language for MDI 314 12 12 Selecting the Axes for Generating L Blocks 314 12 13 Axis Traverse Limits Datum Display 314 12 14 Displaying HELP files 315 12 15 MachiningTimes 316 13 1 General User Parameters 318 13 2 Pin Layout and Connecting Cable for the Data Interfaces 333 13 3Technical Information 337 13 4 Exchanging the Buffer Battery 340 HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 Contents ee e
100. Cycle 18 165 Example Drilling cycles 166 Example Drilling cycles 167 8 3 Cycles for milling pockets studs and slots 168 POCKET MILLING Cycle 4 169 POCKET FINISHING Cycle 212 170 STUD FINISHING Cycle 213 172 CIRCULAR POCKET MILLING Cycle 5 173 CIRCULAR POCKET FINISHING Cycle 214 175 CIRCULAR STUD FINISHING Cycle 215 176 SLOT MILLING Cycle 3 178 SLOT with reciprocating plunge cut Cycle 210 179 CIRCULAR SLOT with reciprocating plunge cut Cycle 211 181 Example Milling pockets studs and slots 183 8 4 Cycles for Machining Hole Patterns 185 CIRCULAR PATTERN Cycle 220 186 LINEAR PATTERN Cycle 221 187 Example Circular hole patterns 189 Contents 8 5 SL Cycles 191 CONTOUR GEOMETRY Cycle 14 193 Overlapping contours 193 CONTOUR DATA Cycle 20 195 PILOT DRILLING Cycle 21 197 ROUGH OUT Cycle 22 198 FLOOR FINISHING Cycle 23 199 SIDE FINISHING Cycle 24 199 CONTOURTRAIN Cycle 25 200 CYLINDER SURFACE Cycle 27 202 Example Roughing out and fine roughing a pocket 205 Example Pilot drilling roughing out and finishing overlapping contours 206 Example Contour train 208 Example Cylinder surface 210 8 6 Cycles for Multipass Milling 212 RUN DIGITIZED DATA Cycle 30 212 MULTIPASS MILLING Cycle 230
101. E of the external device lt The functions Transfer all files Transfer selected file and Transfer directory are not available in the operating modes FE2 and EXT Setting the BAUD RATE You can set the BAUD RATE data transfer speed from 110 to 115 200 baud HEIDENHAIN floppy disk units a FE 401 B FET FE 401 from prog no 230 626 03 FEI HEIDENHAIN floppy disk unit FE 401 up to prog no 230 626 02 FE2 m PC with HEIDENHAIN data transfer FEI al Software TNCremo Non HEIDENHAIN devices such as EXT1 EXT2 Th Punchers PC without TNCremo PC with HEIDENHAIN software LSV2 mi TNCremo for remote operation of the TNC 300 Programming and editing full sequence RS232 interface Mode of op EJE rate 115200 57600 19200 115208 RS422 interface Mode of op FE1 Baud rate FE 9600 EXT1 9600 EXT2 9600 LSV 2 9600 TNC NK SCRODP Print test PGM MGT Enhanced RS232 USER O r RS422 12 MOD Functions ASSIGN This function sets the destination for the transferred data Applications e Transferring values with Q parameter function FN15 e Transferring values with Q parameter function FN16 e Path on the TNC s hard disk in which the digitized data are stored The TNC mode of operation determines whether the PRINT or PRINT TEST function is used 12 4 Setting the Data Interfaces Program Run Single Block PRINT Program Run Full Sequence PRINT Test run PRINT TEST Y
102. EARANCE gt 8 CYCL DEF 220 POLAR PATTERN Define cycle for circular pattern 2 CYCL 200 is called automatically S m Q216 90 CENTER IN 1ST AXIS 0200 Q203 and Q204 are effective as defined in Cycle 220 s 0217 25 CENTER IN 2ND AXIS Q244 70 PITCH CIRCLE DIA Gen Q246 4 360 STOPPING ANGLE Q247 30 STEPPING ANGLE Q241 5 NR OF REPETITIONS Q200 2 s SET UP CLEARANCE 0203 0 SURFACE COORDINATE 0204 100 2ND SET UP CLEARANCE 9 L 24250 RO F MAX M2 Retract in the tool axis end program 10 END PGM BOHRB MM 90 8 Programming Cycles 8 5 SL Cycles SL cycles allow the contouroriented machining of complex contours and achieve a particularly high degree of surface finish Characteristics of the contour A contour can be composed of several overlapping subcontours up to 12 subcontours are possible Islands and pockets can form a subcontour The subcontour list subprogram numbers is entered in Cycle 14 CONTOUR GEOMETRY The TNC calculates the contour from the subcontours The individual subcontours are defined in subprograms The memory capacity for programming an SL cycle is limited All subprograms together can contain for example up to 128 Straight line blocks Characteristics of the subprograms Coordinate transformations are allowed The TNC ignores feed rates F and miscellaneous functions M The TNC recognizes a pocket if the tool path lies inside the contour f
103. ENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 211 8 5 SL Cycles O N N E O W p Q a Q 8 6 Cycles for Multipass Milling The TNC offers four cycles for machining surfaces with the following characteristics Created by digitizing or with a CAD CAM system Flat rectangular surfaces Flat oblique angled surfaces Surfaces that are inclined in any way Twisted surfaces 30 RUN DIGITIZED DATA For multipass milling of digitized surface data PNT DAT in several infeeds 230 MULTIPASS MILLING For flat rectangular surfaces a 231 RULED SURFACE z231 For oblique inclined or twisted surfaces LY RUN DIGITIZED DATA Cycle 30 1 From the current position the TNC positions the tool in rapid traverse FMAX in the tool axis to the set up clearance above the MAX point that you have programmed in the cycle 2 The tool then moves in FMAX in the working plane to the MIN point you have programmed in the cycle 3 From this point the tool advances to the first contour point at the feed rate for plunging 4 The TNC subsequently processes all points that are stored in the digitizing data Tile at the feed rate for milling If necessary the TNC retracts the tool between machining operations to set up clearance if specific areas are to be left unmachined 5 At the end of the cycle the tool is retracted in FMAX to set up clearance 212 8 Programming Cycles Ya Before programming note the following
104. HEIDENHAIN 23 45 39 FP ees HE RESET DEA ON ie START meee te re e a AREJEE eS LAS CRS I ROTOR PANEER NIE Oi a i M LBL F TNC 426 B TNC 430 Controls on the visual display unit C Split screen layout Switch between machining or SS programming modes a Soft keys for selecting functions in screen Switching the soft key rows Changing the screen settings only BC 120 Controls on the TNC Typewriter keyboard for entering letters and symbols Q WE RD MW coments G F S TM Machine operating modes MANUAL OPERATION ISO programs ELECTRONIC HANDWHEEL Operating Modes POSITIONING WITH MANUAL DATA INPUT MDI PROGRAM RUN SINGLE BLOCK 00 00g PROGRAM RUN FULL SEQUENCE Programming modes SA PROGRAMMING AND EDITING TEST RUN Program file management TNC functions mm Select or delete programs and files ua External data transfer Q PGM r eam Enter program call in a program MOD functions ae Displaying help texts for NC error messages ea Pocket calculator Moving the cursor going directly to blocks cycles and parameter functions Move highlight fae Go directly to blocks cycles and parameter functions O Override control knobs for feed rate spindle speed 100 100 Yu ED WF Os 0 0 Programming path movements Approach depart contour FK free contour programming Straight line Cir
105. IC ARITHMETIC To select the Q parameter function MULTIPLICATION press the FNS X Y soft key 12 Enter a Q parameter number for example 12 Enter 05 for the first value os im 7 ENT Enter 7 for the second value N 56 10 Programming Q Parameters The TNC displays the following program blocks 10 4 Trigonometric Functions Sine cosine and tangent are terms designating the ratios of sides of right triangles For a right triangle the trigonometric functions of the angle a are defined by the following equations Sine sina a c Cosine cos a b c Tangent tana a b sina cosa where c is the side opposite the right angle a is the side opposite the angle a b is the third side The TNC can find the angle from the tangent o arctan a arctan a b arctan sin cos Example a 10mm b 10 mm arctan a b arctan 1 45 Furthermore a2 b2 c2 where a2 axa c V a2 b2 Programming trigonometric functions Press the TRIGONOMETRY soft key to call the trigonometric functions The TNC then displays the soft keys that are listed in the table at right Programming compare Example Programming fundamental operations HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 FN6 SINE Example FN6 O20 SIN O5 Calculate the sine of an angle in degrees and assign it to a parameter FNG SINH FNZ COSINE Example FN7 021 COS O5 Calculate the cosine
106. If it has not already been entered enter the type of cutting material in the file TMAT TAB 3 If not already entered enter all of the required tool specific data in the tool table Tool radius Number of teeth Tool type Tool cutting material The cutting data table for each tool If not already entered enter the cutting data in any cutting data table CDT file Test Run operating mode Activate the tool table from which the TNC is to take the tool specific data status S In the NC program set the workpiece material by pressing the WMAT soft key In the NC program let the TOOL CALL block automatically calculate spindle speed and feed rate via soft key Changing the table structure Cutting data tables constitute so called freely definable tables for the TNC You can change the format of freely definable tables by using the structure editor Calling the structure editor Press the EDIT FORMAT soft key 2nd soft key level The TNC opens the editing window see figure at right in which the table structure is shown rotated by 90 In other words a line in the editing window defines a column in the associated table The meanings of the structure commands header entries are shown in the table at right Exiting the structure editor Press the END key The TNC changes data that was already in the table into the new format Elements that the TNC could not convert into the new structure are indicated with a hash mar
107. In addition to the machine datum the machine tool builder can also define an additional machine based position as a reference point For each axis the machine tool builder defines the distance between the machine datum and this additional machine datum Refer to the machine manual for more information If you want the coordinates in a positioning block to be based on the additional machine datum end the block with M92 Radius compensation remains the same in blocks that are programmed with M91 or M92 The tool length however is not compensated M91 and M92 are not effective in a tilted working plane If you program these M functions in a tilted plane the TNC will display an error message Effect M91 and M92 are effective only in the blocks in which they are programmed with M91 or M92 M91 and M92 become effective at the start of block Workpiece datum If you want the coordinates to always be referenced to the machine datum you can inhibit datum setting for one or more axes see machine parameter 7295 If datum setting is inhibited for all axes the TNC no longer displays the soft key DATUM SET in the Manual Operation mode The figure at right shows coordinate systems with the machine datum and workpiece datum 136 M91 M92 in the test run mode In order to be able to graphically simulate M91 M92 movements you need to activate working space monitoring and display the workpiece blank referenced to the set datum
108. In mm Example NC blocks HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 237 8 8 Special Cycles 9 1 Marking Subprograms and Program Section Repeats Subprograms and program section repeats enable you to program a machining sequence once and then run it as often as desired Labels The beginnings of subprograms and program section repeats are marked in a part program by labels 9 2 Subprograms A label is identified by a number between 1 and 254 Each label can be set only once with LABEL SET in a program I If a label is set more than once the TNC sends an error message at the end of the LBL SET block With very long programs you can limit the number of blocks to be checked for repeated labels with MP7229 LABEL O LBL 0 is used exclusively to mark the end of a subprogram and can therefore be used as often as desired e oe am c 2 or Q op O O Hom 0 c e 9 2 Subprograms 0 BEGIN PGM Operating sequence 1 The TNC executes the part program up to the block in which a subprogram is called with CALL LBL CALL LBL1 2 The subprogram is then executed from beginning to end The Subprogram end is marked with LBL O 3 The TNC then resumes the part program from the block after the L Z 100 M2 subprogram call Programming notes A main program can contain up to 254 subprograms 9 1 Marking Subpr You can call subprograms in an
109. L JUMP Example FN10 IF 10 NE O5 GOTO LBL 10 F coro If the two values or parameters are not equal jump to the given label 0 T or 4 6 oo FN11 IF GREATERTHAN JUMP Example FN11 IF Q1 GT 10 GOTO LBL 5 goto If the first parameter or value is greater than the second value or parameter jump to the given label 7 rs _ FN12 IF LESSTHAN JUMP a Example FN12 IF Q5 LT 0 GOTO LBL 1 GoTo If the first value or parameter is less than the second value or parameter jump to the given label a x 4 Z HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 259 ith Q Parameters ISIONS W w m b Abbreviations used IF If EQU Equals NE Not equal GT Greater than LT Less than GOTO Go to 10 7 Checking and Changing fait toes TOS PUN Q Parameters BEGIN PGM 3507 MM BLK FORM 1 Z K 28 Y 20 2 20 BLK FORM 2 K 20 20 2 TOOL CALL 1 2 81000 L 2 50 RO F MAX M3 L 50 5 RO F MAX M8 L 2 5 RO F MAX If you are in a program run interrupt it for example by pressing ana the machine STOP button and the INTERNAL STOP soft key If oe E you are doing a test run interrupt it RND R1 FC DR R2 5 CLSD O To call the Q parameter functions press the O key FLT AN 180 925 During a program run or test run you can check or change Q parameters if necessary 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 FCT DR R1 5 CCX CCY Enter the Q parameter number and press the ENT key E in e o eaer The TNC disp
110. LSD CCK 2 CCY 30 General status display The status display informs you of the current state of the machine tool It is displayed automatically in the following modes of operation 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 it 8 Program Run Single Block and Program Run Full Sequence except if the screen layout is set to display graphics only and Positioning with Manual Data Input MDI 50 0000 Y 150 0000 2 180 0008 0 0000 B 180 0000 C 90 0000 In the operating modes Manual and Electronic Handwheel the status display is shown in the large window HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 7 Information in the status display Program run full sequence BEGIN PGM FK1 MM BLK FORM 1 2 K 2 26 0 0000 BLK FORM 0 2 X 1 Y 100 2 0 0 0000 TOOL CALL 1 2 8500 0 000A 0 0000 L 2 250 RO F MAK 0 0000 L X 20 Y 30 RO F MAK L 2 10 RO F1000 M3 A 0 0000 B 180 0000 APPR CT X 2 3 CCAS R 5 RL F250 C 90 0000 FC DR R18 CLSD CCK 2 CCY 30 ACTL Actual or nominal coordinates of the current position YA Machine axes the TNC displays auxiliary axes in lower case letters The sequence and quantity of displayed axes is determined by the machine tool builder Refer to your machine manual for more information 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 Basic rotation 8 660G8 50 0000 Y 150 0000 2 100 0000 0 0000 B 180 0000 C 90 0000 eL m e a ad V gt AHM The displayed feed rate in inches corresponds to o
111. NC 430 253 10 1 Principle and Overview 10 2 Part Families Q Parameters in Place of Numerical Values The Q parameter function FNO ASSIGN assigns numerical values to Q parameters This enables you to use variables in the program instead of fixed numerical values Q1 Example NC blocks Q2 You need write only one program for a whole family of parts entering the characteristic dimensions as Q parameters To program a particular part you then assign the appropriate values to the individual Q parameters N 2 gt rr S I a v amp A i N oa Example Cylinder with Q parameters Cylinder radius R Q1 Cylinder height H Q2 Cylinder Z1 Q1 30 Q2 10 Cylinder Z2 Q1 10 Q2 50 10 2 Part Families 254 10 Programming Q Parameters 10 3 Describing Contours Through Mathematical Functions The Q parameters listed below enable you to program basic mathematical functions in a part program To select the Q parameter function press the O key at the right in the keypad for numerical input The Q parameter functions are displayed in a soft key row To select the mathematical functions Press the BASIC ARITHMETIC soft key The TNC then displays the following soft keys FNO ASSIGN Example FNO O5 60 Key Assigns a numerical value FN1 ADDITION Example FN1 Q1 Q2 5 Key Calculates and assigns the sum of two values
112. O the TNC will calculate the tool path for a tool radius of 0 mm and a radius compensation RR The radius compensation is necessary to set the direction of contour approach and departure in the APPR DEP LN and APPR DEP CT functions 6 3 Contour Approaching on a straight line with tangential connection APPR LT The tool moves on a straight line from the starting point Ps to an auxiliary point Py It then moves from Pyto the first contour point Pa on a Straight line that connects tangentially to the contour The auxiliary point Py is separated from the first contour point Pa by the distance LEN Use any path function to approach the starting point Ps Initiate the dialog with the APPR DEP key and APPR LT soft key Coordinates of the first contour point Pa LEN Distance from the auxiliary point Py to the first contour point Pa Radius compensation for machining Example NC blocks Approach Ps without radius compensation Pa with radius comp RR distance Py to Pa LEN 15 End point of the first contour element Next contour element HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 97 6 3 Contour Bi coach and Departure Approaching on a straight line perpendicular to the first contour point APPR LN The tool moves on a Straight line from the starting point Ps to an auxiliary point Py It then moves trom Pyto the first contour point Pa on a Straight line perpendicular to the first contour element The auxiliary point Py is
113. O is programmed or M120 is programmed without LA another program is called with PGM CALL M120 becomes effective at the start of block Limitations After an external or internal stop you can only re enter the contour with the function RESTORE POS AT N If you are using the path functions RND and CHF the blocks before and after RND or CHF must contain only coordinates of the working plane If you want to approach the contour on a tangential path you must use the function APPR LCT The block with APPR LCT must contain only coordinates of the working plane If you want to approach the contour on a tangential path use the function DEP LCT The block with DEP LCT must contain only coordinates of the working plane Superimposing handwheel positioning during program run M118 Standard behavior In the program run modes the TNC moves the tool as defined in the part program Behavior with M118 M118 permits manual corrections by handwheel during program run You can use this miscellaneous function by entering axis specific values X Y and Z in mm behind M118 Programming M118 If you enter M118 in a positioning block the TNC continues the dialog for this block by asking you the axis specific values The coordinates are entered with the orange axis direction buttons or the ASCII keyboard Effect Cancel handwheel positioning by programming M118 once again without X Y and Z M118 becomes effective at the start of block
114. Other drives are yo the interfaces RS232 RS422 Ethernet which can be used for pad xray ey ae es SER END example to connect a personal computer The selected active drive is shown in a different color In the lower part of the narrow window the TNC shows all directories 2 of the selected drive A drive is always identified by a Display Meaning _ file symbol to the left and the directory name to the right The TNC displays a subdirectory to the right of and below its parent directory FILE NAME Name with max 16 characters The selected active directory is depicted in a different color and file type The wide window at on the right side shows all the files 8 that are stored in the selected directory Each file is shown with additional BYTE File size in bytes information that is illustrated in the table on the next page STATUS Property of the file E Program is in the Programming and Editing 4 4 File Management with Add mode of operation 5 Program is in the Test Run mode of operation M Program is in a Program Run mode of operation P File is protected against editing and erasure Protected DATE Date the file was last changed TIME Time the file was last changed 42 4 Programming Fundamentals of NC File Management Programming Aids Pallet Management To select drives directories and files Calling the file manager With the arrow keys or the soft keys you can move the h
115. Programming Cycles Configuring the datum table On the second and third soft key rows you can define for each datum table the axes for which you wish to set the datums In the standard setting all of the axes are active If you wish to exclude an axis set the corresponding soft key to OFF The TNC then deletes that column from the datum table To leave a datum table Select a different type of file in file management and choose the desired file Activate a datum table for a program run or test run To activate a datum table in the program run or test run operating modes proceed as described under the section Editing Datum Tables Instead of entering a new name press the SELECT soft key HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 223 8 7 Transformation Cycles Ordinate Transformation Cycles MIRROR IMAGE Cycle 8 The TNC can machine the mirror image of a contour in the working plane See figure at upper right Effect The MIRROR IMAGE cycle becomes effective as soon as it is defined in the program It is also effective in the Positioning with MDI mode of operation The active mirrored axes are shown in the additional status display If you mirror only one axis the machining direction of the tool is reversed except in fixed cycles If you mirror two axes the machining direction remains the same The result of the mirror image depends on the location of the datum If the datum lies on the contour to be mirrored the eleme
116. Q114 The current value for the tool length is assigned to Q114 Coordinates after probing during program run The parameters Q115 to Q119 contain the coordinates of the spindle position at the moment of contact during programmed measurement with the 3 D touch probe The length and radius of the probe tip are not compensated in these coordinates X axis Q115 Y axis Q116 Z axis dily IVth axis dependent on MP100 0118 Vth axis dependent on MP100 Q119 Deviation between actual value and nominal value during automatic tool measurement with the TT 120 Tool length Q115 Tool radius Q116 Tilting the working plane with mathematical angles Rotary axis coordinates calculated by the TNC A axis O120 B axis 0121 C axis Q122 274 10 Programming Q Parameters Results of measurements with touch probe cycles see also Touch Probe Cycles User s Manual 10 10 Preassigned Q Parameters Center in reference axis Q151 Center in minor axis Q152 Diameter 0153 Length of pocket Q154 Width of pocket J155 Length in the axis selected in the cycle 0156 Position of the center line Q157 Angle of the A axis 0158 Angle of the B axis 0159 Coordinate of the axis selected in the cycle Q160 Center in reference axis Q161 Center in minor axis Q162 Diameter Q163 Length of pocket Q164 Width of pocket 0165 Measured length Q166 Position of the center line 167 Good Q180 Re work Q181 Scrap Q182 HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 275 10 11 Pro
117. Ready 13 2 Pi The connector pin layout on the adapter block differs trom that on the TNC logic unit X21 HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 333 Non HEIDENHAIN devices The connector pin layout of a non HEIDENHAIN device may differ considerably from that on a HEIDENHAIN device This often depends on the unit and type of data transfer The figure below shows the connector pin layout on the adapter block Fe OO O RS 422 Adapter block Chassis GND TXD RXD RTS Cis DSR Signal GND GND Chassis RXD TXD CTS RTS DTR GND Signal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 OONODOABRWDN gt OdONDOABRWDN gt OOUONODABRWDNDN gt O oNgQGAAOUON gt OdONOOBRWDN gt N S wis Bos Pu lt marn O fo re lt O e 2 Q O J S Lam La e Q c oo O 13 2 Pi 334 13 Tables and Overviews RS 422 V 11 Interface Only non HEIDENHAIN devices are connected to the RS 422 interface The pin layouts on the TNC logic unit X22 and on the adapter block are identical External HEIDENHAIN device connecting cable max 1000 m SS Id Nr 249 819 01 Id Nr 250 478 e g PC ww GND Chassis RXD CITS TXD RTS DSR DTR GND Signal RXD CTS TXD RTS DSR DTR n i ak ed Ss LC CONOoOBRWDN gt N S ez iem d lt ad A co rar
118. T Insert line ane DELETE Delete line CINE Go to the beginning of the next line ae Sort the table column oriented ORDER COPY Copy the highlighted field 2nd soft key level FIELD PASTE Insert the copied field 2nd soft key level at EDIT Edit the table format 2nd soft key level aR 84 5 Programming Tools Table for workpiece materials Workpiece materials are defined in the table WMAT TAB see figure at center right VWWMAT TAB is stored in the TNC directory and can contain as many materials as you want The name of the material type can have a max of 32 characters including spaces The TNC displays the contents of the NAME column when you are defining the workpiece material in the program see the following section EE If you change the standard workpiece material table you must copy it into a new directory Otherwise your changes will be overwritten during a software update by the HEIDENHAIN standard data Define the path in the TNC SYS file with the code word WMAT see Configuration File TNC SYS later in this chapter To avoid losing data save the WMAT TAB file at regular intervals Defining the workpiece material in the NC program In the NC program select the workpiece material from the WMAT TAB table using the WMAT soft key WIMAT SELECT WORKPIECE MATERIAL Program the workpiece material In the Programming and Editing operating mode press the WMAT soft key The WMAT TAB
119. TE Erase a Tile or directory 3 Tag a file TAG RENAME Renaming a file aBd xv2 Convert an FK program into CONVERT FK gt H HEIDENHAIN conversational format PROTECT Protect a file against editing and erasure UNPROTECT Cancel file protection 4 4 File Management with Addition Network drive management Ethernet option only NET COPY DIR Copying a directory Cy ep i SHOIJ Display all the directories of a particular drive eee i i i DELETE Delete directory with all its subdirectories ES aL HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 41 Calling the file manager Program table editing File name XC TNC SNKSSCRDPS e c me S 5 LL Press the PGM MGT Pite nane z al The TNC displays the file management window 1 28047001 ee e ih ale see Fig at top right for default setting If the ALBERT ie P OE RGA TNC displays a different screen layout press the oo BSPGB A 21 05 1997 07 22 12 WINDOW soft key rane PAL a 21 05 1997 08 17 52 NULL TAB D 21 05 1997 08 07 28 O HE H 28 04 1997 10 27 02 O HST 11 H 28 04 1997 10 27 00 O NK H 28 04 1997 10 27 04 The narrow window at left shows three drivesf If the TNC is DIGI H 28 04 1997 10 27 02 connected to a network it also displayed the connected network et ee 1ce a i i A i O PROTKOL j drives Drives designate devices with which data are stored or A wae A i x i af SCRDP transferred One drive is the hard disk of the TNC
120. TNC registers an error during program run it automatically interrupts the machining process Programmed interruptions You can program interruptions directly in the part program The TNC interrupts the program run at a block containing one of the following entries STOP with and without a miscellaneous function Miscellaneous function MO M2 or M30 Miscellaneous function M6 determined by the machine tool builder To interrupt machining with the machine STOP button Press the machine STOP button The block which the TNC is currently executing is not completed The asterisk in the status display blinks If you do not wish to continue the machining process you can reset the TNC with the INTERNAL STOP soft key The asterisk in the status display goes out In this case the program must be restarted from the program beginning Interruption of machining by switching to the Program Run Single Block mode of operation You can interrupt a program that is being run in the Program Run Full Sequence mode of operation by switching to Program Run Single Block The TNC interrupts the machining process at the end of the current block 292 11 Test Run and Program Run Moving the machine axes during an interruption You can move the machine axes during an interruption in the same way as in the Manual Operation mode Example Retracting the spindle after tool breakage Interrupting machining Enable the external direction keys
121. The TNC provides two cycles for machining hole patterns 220 CIRCULAR PATTERN Point Patterns 221 LINEAR PATTERN RE o E You can combine Cycle 220 and Cycle 221 with the following fixed cycles E Cycle 1 PECKING Cycle 2 TAPPING with a floating tap holder Cycle 3 SLOT MILLING O gt Cycle 4 POCKET MILLING Cycle 5 CIRCULAR POCKET MILLING Cycle 17 RIGID TAPPING Cycle 18 THREAD CUTTING Cycle 200 DRILLING Cycle 201 REAMING Cycle 202 BORING Cycle 203 UNIVERSAL MILLING CYCLE Cycle 204 BACK BORING Cycle 212 POCKET FINISHING Cycle 213 STUD FINISHING Cycle 214 CIRCULAR POCKET FINISHING Cycle 215 CIRCULAR STUD FINISHING 8 4 C HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 185 2 CIRCULAR PATTERN Cycle 220 D 1 At rapid traverse the TNC moves the tool from its current k ar position to the starting point for the first machining operation oO The tool is positioned in the following sequence a E Move to 2nd set up clearance tool axis e E Approach starting point in the working plane oO E Move to set up clearance above the workpiece surface Q203 A tool axis O 2 From this position the TNC executes the last defined fixed cycle 3 The tool then approaches the starting point for the next machining operation on a straight line at set up clearance or 2nd 5 set up clearance 4 This process 1 to 3 is repeated until all machining operations gt have been executed Sen Q L gt Before prog
122. activate manual tilting Manual operation Test run s ie Tilt working plane 3D ROT To select manual tilting press the 3 D ROT soft Program run Inactive iw key Manual operation You can now select the desired menu option with the arrow keys 180 90 Enter the tilt angle 50 0000 Y 150 0000 2 100 0000 0 0000 B 180 0000 C 90 0000 aa M 579 To set the desired operating mode in menu option Tilt working plane to Active select the menu option and shift with the ENT key 2 5 Tilting the Workii D To conclude entry press the END soft key To reset the tilting function set the desired operating modes in menu Tilt working plane to Inactive If the Working Plane function is active and the TNC moves the machine axes in accordance with the tilted axes the status display shows the symbol i If you set the function Tilt working plane for the operating mode Program Run to Active the tilt angle entered in the menu becomes active in the first block of the part program If you are using Cycle 19 WORKING PLANE in the part program the angular values defined in the cycle starting at the cycle definition are effective Angular values entered in the menu will be overwritten 22 2 Manual Operation and Setup Ep LSS i mimm e c Q J Ss Inine 3 1 Programming and Executing Simple Mach 3 1 Programming and Executing Simple Machining Operations The ope
123. after you release the keys 0 To stop the axis press the machine STOP button You can move several axes at a time with these two methods You can change the feed rate at which the axes are traversed with the F soft key see 2 3 Spindle Speed S Feed Rate F and Miscellaneous Functions M HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 15 F O ro T me 5 gt N N S re O gt e N N Traversing with the HR 410 electronic handwheel The portable HR 410 handwheel is equipped with two permissive buttons The permissive buttons are located below the star grip You can only move the machine axes when an permissive button is depressed machine dependent function The HR 410 handwheel features the following operating elements EMERGENCY STOP Handwheel Permissive buttons Axis address keys Actual position capture key Keys for defining the feed rate slow medium fast the feed rates are set by the machine tool builder Direction in which the TNC moves the selected axis Machine function set by the machine tool builder The red indicators show the axis and feed rate you have selected It is also possible to move the machine axes with the handwheel during a program run To move an axis A Select the Electronic Handwheel mode of operation ra Press and hold the permissive button Select the axis AW Select the feed rate or Move
124. age for the resulting NC blocks Straight line with tangential connection If the straight line connects tangentially to another contour element initiate the dialog with the FLT soft key FLT To display the soft keys for free contour programming press the FK key To initiate the dialog press the FLT soft key Use the soft keys listed in the table at right to enter all known data in the block Free programming of circular arcs To display the soft keys for free contour programming press the FK key To initiate the dialog for free programming of circular arcs press the FC soft key The TNC displays soft keys with which you can enter direct data on the circular arc or data on the circle center see table at right Enter all known data in the block by using these soft keys The FK graphic displays the programmed contour element in red until sufficient data are entered If the entered data describe several solutions the graphic will display the contour element in green see Graphics during FK programming Circular arc with tangential connection If the circular arc connects tangentially to another contour element initiate the dialog with the FCT soft key 120 To display the soft keys for free contour programming press the FK key To initiate the dialog press the FCT soft key Use the soft keys listed in the table at right to enter all known data in the block X coordinate of the straight line end point
125. ailable 1 Finding the current text The search function is to find the next occurrence of the word in which the cursor is presently located Move the cursor to the desired word To select the search function press the FIND soft key Press the FIND CURRENT WORD soft key 2 Finding any text To select the search function press the FIND soft key The TNC displays the dialog prompt Find text Enter the text that you wish to find To find the text press the EXECUTE soft key To leave the search function press the END soft key Programming and editing Find text iPaaeasys BEGIN PGM 3516 MM BLK FORM 1 2 K 98 Y 90 2 40 BLK FORM 2 K 9 Y 90 2 0 TOOL DEF 50 TOOL CALL 1 2 81400 L 2 5 RO F MAX L X 0 Y 100 R F MAX M3 L 2 20 RO F MAX L 4 0 Y 80 RL F250 FPOL 4 0 Y 0 10 FC DR R80 CC4 0 CCY 0 11 FCT DR R 5 12 FCT DR R90 CCK 69 282 CCY 40 13 FSELECT 2 FIND CURRENT EXECUTE WORD a 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 62 4 Programming Fundamentals of NC File Management Programming Aids Pallet Management 4 10 Integrated Pocket Calculator The TNC features an integrated pocket calculator with the basic mathematical functions With the CALC key you can open and close an additional window for calculations You can move the window to any desired location on the TNC screen with the arrow keys The calculator is operated with short commands through the alphabetic keyboard The commands are shown in a specia
126. ain axis Center misalignment in secondary axis Compensation factor for 1st axis Compensation factor for 2nd axis Compensation factor for 3rd axis Power ratio for 1st axis Power ratio for 2nd axis Power ratio for 3rd axis Index 1 X axis 2 Y axis 3 Z axis Index 4 A axis 5 B axis 6 C axis Index 7 U axis 8 V axis 9 W axis Acknowledgement value 0 No datum table active Acknowledgement value 1 Datum table active Active line Palette number from PAL PGM field Acknowledgement value 0 MP does not exist Acknowledgement value 1 MP exists 10 Programming Q Parameters FN19 PLC Transferring values to the PLC The function FN19 PLC transfers up to two numerical values or Q parameters to the PLC Increments and units 0 1 um or 0 0001 Example Transfer the numerical value 10 which means 1 um or 0 001 to the PLC mona FN20 WAIT FOR NC and PLC synchronization This function may only be used with the permission of your machine tool builder With function FN20 WAIT FOR you can synchronize the NC and PLC with each other during a program run The NC stops machining until the condition that you have programmed in the FN20 block is fulfilled With FN10 the TNC can check the following operands Marker M O0 to 4999 Input Oto 31 128 to 152 64 to 126 first PL 401 B 192 to 254 second PL 401 B Output O O to 30 32 to 62 first PL 401 B 64 to 94 second PL 401 B Counter C 48 to 79 Timer T 0 to 95 Byte B O to 4095
127. al distance of traverse 358 Behavior with M94 At the start of block the TNC first reduces the current angular value to a value less than 360 and then moves the tool to the programmed value If several rotary axes are active M94 will reduce the display of all rotary axes As an alternative you can enter a rotary axis after M94 The TNC then reduces the display only of this axis Example NC blocks To reduce display of all active rotary axes 7 5 Miscellaneojgjunctions for Rotary Axes To reduce display of the C axis only To reduce display of all active rotary axes and then move the tool in the C axis to the programmed value Effect M94 is effective only in the block in which M94 is programmed M94 becomes effective at the start of block HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 145 75 Viscellansous Functions for Rotary Axes Automatic compensation of machine geometry when working with tilted axes M114 Standard behavior The TNC moves the tool to the positions given in the part program If the position of a tilted axis changes in the program the resulting offset in the linear axes must be calculated by a postprocessor see figure at top right and traversed in a positioning block As the machine geometry is also relevant the NC program must be calculated separately for each machine tool Behavior with M114 If the position of a controlled tilted axis changes in the program the TNC automatically compensates the tool o
128. all the file manager and select a file of a different type e g a part program HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 Tool table editing Programm ing and editing Tool radius lt lt F ile TOOL T HMH 150 0000 Y A 0 0000 B BEGIN END MM T PAGE PAGE FP 50 0000 2 100 0000 180 0000 C 90 0000 aoa M 579 EDIT F IND POCKET TOOL OFF LON NAME TABLE 73 _ 5 2 Tool Data E 5 2 Tool Data Additional notes on tool tables Machine parameter 7266 x defines which data can be entered in the tool table and in what sequence the data is displayed Note when configuring the tool table that the total width cannot be more than Select end of table a 250 characters Wider tables cannot be transferred over the interface The width of the individual columns is given in the description of MP7266 x BEGIN Select beginning of table m v D Q m Select previous page in table v D D m You can overwrite individual columns or Select next page in table lines of a tool table with the contents of another file Prerequisites Look for the tool name in the table The target file must exist a Tmn DOH zoz mr o The file to be copied must contain only Show tool information in columns or LISI the columns or lines you want to FORMULAR show the information on one tool on one screen page replace To copy individual columns or lines press the REPLACE FIELDS soft key see section 4 4 Enhanced Fil
129. alues Y Setting the data interface In the menu option PRINT or PRINTI TEST you must enter the path for storing the text tile See 12 MOD Functions Setting the Data Interface The function FN16 FPRINT transfers Q parameter values and texts in a selectable format through the data interface for example to a printer If you save the values internally or send them to a computer the TNC saves the data in the file that you defined in the FN 16 block To output the formatted texts and O parameter values create a text file with the TNC s text editor and define the output format and Q parameters in this file Example of a text file to define the output format TEST RECORD IMPELLER CENTER OF GRAVITY NO OF MEASURED VALUES 1 Al FoO 0er Q31 YL 5 3LF O82 LA BLF U33 I RR RR SR Te A AA a L When you create a text file use the following formatting functions p S Define output format for texts and variables between the quotation marks 5 3LF Define format for Q parameter long floating 5 places before and 4 places behind the decimal point S Format for text variable Separator between output format and parameter End of block character HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 263 ions Funct itiona 10 8 Add ions O D O Q T i Functi mona 10 8 Add The following functions allow you to include the following additio nal information in the protocol log
130. ameter determines the working direction If you want to clear and finish the pocket with the same tool use a centercut end mill ISO 1641 and enter a low feed rate for plunging Set up clearance Q200 incremental value Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface Depth Q201 incremental value Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of pocket Feed rate for plunging Q206 Traversing speed of the tool im mm min when moving to depth If you are plunge cutting into the material enter a value lower than that defined in Q207 Plunging depth Q202 incremental value Infeed per cut Feed rate for milling Q207 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min while milling HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 Q203 Z a Q201 o Sey Example NC blocks 17 ol Pockets Studs and Slots ing Pockets Studs and Slots ing Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute value Coordinate of the workpiece surface 2nd set up clearance Q204 incremental value Coordinate in the tool axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece clamping devices can occur Center in 1st axis Q216 absolute value Center of the pocket in the main axis of the working plane Center in 2nd axis Q217 absolute value Center of the pocket in the secondary axis of the working plane Workpiece blank dia 0222 Diameter of the premachined pocket Enter the workpiece blank diameter
131. ance at the retraction feed rate If you have entered a 2nd set up clearance the tool subsequently moves to that position in FMAX HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 159 8 2 Drilling Cycles 8 2 Drilling Cycles I Before programming note the following Program a positioning block for the starting point hole center in the working plane with RADIUS COMPENSATION RO The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter TOTAL HOLE DEPTH determines the working direction Set up clearance Q200 incremental value Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface N J w I SS Depth Q201 incremental value Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of hole tip of drill taper Feed rate for plunging Q206 Traversing speed of the tool during drilling in mm min Plunging depth Q202 incremental value Infeed per cut The TNC will go to depth in one movement if the plunging depth is equal to the depth the plunging depth is greater than the depth The depth does not have to be a multiple of the plunging depth Dwell time at top Q210 Time in seconds that the tool remains at set up clearance after having been retracted from the hole for chip release Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute value Coordinate of the workpiece surface 2nd set up clearance Q204 incremental value Coordinate in the tool axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece clamping devices can OCCU Decrement Q212 incremental val
132. aphically Move workpiece blank downward graphically Show workpiece blank referenced to the set datum Show the entire traversing range referenced to the displayed workpiece blank Show the machine datum in the working space not Show a position determined by the machine tool builder e g tool change position in the working e plane ei e et lel fe lel Let fled le Show the workpiece datum in the working space T es O T ile Enable ON or disable OFF work space monitoring 312 12 MOD Functions 12 9 Position Display Types In the Manual Operation mode and in the program run modes of operation you can select the type of coordinates to be displayed The figure at right shows the different tool positions 7 Starting position 2 Target position of the tool 3 Workpiece datum 4 Machine datum The TNC position displays can show the following coordinates Nominal position the value presently commanded by the TNC NOML Actual position current tool position ACTL Reference position the actual position as referenced REF to the machine datum Distance remaining to the programmed position DIST difference between actual and target position Servo lag difference between nominal and actual positions LAG Deflection of the measuring touch probe DEPL With the MOD function Position display 1 you can select the position display in the status display With Position display 2 you can select
133. arting point hole center in the working plane with RADIUS COMPENSATION RO Program a positioning block for the starting point in the tool axis set up clearance above the workpiece surface The algebraic sign for the depth parameter determines the working direction A floating tap holder is required for tapping It must compensate the tolerances between feed rate and spindle speed during the tapping process When a cycle is being run the spindle speed override knob is disabled The feed rate override knob is active only within a limited range which is defined by the machine tool builder refer to your machine manual For tapping right hand threads activate the spindle with M3 for left hand threads use M4 Setup clearance f incremental value Distance between tool tip at starting position and workpiece surface Standard value approx 4 times the thread pitch Total hole depth g thread length incremental value Distance between workpiece surface and end of thread Dwell time in seconds Enter a value between 0 and 0 5 seconds to avoid wedging of the tool during retraction Feed rate F Traversing speed of the tool during tapping The feed rate is calculated as follows F S x p where F is the feed rate in mm min S is the spindle speed in rpm and p is the thread pitch in mm Retracting after a program interruption If you interrupt program run during tapping with the machine stop button the TNC will
134. ath for example CONV35 FK1 50 H If you want to define an ISO program to be a cycle enter the Tile type behind the program name 12 pou Program name Enter the name of the program you ces want to call and if necessary the directory it is located In The program is called with CYCL CALL separate block or M99 blockwise or M89 modally HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 7 CYCL DEF 12 0 PGM CALL 8 CYCL DEF 12 1 LOT31 9 ooo M99 IO TOTO MOF O TOTORO TOY OMOTO OTTO ROTORO CR eee eo ew ee ee 8 0 BEGIN PGM LOT31 MM END PGM LOT31 oeeeveeee ee eo eo ee 8 8 Example Program call A callable program 50 is to be called into a program via a cycle call Example NC blocks 235 8 8 Special Cycles 8 8 Special Cycles ORIENTED SPINDLE STOP Cycle 13 7 The TNC and the machine tool must be specially prepared by the machine tool builder for the use of Cycle ihe The control can control the machine tool spindle and rotate it to a given angular position Oriented spindle stops are required for Tool changing systems with a defined tool change position Orientation of the transmitter receiver window of HEIDENHAIN 3 D touch probes with infrared transmission Effect The angle of orientation defined in the cycle is positioned to by entering M19 or M20 depending on the machine If you program M19 without having defined Cycle 13 the TNC positions the machine tool spindle t
135. ating modes on the next page ALLOW 0 7 CYCL DEF 6 3 ANGLE 90 F600 CYCL CALL CYCL DEF 14 0 CONTOUR GEOMETRY CYCL DEF 14 1 CONTOUR LABEL 13 X 470 4 Y 55 5 14 715 716 71 718 EJ Bi ET oO START STOP START RESET SINGLE AT LAU OF F ON o N START 6 1 Introduction Prosram Run Single Block Program Run Single Block aT BLK FORM 1 2 K 20 Y 20 2 20 BLK FORM 2 K 2 Y 20 2 TOOL CALL 1 2 1880 L 2 5 RO F MAX M3 L X 50 5 RO F MAX M8 L 2 5 RO F MAK CC 0 Y 0 LP PR 14 PA 45 RR F500 In the Program Run Full Sequence mode of operation the TNC executes a part program continuously to its end or to a manual or programmed stop You can resume program run after an interruption 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 In the Program Run Single Block mode of operation you execute each block separately by pressing the machine START button 0 Soft keys for selecting the screen layout 150 0000 Y 50 0000 2 4 100 0000 9 O N pad jal a w q M 579 T i Program l p J Bije BF ea te PGM Left program blocks right program structure n PGM Left program blocks right STATUS PEA PGM Left program blocks right graphics E Graphics GRAPHICS AET Sele Spay BEGIN PGM FK1 MM BLK FORM 1 2 K Y 0 Z 20 BLK FORM 2 H 1 Y 100 2 0 TOOL CALL 1 2 8500 L 2 25 RO F MAK L X 20 Y 30 RO F MAX L 2 10 RO F1000 M3 APPR CT X 2 3 CCAS R 5 RL F250 FC DR R18 C
136. ay are referenced to the tilted coordinate system The positions displayed immediately after cycle definition may not be the same as the coordinates of the last programmed position before Cycle 19 Workspace monitoring The TNC monitors only those axes in the tilted coordinate system that are moved If any of the software limit switches is traversed the TNC will display an error message Positioning in a tilted coordinate system With the miscellaneous function M130 you can move the tool while the coordinate system Is tilted to positions that are referenced to the non tilted coordinate system see section 73 Miscellaneous Functions for Coordinate Data Combining coordinate transformation cycles When combining coordinate transformation cycles always make sure the working plane is swiveled around the active datum You can program a datum shift before activating Cycle 19 In this case you are shifting the machine based coordinate system If you program a datum shift after having activated Cycle 19 you are shifting the tilted coordinate system Important When resetting the cycles use the reverse sequence used for defining the them 1 Activate datum shift 2 Activate tilting function 3 Activate rotation Machining 1 Reset rotation 2 Reset tilting function 3 Reset datum shift Automatic workpiece measurement in the tilted system The cycle TCH PROBE 1 0 REF PLANE enables you to have the TNC measure a work
137. bsolute value Starting point coordinate of the surface to be multipass milled in the tool axis 2nd point in 1st axis Q228 absolute value Stopping point coordinate of the surface to be multipass milled in the main axis of the working plane 2nd point in 2nd axis Q229 absolute value Stopping point coordinate of the surface to be multipass milled in the secondary axis of the working plane 2nd point in 3rd axis Q230 absolute value Stopping point coordinate of the surface to be multipass milled in the tool axis 3rd point in 1st axis Q231 absolute value Coordinate of point g in the main axis of the working plane Srd point in 2nd axis Q232 absolute value Coordinate of point 8 in the subordinate axis of the working plane Srd point in 3rd axis Q233 absolute value Coordinate of point 8 in the tool axis Ath point in 1st axis Q234 absolute value Coordinate of point 4 in the main axis of the working plane Ath point in 2nd axis Q235 absolute value Coordinate of point 4 in the subordinate axis of the working plane Ath point in 3rd axis Q236 absolute value Coordinate of point in the tool axis Number of cuts Q240 Number of passes to be made between points M and 4 and between points 2 and 8 Feed rate for milling Q207 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min while milling The TNC performs the first step at half the programmed feed rate HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 Q228 Q231 Q234 Q225
138. calculating the transtormed coordinate system the TNC considers both the mechanically influenced offsets of the particular swivel head the so called translational components and offsets caused by tilting of the tool 3 D tool length compensation 20 2 Manual Operation and Setup Traversing the reference points in tilted axes With tilted axes you use the machine axis direction buttons to cross over the reference points The TNC interpolates the corresponding axes Be sure that the function for tilting the working plane is active in the Manual Operation mode and the actual angle of the tilted axis was entered in the menu field Setting the datum in a tilted coordinate system After you have positioned the rotary axes set the datum in the same way as for a non tilted system The TNC then converts the datum for the tilted coordinate system If your machine tool features axis control the angular values for this calculation are taken from the actual position of the rotary axis IE You must not set the datum in the tilted working plane if in machine parameter 7500 bit 3 is set If you do the TNC will calculate the wrong offset If your machine tool is not equipped with axis control you must enter the actual position of the rotary axis in the menu for manual tilting The actual positions of one or several rotary axes must match the entry Otherwise the TNC will calculate an incorrect datum Datum setting on machines with rotary
139. ced coordinates for the tool change position If TOOL CALL O is programmed before the first tool call the TNC moves the tool spindle in the tool axis to a position that is independent of the tool length Manual tool change To change the tool manually stop the spindle and move the tool to the tool change position Move to the tool change position under program control Interrupt program run see section 11 4 Program Run Change the tool Resume the program run see section 11 4 Program Run Automatic tool change If your machine tool has automatic tool changing capability the program run is not interrupted When the TNC reaches a TOOL CALL it replaces the inserted tool by another from the tool magazine Automatic tool change if the tool life expires M101 7 This function can vary depending on the individual machine tool Refer to your machine tool manual The TNC automatically changes the tool if the tool life TIME1 expires during program run To use this miscellaneous function activate M101 at the beginning of the program M101 is reset with M102 The tool is not always changed immediately but depending on the workload of the control a few NC blocks later HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 Prerequisites for standard NC blocks with radius compensation RO RR RL The radius of the replacement tool must be the same as that of the original tool If the radii are not equal the TNC displays an error message an
140. cently selected setting 296 11 Test Run and Program Run yp Let i EKNE R ih men riot nM ah j f m AS D tm tS Hi m y Oy of 10 57 BAN H f m M OD Functions ing Changing and Exiting the MOD Functions N a N q 12 1 Selecting Changing and Exiting the MOD Functions The MOD functions provide additional displays and input possibilities The available MOD functions depend on the selected operating mode To select the MOD functions Call the mode of operation in which you wish to change the MOD function moo To select the MOD functions press the MOD key The figures at right show typical screen menus in Programming and Editing figure at upper right Test Run figure at center right and in a machine operating mode see figure on next page Changing the settings Select the desired MOD function in the displayed menu with the arrow keys There are three possibilities for changing a setting depending on the function selected Enter a numerical value directly e g when determining traverse range limit Change a setting by pressing the ENT key e g when setting program input Change a setting via a selection window If there are more than one possibilities for a particular setting available you can superimpose a window listing all of the given possibilities by pressing the GOTO key Select the desired setting directly by pressing the corresponding numerical key to the left of the colon or using th
141. channel around the contour clockwise for islands and counterclockwise for pockets 0 Mill channel around the contour clockwise for pockets and counterclockwise for islands 1 First mill the channel then rough out the contour 0 First rough out the contour then mill the channel 2 Combine compensated contours 0 Combine uncompensated contours 4 Complete one process for all infeeds before switching to the other process 0 Mill channel and rough out for each infeed depth before continuing to the next depth 8 The following note applies to the Cycles 6 15 16 21 22 23 and 24 At the end of the cycle move the tool to the position that was last programmed before the cycle call 0 At the end of the cycle retract the tool in the tool axis only 16 Cycle 4 POCKET MILLING and Cycle 5CIRCULAR POCKET MILLING Overlap factor MP7430 0 1 to 1 414 Permissible deviation of circle radius between circle end point and circle starting point Behavior of M functions x The k factors for position loop gain are lt _ set by the machine tool builder Refer to your machine manual 330 MP7431 0 0001 to 0 016 mm MP7440 Program stop with MOG 0 No program stop with MOG 1 No cycle call with M89 0 Cycle call with M89 2 Program stop with M functions 0 No program stop with M functions 4 k factors cannot be switched through M105 and M106 0 k factors can be switched through M105 and M106 8 Re
142. chine parameters etc of your machine tool are stored Please contact your machine tool builder for more information on both the backup program and the floppy disk Saving the contents of the entire hard disk up to 1500 MB can take up to several hours In this case it is a good idea to save the data outside of working hours e g overnight or to use the PARALLEL EXECUTE function to copy in the background while you work HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 33 J c O c 4 3 Standard 4 3 Standard File Management Use the standard file manager if you want to store all of the files in one directory or if you are used to working with the file manager on old TNC controls Set the MOD function PGM MGT to Standard see Section 12 5 Calling the file manager PGM legy Press the PGM MGT The TNC displays the file management window see Fig at top right freratin JPEOST Am table editing File name 3 0 a TNC File name TCHPRNT CVREPORT FRAESEN FRAESEN bytes Status 73 7753 7570 DT 6580 332 192 1194 258 238 123 240 1GT5 226 39 fileCs 915072 kbyte vacant PAGE PAGE SELECT DELETE COPY LAST ria iae as DDD MDI 11 111 112 12 bk cL The window shows you all of the files that are stored in the TNC FILE NAME Name with max 16 characters Each file is shown with additional information see table at center and file type right BYTE File size in
143. cle center for the new FK contour If you enter conventional polar coordinates that refer to a pole from a CC block you have defined previously then you must enter the pole again in a CC block after the FK contour Resulting NC blocks for FL FPOL and FCT See figure at lower right HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 CCK Ja O Sms O Sum 0 Sms Oo q ba Oo X coordinate of the circle center Y coordinate of the circle center Polar coordinate radius of the circle center Polar coordinate angle of the circle center For data that are based on other blocks see Relati ve data for auxiliary points see Auxiliary points in this section 121 6 6 Path Contours FK Free C 6 6 Path Contours FK el ontour Programming Auxiliary points You can enter the coordinates of auxiliary points that are located on the contour or in its proximity for both free programmed straight lines and free programmed circular arcs The soft keys are available as soon as you initiate the FK dialog with the FL FLT FC or FCT soft key Auxiliary points for a straight line If the auxiliary points are located on a straight line or on the extension of a Straight line use the soft keys listed in the table at Upper right If the auxiliary points are located at a distance D from a straight line use the soft keys listed in the second table at right Auxiliary
144. cle center pole for polar coordinates Circle with center Circle with radius Circular arc with tangential connection Chamfer oe feo o i TI ol HLE Corner rounding Tool functions A Enter or call tool length and radius DEF CALL Cycles subprograms and program section repeats 4 je fe 4 aid B Define and call cycles Enter and call labels for Subprogramming and program section repeats LBL LBL SET CALL da Program stop in a program TOUCH Enter touch probe functions in a program Coordinate axes and numbers editing Select coordinate axes or enter them in a program 9 Numbers Decimal point Change arithmetic sign Polar coordinates Incremental dimensions Q parameters Capture actual position eo 7880 x Skip dialog questions delete words ms Z Ete Confirm entry and resume dialog FQ End block CE Clear numerical entry or TNC error message ENT Abort dialog delete program section HEIDENHAIN st ON START z RESET Ti 7 gt SINGLE START yor o START POEST AIEA MOE EAEE AOE Oa aanas SARA R EA DA AEI ARE IND CALAIS SLT rs DEIT abd 4 et DI ASSL aS ee ie cee eee e FLT RN ETT TP a 9 OT Pe ae F h ety Te RAITA Ta ee eee see Desc bien aun ithe cx ir aes en 5 AREER EEAS Ao IL y E DA ENTA TA LA DNS JAE TOAT RESE TNC Models Software and Features This manual describes functions and features provided by the TNCs as of the following NC software
145. contain information on The workpiece blank Pode auer Tool definitions tool calls Feed rates and spindle speeds as well as Path contours cycles and other functions The last block of a program is identified by END PGM the pro gram name and the active unit of measure 4 5 Creating and Defining the blank form BLK FORM Immediately after initiating a new program you define a cuboid workpiece blank This definition is needed for the TNC s graphic Z simulation feature The sides of the workpiece blank lie parallel to the X Y and Z axes and can be up to 100 000 mm long The blank MAX form is defined by two of its corner points Y MIN point the smallest X Y and Z coordinates of the blank form entered as absolute values MAX point the largest X Y and Z coordinates of the blank form entered as absolute or incremental values I You only need to define the blank form if you wish to run MIN a graphic test for the program The TNC can display the graphic only if the ratio of the short side to the long sides of the BLK FORM is less than 1 64 HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 53 N z re O pe am 5 4 5 Creating and Creating a new part program You always enter a part program in the Programming and Editing mode of operation Program initiation in an example Select the Programming and Editing mode of operation To call the file manager press the PGM MGT MGT key
146. culating rom and probe feed rate MP6570 1 000 to 120 000 m min Coordinates of the TT 120 stylus center relative to the machine datum MP6580 0 traverse range 1 X axis MP6580 1 traverse range 1 Y axis MP6580 2 traverse range 1 Z axis MP6581 0 traverse range 2 X axis MP6581 1 traverse range 2 Y axis MP6581 2 traverse range 2 Z axis MP6582 0 traverse range 3 X axis MP6582 1 traverse range 3 Y axis MP6582 2 traverse range 3 Z axis N w q4 os 0 Sums 7e mD Som g i m TNC displays TNC editor Programming station MP7210 TNC with machine 0 TNC as programming station with active PLC 1 TNC as programming station with inactive PLC 2 Acknowledgment of POWER INTERRUPTED after switch on MP7212 Acknowledge with key 0 Acknowledge automatically 1 ISO programming Block number increment MP7220 0 to 150 HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 323 Disabling the selection of file types MP7224 0 All file tyoes selectable via soft key 0 Disable selection of HEIDENHAIN programs soft key SHOW H 1 Disable selection of ISO programs soft key SHOW 2 Disable selection of tool tables soft key SHOW T 4 Disable selection of datum tables soft key SHOW D 8 Disable selection of pallet tables soft key SHOW P 16 Disable selection of text files soft key SHOW A 32 Disable selection of point tables soft key SHOW PNT 64 Disabling the editor for cer
147. d rate becomes effective again You can also use an RND block for a tangential contour approach if you do not want to use an APPR function 108 6 Programming Programming Contours HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 Define blank form for graphic workpiece simulation Define tool in the program Call tool in the spindle axis and with the spindle speed S Retract tool in the spindle axis at rapid traverse FMAX Pre position the tool Move to working depth at feed rate F 1000 mm min Approach the contour at point 1 on a straight line with tangential connection Move to point 2 Point 3 first straight line for corner 3 Program chamfer with length 10 mm Point 4 2nd straight line for corner 3 1st straight line for corner 4 Program chamfer with length 20 mm Move to last contour point 1 second straight line for corner 4 Depart the contour on a straight line with tangential connection Retract in the tool axis end program 109 6 4 Path Contours Coordinates 6 4 Path Contours A Coordinates 10 Define blank form for graphic workpiece simulation Define tool in the program Call tool in the spindle axis and with the spindle speed S Retract tool in the spindle axis at rapid traverse FMAX Pre position the tool Move to working depth at feed rate F 1000 mm min Approach the contour at point 1 on a circular arc with tangential connection Point 2 first straig
148. d and changed in the Programming and Editing mode of operation The coordinates of the straight line end point and the components of the surface normal vectors are to be defined by the CAD system HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 DL gt 0 83 re e c Oo Q imensiona 5 4 Three D o 5 5 Working with Cutting Data Tables DATEI TOOLT MM cpr A2 oe ae A H he W The TNC must be specially prepared by the machine tool a g builder for the use of cutting data tables Goo eae or cs Some functions or additional functions described here A may not be provided on your machine tool Your machine manual provides more detailed information k ar In cutting data tables containing various workpiece and cutting material combinations the TNC can use the cutting speed Vc and the tooth feed fz to calculate the spindle speed S and the feed rate 0 BEGIN PGM xxx H MM t i Wt F This calculation is only possible if you defined the workpiece 1 BLK FORM 0 1 Z X 0 Y 0 Z 20 c material in the program and various tool specific features in the tool 2 t100 00 2 0 S table 5 TOOL CALL 2 ZEEE lt C L gt Before you let the TNC automatically calculate the cutting data the tool table from which the TNC is to take the tool specific data must be first be activated in the Test Run mode status S 2 Editing function for cutting data tables Softkey __ LO INSER
149. d does not replace the tool Prerequisites for NC blocks with surface normal vectors and 3 D compensation see Chapter 5 4 Three Dimensional Tool Compensation The radius of the replacement tool can differ from the radius of the original tool The tool radius is not included in program blocks transmitted from CAD systems You can enter the delta value DR either in the tool table or in the TOOL CALL block If DR is positive the TNC displays an error message and does not replace the tool You can suppress this message with the M function M107 and reactivate it with M108 77 _ 5 2 Tool Data 5 3 Tool Compensation The TNC adjusts the spindle path in the tool axis by the compensation value for the tool length In the working plane it compensates the tool radius If you are writing the part program directly on the TNC the tool radius compensation is effective only in the working plane The TNC accounts for the compensation value in up to five axes including am Ja N am 3 e QO the rotary axes Tool length compensation Length compensation becomes effective automatically as soon as a tool is called and the tool axis moves To cancel length compensation call a tool with the length L 0 For tool length compensation the TNC takes the delta values from both the TOOL CALL block and the tool table into account Compensation value L DLtoo1 cat DLtag where L is the tool leng
150. d rate according to a preset characteristic curve The minimum input value is 10 of the programmed digitizing feed rate MP6362 Feed rate reduction not active 0 Feed rate reduction active 1 Radial acceleration during digitizing with the measuring touch probe MP6370 enables you to limit the feed rate of the TNC for circular movements during digitizing Circular movements are caused for example by sharp changes of direction As long as the programmed digitizing feed rate is less than the feed rate calculated with MP6370 the TNC will move at the programmed feed rate Determine the appropriate value for your requirements by trial and error MP6370 0 001 to 5 000 m s2 recommended input value 0 1 HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 321 e q4 Sos 0 Sous e _ C Sou Lam g a m q N da q4 aos 0 Su e mD C Som jam g a m Target window for digitizing contour lines with a measuring touch probe When you are digitizing contour lines the individual contour lines do not end exactly in their Starting points With machine parameter MP6390 you can define a square target window within which the end point must lie after the touch probe has orbited the model Enter half the side length of the target window for the side length MP6390 0 1 to 4 0000 mm Radius measurement with theTT 120 touch probe Probing direction MP6505 0 traverse
151. datum A coordinate identifies the distance trom the datum in one of these directions A position in a plane is thus described through two coordinates and a position in space through three coordinates Coordinates that are referenced to the datum are referred to as absolute coordinates Relative coordinates are referenced to any other known position datum you define within the coordinate system Relative coordinate values are also referred to as incremental coordinate values Reference systems on milling machines When using a milling machine you orient tool movements to the Cartesian coordinate system The illustration at right shows how the Cartesian coordinate system describes the machine axes The figure at right illustrates the right hand rule for remembering the three axis directions the middle finger is pointing in the positive direction of the tool axis from the workpiece toward the tool the Z axis the thumb is pointing in the positive X direction and the index finger in the positive Y direction The TNC 426 can control a machine tool in up to 5 axes the TNC 430 controls up to 9 axes The axes U V and W are secondary linear axes parallel to the main axes X Y and Z respectively Rotary axes are designated as A B and C The illustration at lower right shows the assignment of secondary axes and rotary axes to the main axes HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 29 4 1 i of NC
152. dinates Hole E Hole 2 Hole 8 X 10 mm A 30 mm X 50 mm Y 10 mm Y 20 mm Y 30 mm Relative workpiece positions Relative coordinates are referenced to the last programmed nominal position of the tool which serves as the relative imaginary datum When you write a part program in incremental coordinates you thus program the tool to move by the distance between the previous and the subsequent nominal positions Incremental coordinates are therefore also referred to as chain dimensions To program a position in incremental coordinates enter the prefix I before the axis Example 2 Holes dimensioned with relative coordinates Absolute coordinates of hole 4 X 10 mm Y 10 mm Hole referenced to hole 4 Hole 6 referenced to hole 5 IX 20 mm IX 20 mm IY 10 mm IY 10 mm Absolute and incremental polar coordinates Absolute polar coordinates always refer to the pole and the reference axis Incremental polar coordinates always refer to the last programmed nominal position of the tool HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 31 4 1 Fungiontas of NC Selecting the datum A production drawing identifies a certain form element of the workpiece usually a corner as the absolute datum Before setting the datum you align the workpiece with the machine axes and move the tool in each axis to a known position relative to the workpiece You then set the TNC display to either zero or a predetermin
153. ditional functions 261 basic mathematical functions 255 circle calculation 258 Circle calculations 258 if then decisions 259 programming notes 252 Trigonometric functions 257 Radius compensation 79 entering 80 inside corners 81 machining corners 81 outside corners 81 Rapid traverse 68 Reaming 157 Rectangular pocket finishing 170 roughing 169 Rectangular stud finishing 172 Reference system 29 Returning to the contour 296 Rotary axis 144 reducing the display 145 shorterpath traverse 144 Rotation 225 Rough out See SL Cycles Ruled surface 216 Index Index Scaling factor 226 Scaling factor axis specific 227 Screen layout 4 Selecting the datum 32 Setting the BAUD RATE 300 Shorterpath traverse of rotary axes M126 144 Side finishing 199 SL Cycles Contour cycle 193 contour data 195 floor finishing 199 overlapping contours 193 overview 191 pilot drilling 197 Rough out 198 side finishing 199 Slot milling 178 reciprocating 179 Slot milling 179 Software number 299 Spindle orientation 236 Spindle speed 17 changing 18 entering 18 68 Spline interpolation 130 Block format 130 Input ranges 131 Status displays 7 additional 8 general 7 Straight line segments 103 113 Structuring programs 58 Subprogramming 240 calling 241 operating sequence 240 programming 241 programming notes 240 Surface normal vectors 82 Switch off 14 Switch on 14 synchronize NC and PLC 269 System data reading 265 Tapping rigid
154. duce the feed rate in the tool axis with M103 F function inactive 0 Reduce the feed rate in the tool axis with M103 F function active 16 13 Tables and Overviews Maximum contouring speed at a feed rate override setting of 100 in the program run modes Datums from a datum table are reference to the Running pallet tables HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 MP7470 0 to 99 999 mm min MP7475 Workpiece datum 0 Machine datum 1 MP7683 Program run single block Run one line of the active NC program at every NC start 0 Program run single block Run the entire NC program at every NC Start 1 Program run full sequence Run the entire NC program at every NC Start 0 Program run full sequence Run all NC programs up to the next pallet at every NC start 2 Program run full sequence Run the entire NC program at every NC Start 0 Program run full sequence Run the entire pallet file at every NC start 4 Program run full sequence Run the entire pallet file at every NC start 0 Program run full sequence If running of the complete pallet file is selected 4 then run the pallet file without interruption i e until you press NC stop 8 331 e S q4 a 0 aa e _ C Sou c g am m q Electronic handwheels Handwheel type MP7640 Machine without handwheel 0 HR 330 with additional keys the handwheel keys for traverse direction and rapid traverse are evalua
155. e Lieber LDL fe BERRA TE Li ELAULAEE T as a A oa The TNC 426 B the oll 1 1 The TNC 426 B the TNC 430 HEIDENHAIN TNC controls are workshop oriented contouring controls that enable you to program conventional machining operations right at the machine in an easy to use conversational programming language They are designed for milling drilling and boring machines as well as for machining centers The TNC 426 B can control up to 5 axes the TNC 430 can control up to 9 axes You can also change the angular position of the spindle under program control An integrated hard disk provides storage for as many programs as you like even if they were created off line or by digitizing For quick calculations you can call up the on screen pocket calculator at any time Keyboard and screen layout are clearly arranged in a such way that the functions are fast and easy to use Programming HEIDENHAIN conversational and ISO formats HEIDENHAIN conversational programming is an especially easy method of writing programs Interactive graphics illustrate the individual machining steps for programming the contour If a production drawing is not dimensioned for NC the HEIDENHAIN FK free contour programming carries out the necessary calculations automatically Workpiece machining can be graphically simulated either during or before actual machining It is also possible to program in ISO format or DNC mode You can also ente
156. e plunge cutting into the material enter a low value if you have already cleared the stud enter a higher feed rate Plunging depth Q202 incremental value Infeed per cut Enter a value greater than O Feed rate for milling Q207 Traversing speed of the tool In mm min while milling Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute value Coordinate of the workpiece surface 172 a203 8 Programming Cycles 2nd set up clearance Q204 incremental value Coordinate in the tool axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece clamping devices can occur Center in 1st axis Q216 absolute value Center of the stud in the main axis of the working plane Center in 2nd axis Q217 absolute value Center of the stud in the secondary axis of the working plane First side length Q218 incremental value Stud length parallel to the main axis of the working plane Second side length Q219 incremental value Stud length parallel to the secondary axis of the working plane Corner radius Q220 Radius of the stud corner Allowance in 1st axis Q221 incremental value Allowance in the main axis of the working plane referenced to the length of the stud CIRCULAR POCKET MILLING Cycle 5 1 The tool penetrates the workpiece at the starting position pocket center and advances to the first plunging depth 2 The tool subsequently follows a spiral path at the feed rate F s
157. e tool during reaming In mm min Dwell time at depth Q211 Time in seconds that the tool remains at the hole bottom Retraction feed rate O208 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min when retracting from the hole If you enter Q208 0 the tool retracts at the reaming feed rate Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute value Coordinate of the workpiece surface 2nd set up clearance Q204 incremental value Coordinate in the tool axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece clamping devices can occur HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 Example NC blocks 15 8 2 Drilling Cycles 8 2 Drilling Cycles BORING Cycle 202 7 Machine and control must be specially prepared by the machine tool builder to enable Cycle 202 1 The TNC positions the tool in the tool axis at rapid traverse FMAX to set up clearance above the workpiece surface 2 The tool drills to the programmed depth at the feed rate for plunging 3 If programmed the tool remains at the hole bottom for the entered dwell time with active spindle rotation for cutting free 4 The TNC then orients the spindle to the 0 position with an oriented spindle stop 5 If retraction is selected the tool retracts in the programmed direction by 0 2 mm fixed value 6 The tool then retracts to set up clearance at the retraction feed rate and from there if programmed to the 2nd set up c
158. e Manage ment Sa l BEGIN Move to beginning of line Move to end of line COPY Copy the highlighted field FIELD PASTE Insert the copied field FIELD Add the entered number of lines tools APPEND to the end of the table N LINES m m gello me m SHOLI Display Do not display pocket numbers Display all tools only those tools that are HIDE stored in the pocket table OFF ON 74 5 Programming Tools Pocket table for tool changer Pocket table editing Special tool Yes ENT No NOENT The TOOL P table for tool pocket is programmed in a program run IEA mode of operation Ts PLC BBBG0G8R BBB80E8R To select the pocket table 90000000 TOOL To select the tool table press the TOOL TABLE soft 00000000 TABLE key 10000000A L xeaeaeaae BB0G88GR POCKET To select the pocket table TABLE press the POCKET TABLE soft key EDIT Set the EDIT soft key to ON 150 0000 Y 50 0000 Z 100 000 OFF OW A 0 000A B 180 000A C 90 0000 KR T ao You can enter the following information on a tool into a pocket table SeGIN END PAGE PACE reset coi waa voor tf Jl tf fl py OFF LON LINE TABLE M 579 P Pocket number of the tool in the tool magazine T Tool number Tool number ST Special tool with a large radius requiring several Special tool pockets in the tool magazine If your special tool takes up pockets in front of and behind its actual pocket these additional pockets need to be locked i
159. e STARTING and STOPPING ANGLES and the number of pattern repetitions If you enter a value other than 0 the TNC will not take the STOPPING ANGLE into account The sign for the ANGLE STEP determines the working direction clockwise m x D oS D O Z O A n 186 8 Programming Cycles Number of repetitions 0241 Number of machining operations on a pitch circle Set up clearance Q200 incremental value Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface Enter a positive value Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute value Coordinate of the workpiece surface Point Patterns 2nd set up clearance Q204 incremental value Coordinate in the tool axis at which no collision 5 between tool and workpiece clamping devices can occur LINEAR PATTERN Cycle 221 Ya Before programming note the following less Cycle 221 is DEF active which means that Cycle 221 L automatically calls the last defined fixed cycle If you combine Cycle 220 with one of the fixed cycles 200 to 204 and 211 to 215 the set up clearance workpiece surface and 2nd set up clearance that you defined in Cycle 220 will be effective for the selected fixed cycle 8 4 C The TNC automatically moves the tool from its current position to the starting point for the first machining operation The tool is positioned in the following sequence Move to 2nd set up clearance spindle axis Appr
160. e arrow keys and then confirming with ENT If you don t want to change the setting close the window again with END To exit the MOD functions Close the MOD functions with the END soft key or key Overview of MOD functions Depending on the selected mode of operation you can make the following changes Programming and Editing Display NC software number Display PLC software number Enter code number Set data interface Machine specitic user parameters HELP files if provided 298 Programming and editing operation Code number NC software number 280472 BOM PLC software number OPT 200000011 R8232 USER 0 r R8422 om SETUP PARAMETER cer operation Code number NC software number 280472 BOM PLC software number OPT 200000011 RS232 BLANK USER O r RS422 IN WORK HELP SETUP SPACE PARAMETER 12 MOD Functions Test Run Display NC software number Display PLC software number Enter code number Setting the Data Interface Showing the Workpiece in the Working Space Machine specific user parameters HELP files if provided In all other modes Display NC software number Display PLC software number Display code digits for installed options Select position display Unit of measurement mm inches Programming language for MDI Select the axes for actual position capture Axis traverse limits Display datums Display operating time HELP files if provided 12 2 Software Numbers and Option Numbers The soft
161. e hole pattern With the aid of appropriate structuring blocks you can organize long anes T Santee iia ii and complex programs in a clear and comprehensible way This 0201 50 sTIEFE Peck ing function is particularly convenient if you want to change the pro 0206 250 sVORSCHUB TIEFENZUST Tapping gram later Structuring blocks can be inserted into the part program Ree ee ieee eee eee 0210 0 sVERWEILZEIT OBEN at any point They can also be displayed in a separate window and a a enterica edited or added to as desired A second level is provided for 9204 100 2 SICHERHEITS ABST subdividing a structuring block The texts in this level are indented 0212 0 ABNAHMEBETRAG Salats P R A FIND WINDOW To display the program structure window change the active i g y window PGM To display the program structure window select the atete screen display PGM SECTS block CHANGE To change the active window press the CHANGE a WINDOW soft key 58 4 Programming Fundamentals of NC File Management Programming Aids Pallet Management To insert a structuring block in the left program window Select the block after which the structuring block is to be inserted Press the INSERT SECTION soft key SECTION Enter the structuring text with the alphabetic keyboard If necessary change the level with the CHANGE LEVEL soft key To insert a structuring block in the right structure window Select the structuring block after which th
162. e new block is to be inserted Enter the text with the alphabetic keyboard the TNC automatically inserts the new block Selecting blocks in the program structure window If you are scrolling through the program structure window block by block the TNC at the same time automatically moves the corresponding NC blocks in the program window This way you can quickly skip large program sections 4 8 Adding Comments You can add comments to any desired block in the part program to explain program steps or make general notes There are three possibilities to add comments 1 To enter comments during programming Enter the data for a program block then press the semicolon key on the alphabetic keyboard the TNC displays the dialog prompt COMMENT Enter your comment and conclude the block by pressing the END key 2 To insert comments after program entry Select the block to which a comment is to be added Select the last word in the block with the right arrow key A semicolon appears at the end of the block and the TNC displays the dialog prompt COMMENT Enter your comment and conclude the block by pressing the END key 3 To enter a comment in a separate block Select the block after which the comment is to be inserted Initiate the programming dialog with the semicolon key on the alphabetic keyboard Enter your comment and conclude the block by pressing the END key HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 Comments
163. e the current X coordinate Calculate the current Y coordinate Move to next point Unfinished If not finished return to LBL 1 Reset the rotation Reset the datum shift Move to setup clearance End of subprogram 277 10 11 Programming Examples 10 11 Programming Examples Program sequence E Program functions only with a spherical cutter The tool length refers to the sphere center m The contour of the cylinder is approximated by many short line segments defined in Q13 The more line segments you define the smoother the curve becomes E The cylinder is milled in longitudinal cuts here parallel to the Y axis m The machining direction can be altered by changing the entries for the starting and end angles in space Clockwise machining direction starting angle gt end angle Counterclockwise machining direction starting angle lt end angle E The tool radius is compensated automatically N 78 Center in X axis Center in Y axis Center in Z axis Starting angle in space Z X plane End angle in space Z X plane Radius of the cylinder Length of the cylinder Rotational position in the X Y plane Allowance for cylinder radius Feed rate for plunging Feed rate for milling Number of cuts Define the workpiece blank Define the tool Call the tool Retract the tool Call machining operation Reset allowance Call machining operation Retract in the tool ax
164. e tool in the tool axis Move to working depth Approach the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection FK contour Program all known data for each contour element Depart the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection Retract in the tool axis end program 127 Contour Programming 6 6 Path Contours FK Free ontour Programming 6 6 Path Contours FK Free C Define the workpiece blank Define the tool Call the tool Retract the tool Pre position the tool Move to working depth Approach the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection H COmlOUl Program all known data for each contour element 6 Programming Programming Contours HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 Depart the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection Retract in the tool axis end program 129 ontour Programming 6 6 Path Contours FK Free C c a a Oo oes jai v 6 7 Path Cont 6 7 Path Contours Spline Interpolation If you wish to machine contours that are described in a CAD system as splines you can transfer them directly to the TNC and execute them The TNC features a spline interpolator for executing third degree polynomials in two three four or five axes E You cannot edit spline blocks in the TNC Exception Feed rate F and miscellaneous function M in the spline block Example Block format for two axes
165. e tool is retracted to the clearance height I Before programming note the following This cycle requires a centercut end mill ISO 1641 or pilot drilling with Cycle 21 Plunging depth Q10 incremental value Dimension by which the tool plunges in each infeed e Feed rate for plunging Q11 Traversing speed of the tool In mm min during penetration Feed rate for milling Q12 Traversing speed for milling in mm min Coarse roughing tool number Q18 Number of the tool with which the TNC has already coarse roughed the contour If the contour has not been coarse roughed enter zero If you enter a value other than 0 the TNC will only rough out the portion that could not be machined with the coarse roughing tool If the portion that is to be fine roughed cannot be approached from the side the TNC will mill in a reciprocating plunge cut For this purpose you must enter the tooth length LCUTS and the maximum plunge angle ANGLE of the tool in the tool table TOOL T see Chapter 5 2 The TNC will otherwise generate an error message Reciprocation feed rate Q19 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min during reciprocating plunge cut Example NC blocks 98 8 Programming Cycles FLOOR FINISHING Cycle 23 The TNC automatically calculates the starting point for finishing The starting point depends on the available space in the pocket The tool approaches the machining plane smoothly in a vertica
166. e working plane match the actual angle of the tilted axis Switch on the control voltage The TNC checks the functioning of the Switch off EMERGENCY STOP circuit To prevent data being lost at switch off you need to run down the operating system as follows Select the Manual mode Select the function for run down e aie Cross the reference points manually in the EEA COMMA ME one displayed sequence For each axis press the When the TNC displays the message machine START button or Now you can switch off the TNC in a superimposed window you may cut off the power supply to the TNC x cross the reference points in any sequence Press and hold the machine axis direction button for each axis until the reference point has been traversed Inappropriate switch off of the TNC can lead to data loss The TNC is now ready for operation in the Manual Operation mode 4 2 Manual Operation and Setup 2 2 Moving the Machine Axes 7 Traversing with the machine axis direction buttons is a machine dependent function Refer to your machine tool manual To traverse with the machine axis direction buttons w Select the Manual Operation mode QO Z Press the machine axis direction button and hold it as long as you wish the axis to move or move the axis continuously and 1 Press and hold the machine axis direction button then press the machine START button The axis continues to move
167. e workpiece You can define a circular movement by entering the circle center CC When you program a circle the TNC assigns it to one of the main planes This plane is defined automatically when you set the spindle axis during a tool call Z XY also UV XV UY Y ZX also WU ZU WX X YZ also VW YW VZ You can program circles that do not lie parallel to a main plane by using the function for tilting the working plane see Chapter 8 or Q parameters See Chapter 10 Direction of rotation DR for circular movements When a circular path has no tangential transition to another contour element enter the direction of rotation DR Clockwise direction of rotation DR Counterclockwise direction of rotation DR Radius compensation The radius compensation must be in the block in which you move to the first contour element You cannot begin radius compensation in a circle block It must be activated beforehand an a straight line block or approach block APPR block For detailed information on approach and straight line blocks refer to sections 6 3 Contour Approach and Departure and 6 4 Path Contours Cartesian Coordinates Pre positioning Before running a part program always pre position the tool to prevent the possibility of damaging it or the workpiece 6 Programming Programming Contours Creating the program blocks with the path function keys The gray path function keys
168. e workpiece blank in the machine s working space and to activate work space monitoring in the Test Run mode of operation This BLK FORM function is activated with the datum set soft key 140 0000 2 0000 The TNC displays the working space various windows containing ee anes coordinate information and soft keys with which you can change the display Available traversing range datums referenced to the displayed workpiece blank 2 Size of the blank 3 Coordinate system 4 Workpiece blank with orthogonal projections working space To show the position of the workpiece blank referenced to the datum press the soft key marked with the machine symbol HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 User Parameters the Working Space IC Specifi lece in ine the Workp ing MGT 12 7 Mach Show 128 iguring 12 6 Conf B onin the Workpiece in the Working Space If the workpiece blank is located outside the working space 4 YOU can use the datum soft keys to move it within the graphic in such a way that the whole blank is located within the working space You must subsequently move the datum in the Manual Operation mode by the same distance Overview of functions Move workpiece blank to the left graphically Move workpiece blank to the right graphically Move workpiece blank forward graphically a Move workpiece blank backward graphically Move workpiece blank upward gr
169. e workpiece surface The algebraic sign for the depth parameter determines the working direction This cycle requires a centercut end mill ISO 1641 or pilot drilling at the starting point The cutter diameter must be not be larger than the slot width and not smaller than half the SLOT WIDTH 3 Setup clearance f incremental value Distance between tool tip at starting position and workpiece surface Milling depth 2 incremental value Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of pocket Plunging depth g incremental value Infeed per cut the TNC will advance to the depth in one movement if the plunging depth equals the depth the plunging depth is greater than the depth 178 8 Programming Cycles Feed rate for plunging Traversing speed of the tool during penetration 1st side length p Slot length specify the sign to determine the first milling direction 2nd side length Slot width Feed rate F Traversing speed of the tool in the working plane SLOT with reciprocating plunge cut Cycle 210 L gt Before programming note the following The algebraic sign for the depth parameter determines the working direction The cutter diameter must not be larger than the slot width and not smaller than a third of the slot width The cutter diameter must be smaller than half the slot length The TNC otherwise cannot execute this cycle Roughing process 1 At rapid traverse the TNC pos
170. ea D O z A Diameter of finished part 0223 Diameter of the finished stud Enter the diameter of the finished part to be less than the workpiece blank diameter HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 17 SLOT MILLING Cycle 3 Roughing process 1 The TNC moves the tool inward by the milling allowance half the difference between the slot width and the tool diameter From there it plunge cuts Into the workpiece and mills in the longitudi nal direction of the slot 2 After downfeed at the end of the slot milling is performed in the opposite direction This process is repeated until the programmed milling depth is reached Finishing process 3 The TNC advances the tool at the slot bottom on a tangential arc to the outside contour The tool subsequently climb mills the contour with M3 4 At the end of the cycle the tool is retracted in rapid traverse FMAX to set up clearance If the number of infeeds was odd the tool returns to the starting position at the level of the set up clearance Milling Pockets Studs and Slots Before programming note the following O fn Program a positioning block for the starting point in the O working plane to the center of the slot second side gt length and within the slot offset by the tool radius O with RADIUS COMPENSATION RO 0 e0 Program a positioning block for the starting point in the tool axis set up clearance above th
171. ed position value This establishes the reference system for the workpiece which will be used for the TNC display and your part program If the production drawing is dimensioned in relative coordinates simply use the coordinate transformation cycles For further information refer to section 8 7 Coordinate Transformation Cycles If the production drawing is not dimensioned for NC set the datum at a position or corner on the workpiece which is the most suitable for deducing the dimensions of the remaining workpiece positions The fastest easiest and most accurate way of setting the datum Is by using a 3 D touch probe from HEIDENHAIN For further information refer to section 12 2 Setting the Datum with a 3 D Touch Probe Example The workpiece drawing at right illustrates the holes to 4 which are dimensioned to an absolute datum with the coordinates X 0 Y 0 The holes to Zare referenced to a relative datum with the absolute coordinates X 450 Y 750 By using the DATUM SHIFT cycle you can shift the datum temporarily to the position X 450 Y 750 and program the holes 5 to Zwithout any further calculations 32 4 Programming Fundamentals of NC File Management Programming Aids Pallet Management 4 2 File Management Fundamentals C Using the MOD function PGM MGT see Section 12 5 select between standard file management and file management with additional functions If the TNC is connected to a
172. ed where the cause of the error is explained and suggestions are made for correcting the error Display HELP if an error message appears at the top of screen To display Help press the HELP key Read the description of the error and the possibilities for correcting it Close the Help window with the CE thus canceling the error message Remove the cause of the error as described in the Helo window The TNC displays the Help text automatically if the error message is flashing The TNC needs to be restarted after blinking error messages To restart the TNC press the END key and hold for two seconds Manual TNC program block not permitted operation r until contour is resolved FCT DR Eror description 507 FLT AN 8f Cause of error FK program ming Conventional blocks may followan FK FCT DR block only ifthe FK block led to a complete resolution of the contour Exceptions RND block CHF block L block containing only motion inthe tool axis or auxiliary axis L 2 50 Ri corective action Resolve the FK Contour completely CALL LBL 2 CYCL DEF 10 0 ROTATION CYCL DEF 10 1 IROT 90 CALL LBL 1 REP 3 73 CYCL DEF 10 0 ROTATION CYCL DEF 10 1 ROT L 2 5 RO F MAX M2 BEGIN END PAGE PAGE START RESET 7 fl T I FIND START SINGLE o START 64 4 Programming Fundamentals of NC File Management Programming Aids Pallet Management 4 12 Managing Pallet Tables N 7 A ile x 2 Pallet table management is a
173. ee figure at right For calculating the stepover factor k see Cycle 4 POCKET MILLING 3 This process is repeated until the depth is reached 4 At the end of the cycle the TNC retracts the tool to the starting position L gt Before programming note the following Program a positioning block for the starting point pocket center in the working plane with RADIUS COMPENSATION RO Program a positioning block for the starting point in the tool axis set up clearance above the workpiece surface The algebraic sign for the depth parameter determines the working direction This cycle requires a centercut end mill ISO 1641 or pilot drilling at the pocket center HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 Q216 Q221 173 8 3 Cycle i Pockets Studs and Slots 8 3 Cycle Mo Pockets Studs and Slots Setup clearance f incremental value Distance between tool tip at starting position and workpiece 174 surface Milling depth 2 incremental value Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of pocket Plunging depth 3 incremental value Infeed per cut The tool will advance to the depth in one movement if n the plunging depth equals the depth n the plunging depth is greater than the depth Feed rate for plunging Traversing speed of the tool during penetration Circular radius Radius of the circular pocket Feed rate F Traversing speed of the tool in the working plane D
174. ee figure on the left with M114 Behavior with M128 If the position of a controlled tilted axis changes in the program the position of the tool tip to the workpiece remains the same If you wish to use the handwheel to change the position of the tilted axis during program run use M118 in conjunction with M128 Handwheel positioning in a machine based coordinate is possible when M128 Is active M128 on tilting tables If you program a tilting table movement while M128 is active the TNC rotates the coordinate system accordingly If for example you rotate the C axis by 90 and then program a movement in the X axis the TNC executes the movement in the machine axis Y The TNC also transforms the defined datum which has been shifted by the movement of the rotary table Effect M128 becomes effective at the start of block M129 at the end of block M128 is also effective in the manual operating modes and remains active even after a change of mode To cancel M128 enter M129 The TNC also resets M128 if you select a new program in a program run operating mode TCPM Too Center Point Management HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 75 Miscellaneois Functions for Rotary Axes 7 5 Misceltaneo Eun ctions for Rotary Axes Exact stop at corners with nontangential transitions M134 Standard behavior The standard behavior of the TNC during positioning with rotary axes is to insert a transitional element in nontangential c
175. er gt EndTNCremo Select the menu items lt File gt lt Exit gt or press the key combination ALT X HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 ila E j H TEPE 020k CLE JEO 303 12 4 Setting the Data Interfaces S ties lt Pw a am lt co rar LLI LO N 12 5 Ethernet Interface Introduction As an option you can equip the TNC with an Ethernet card to connect the control as a Client in your network The TNC transmits data through the Ethernet card in accordance with the Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP family of protocols and with the aid of the Network File System NFS Since TCP IP and NFS are implemented in UNIX systems you can usually connect the TNC in the UNIX world without any additional software The PC world with Microsoft operating systems however also works with TCP IP but not with NFS You will therefore need additio nal software to connect the TNC to a PC network HEIDENHAIN recommends the following network software DOS Windows 3 1 Maestro 6 0 from HUMMINGBIRD Windows 3 11 e mail support hummingbird com Windows NT www http www hummingbird com Tel 49 0 89 89755205 Windows 95 OnNet Server 2 0 from the FTP company e mail Support ftp com www htto www ttp com Tel 49 0 89 74940 Computer 2000 GmbH Installing an Ethernet card lt Switch off the TNC and the machine before you install an Ethernet card Read the i
176. erence axis to PR is clockwise PA lt 0O Example NC blocks Circular path CP around pole CC The polar coordinate radius PR is also the radius of the arc It is defined by the distance from the starting point to the pole CC The last programmed tool position before the CP block is the starting point of the arc Polar coordinates angle PA Angular position of the arc end point between b400 and 5400 Direction of rotation DR Example NC blocks For incremental coordinates enter the same sign for DR and PA HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 6 5 Path Cor Polar Coordinates 6 5 Path cont AAS Polar Coordinates Circular path CTP with tangential connection The tool moves on a circular path starting tangentially from a preceding contour element P Polar coordinates radius PR Distance from the arc end point to the pole CC Polar coordinates angle PA Angular position of the arc end point Example NC blocks E The pole CC is not the center of the contour arc Helical interpolation A helix is a combination of a circular movement in a main plane and a linear movement perpendicular to this plane A helix is programmed only in polar coordinates Application Large diameter internal and external threads Lubrication grooves Calculating the helix To program a helix you must enter the total angle through which the tool is to move on the helix in incremental dimensi
177. erisk the allowable tolerance in the tool table was exceeded 10 1 Introduction 1 5 Accessories HEIDENHAIN 3 D Touch Probes and Electronic Handwheels 3 D Touch Probes With the various HEIDENHAIN 3 D touch probe systems you can Automatically align workpieces Quickly and precisely set datums Measure the workpiece during program run Digitize 3 D surfaces option and Measure and inspect tools All of the touch probe functions are described in a separate manual Please contact HEIDENHAIN if you require a copy of this User s Manual Id Nr 329 203 xx TS 220 andTS 630 touch trigger probes These touch probes are particularly effective for automatic workpiece alignment datum setting workpiece measurement and for digitizing The TS 220 transmits the triggering signals to the TNC via cable and is a cost effective alternative for applications where digitizing is not frequently required The TS 630 features infrared transmission of the triggering signal to the TNC This makes it highly convenient for use on machines with automatic tool changers Principle of operation HEIDENHAIN triggering touch probes feature a wear resisting optical switch that generates an electrical signal as soon as the stylus is deflected This signal is transmitted to the TNC which stores the current position of the stylus as an actual value During digitizing the TNC generates a program containing straight line blocks in HEIDENHAIN format from a serie
178. ermines the working direction If you want to clear and finish the stud with the same Z tool use a centercut end mill ISO 1641 and enter a low feed rate for plunging Q200 Q203 z Set up clearance Q200 incremental value Distance Ce between tool tio and workpiece surface Depth Q201 incremental value Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of stud Feed rate for plunging Q206 Traversing speed of the NZ tool in mm min when moving to depth If you are plunge cutting into the material enter a low value if you have already cleared the stud enter a higher feed rate Pockets Studs and Slots ing Plunging depth Q202 incremental value Infeed per cut enter a value greater than 0 Feed rate for milling Q207 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min while milling Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute value Coordinate of the workpiece surface 2nd set up clearance Q204 incremental value Coordinate in the tool axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece clamping devices can occur Center in 1st axis Q216 absolute value Center of the stud in the main axis of the working plane Center in 2nd axis Q217 absolute value Center of the stud in the secondary axis of the working plane Q216 Workpiece blank diameter Q222 Diameter of the oremachined stud Enter the workpiece blank diameter to be greater than the diameter of the finished part m ox D 3 p
179. ess the DELETE soft 3 key The TNC inguires whether you really intend to erase the file To confirm press the YES soft key To abort erasure press the NO soft key Erase a directory Erase all files and subdirectories stored in the directory that you wish to erase Move the highlight to the directory you want to delete DELETE To select the erasing function press the DELETE soft 3 key The TNC inquires whether you really intend to erase the directory To confirm press the YES soft key To abort erasure press the NO soft key Programming and editing TNC S NKN SCRDPANEU H TNC NK SCRDP 350 H TNC NK SCROP 1GB H TNC NK SCRDP 3516 H TNC NK SCROP 35671 H TNC NK SCROP BLK H TNC FRAESEN CDT TNC FRAESEN A TNC WTAB FRAESER CDT TNC CUTTING FRAESER CDT G 1 Z 3 4 5 6 rs 8 9 SELECT s S S d S S m 46 4 Programming Fundamentals of NC File Management Programming Aids Pallet Management Move the highlight to the first file Tagging files Tagging functions Softkey pl Some functions such as copying or erasing files can not only be Tdana ciaale files Q used for individual files but also for several files at once To tag gging Sing FILE several Tiles proceed as follows e Tag all files in the TAG directory FILES LL C UNTAG FILE 4 4 File Management with Additio Untag a single file To display the marking functions press the TAG UNTAG TAG soft ke
180. etc directly via cycle definition HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 221 rdinate Transformation Cycles Status Displays Datum table editing If datums in the table are referenced to the machine datum then Datum shift The actual position values are referenced to the active shifted datum All of the position values shown in the additional status display are referenced to the machine datum whereby the TNC accounts for the manually set datum Editing a datum table Select the datum table in the PROGRAMMING AND EDITING mode of operation Oo O O O O O O OO To call the file manager press the PGM MGT key a i yar see section 4 2 File Management for more b d A m nomaron OFF LON OFF LON OFF LON OFF ON OFF LON OFF LON OFF ON OFF ON Display the datum tables Press the soft keys SELECT TYPE and SHOW D Select the desired table or enter a new file name N Q gt Q c a Hose Oo 7e Lam Par xe Edit the file The soft key row comprises the following functions for editing BEGIN 8 7 Select beginning of table Select end of table PAGE Go to the previous page PAGE Go to the next page INSERT Insert line only possible at the end of table LINE DELETE Delete line LINE Confirm the entered line and go to nie the beginning of the next line LINE 222 8
181. f the rotary axis Effect M116 is effective in the working plane You can cancel M116 with M117 at the end of the program M116 is also reset M116 becomes effective at the start of block Shorter path traverse of rotary axes M126 Standard behavior The standard behavior of the TNC while positioning rotary axes whose display has been reduced to values less than 360 Is dependent on machine parameter 7682 In machine parameter 7682 is set whether the TNC should consider the difference between nominal and actual position or whether the TNC should always even without M126 choose the shortest path traverse to the programmed position The table at upper right shows examples Behavior with M126 With M126 the TNC will move the axis on the shorter path of traverse if you reduce display of a rotary axis to a value less than 360 The table at lower right shows examples Effect M126 becomes effective at the start of block To cancel M126 enter M127 At the end of program M126 is automatically canceled 144 Standard behavior of the TNC 350 10 340 10 340 330 Behavior with M126 350 109 20 10 340 o 7 Programming Miscellaneous functions Reducing display of a rotary axis to a value less than 360 M94 Standard behavior The TNC moves the tool from the current angular value to the programmed angular value Example Current angular value B307 Programmed angular value 180 Actu
182. face to be multipass milled in the secondary axis of the working plane Starting point in 3rd axis Q227 absolute value Height in the spindle axis at which multipass milling is carried Out O S p N Bis O e5 p Q a Q First side length Q218 incremental value Length of the surface to be multipass milled in the main axis of the working plane referenced to the starting point in 1st axis Second side length Q219 incremental value Length of the surface to be multipass milled in the secondary axis of the working plane referenced to the starting point in 2nd axis Q227 Number of cuts Q240 Number of passes to be made over the width Feed rate for plunging 206 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min when moving from set up clearance to the milling depth Feed rate for milling Q207 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min while milling Stepover feed rate Q209 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min when moving to the next pass If you are moving the tool transversely in the material enter Q209 to be smaller than Q207 If you are moving it transversely in the open Q209 may be greater than 0207 Set up clearance Q200 incremental value Distance between tool tip and milling depth for positioning at the start and end of the cycle m x fet 3 D O z O O o n HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 21 S O p N E Oo
183. ffset by a 3 D length compensation As the geometry of the individual machine tools is set in machine parameters the TNC also compensates machine specific offsets automatically Programs only need to be calculated by the postprocessor once even if they are being run on different machines with TNC control If your machine tool does not have controlled tilted axes head tilted manually or positioned by the PLC you can enter the current valid swivel head position after M114 e g M114 B 45 Q parameters permitted The radius compensation must be calculated by a CAD system or by a postprocessor A programmed radius compensation RL RR will result in an error message If the tool length compensation is calculated by the TNC the programmed feed rate refers to the point of the tool Otherwise it refers to the tool datum Effect M114 becomes effective at the start of block M115 at the end of block M114 is not effective when tool radius compensation is active To cancel M114 enter M115 At the end of program M114 is automatically canceled 146 7 Programming Miscellaneous functions Maintaining the position of the tool tip when positioning with tilted axes TCPM M128 Standard behavior The TNC moves the tool to the positions given in the part program If the position of a tilted axis changes in the program the resulting offset in the linear axes must be calculated and traversed in a positioning block s
184. file CALL_PATH M_CLOSE L_ENGLISH L_GERMAN LO GZECAH L_FRENCH L_ITALIAN L_SPANISH L_DANISH L_FINNISH L_DUTCH L_POLISH Gives the path for the NC program where you will find the FN16 function Example Measuring program S CALL_PATH Closes the file to which you are writing with FN16 Example M_CLOSE Output text only for English conversational language Output text only for German conversational language Output text only for Czech conversational language Output text only for French conversational language Output text only for Italian conversational language Output text only for Spanish conversational language Output text only for Danish conversational language Output text only for Finnish conversational language Output text only for Dutch conversational language Output text only for Polish conversational language L HUNGARIA Output text only for Hungarian conversational L_ALL HOUR MIN SEG DAY MONTH STR_MONTH YEAR2 YEAR4 264 language Output text independent of the conversational language Number of hours from the real time clock Number of minutes from the real time clock Number of seconds from the real time clock Day from the real time clock Month as number from the real time clock Month as string abbreviation from the real time clock Two digit year from the real time clock Fourdigit year from the real time clock To activate output program FN16 FPRINT in the The TNC
185. for calculating the spatial vector The TNC first rotates the A axis then the B axis and finally the C axis Cycle 19 becomes effective as soon as it is defined in the program As soon as you move an axis in the tilted system the compensation for this specific axis is activated You have to move all axes to activate compensation for all axes If you set the function TILTING program run to ACTIVE in the Manual Operation mode see section 2 5 Tilting the Working Plane the angular value entered in this menu is overwritten by Cycle 19 WORKING PLANE Tilt axis and tilt angle The tilted axes of rotation together with the associated tilt angles The rotary axes A B and C are programmed using soft keys If the TNC automatically positions the tilted axes you can enter the following parameters Feed rate F Traverse speed of the rotary axis during automatic positioning Set up clearance incremental the TNC positions the tilting head so that the position that results from the extension of the tool by the set up clearance does not change relative to the workpiece 228 8 Programming Cycles Cancellation To cancel the tilt angle redefine the WORKING PLANE cycle and enter an angular value of O for all axes of rotation You must then program the WORKING PLANE cycle once again by answering the dialog question with the NO ENT key to disable the function Positioning an axis
186. for plunging Q11 Traversing speed of the tool in the tool axis Feed rate for milling Q12 Traversing speed of the tool in the working plane Radius Q16 Radius of the cylinder on which the contour is to be machined Dimension type Q17 The dimensions for the rotary axis of the subprogram are given either in degrees 0 or in mm inches 1 Example NC blocks HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 203 8 5 SL Cycles 8 5 SL Cycles N 04 Define the workpiece blank Tool definition coarse roughing tool Tool definition fine roughing tool Tool call coarse roughing tool Retract the tool Define contour subprogram Define general machining parameters 8 Programming Cycles HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 Cycle definition Coarse roughing Cycle call Coarse roughing Tool change Tool call fine roughing tool Define the fine roughing cycle Cycle call Fine roughing Retract in the tool axis end program Contour subprogram see second FK programming example in section 6 6 Path Contours FK Free Contour Programming 205 8 5 SL Cycles 8 5 SL Cycles N 06 Define the workpiece blank Tool definition drill Define the tool for roughing finishing Call the drilling tool Retract the tool Define contour subprogram Define general machining parameters Cycle definition PILOT DRILLING Cycle call PILOT DRILLING
187. fore programming note the following The algebraic sign for the depth parameter determines the working direction The cutter diameter must not be larger than the slot width and not smaller than a third of the slot width The cutter diameter must be smaller than half the slot length The TNC otherwise cannot execute this cycle HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 181 illing Pockets Studs and Slots lling Pockets Studs and Slots m x D Z O zZ O zA 211 ES 182 Set up clearance Q200 incremental value Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface Depth Q201 incremental value Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of slot Feed rate for milling Q207 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min while milling gt Plunging depth Q202 incremental value Total extent by which the tool is fed in the tool axis during a reciprocating movement Machining operation 0 1 2 Q215 Define the extent of machining 0 Roughing and finishing 1 Roughing only 2 Finishing only gt Workpiece SURFACE COORDINATE 0203 absolute value Coordinate of the workpiece surface gt 2nd set up clearance Q204 incremental value Z coordinate at which no collision between tool and workpiece clamping devices can occur gt Center in 1st axis Q216 absolute value Center of the slot in the main axis of the working plane Center in 2nd axis Q217 absol
188. function CYCL DEF 7 1 X 110 Shift the soft key rows until the TNC displays the following soft keys a DEF Y A e0 a with the stopwatch functions m SHOIJ OMIT RESET STORE ADD O oo r r STORE Store displayed time Test run The timer displays the approximate time which the TNC calculates from the duration of tool movements The time calculated by the TNC cannot be used for calculating the production time because the TNC does not account for the duration of machine dependent interruptions such as tool change 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 gt 8 9 Display the sum of stored time ADD and displayed time OrO Clear displayed time The soft keys available to the left of the stopwatch functions depend on the selected screen layout 288 11 Test Run and Program Run 11 2 Functions for Program Display in F Program Run and Test Run BEGIN PGM 3507 MM Pr Ce 1 BLK FORM 1 Z X 28 Y 28 2 28 2 BLK FORM 2 X 20 Y 20 2 J 5 In the program run modes of operation as well as in the Test Run 3 TOOL CALL 1 Z 1008 N o mode the TNC provides the following soft keys for displaying a part 4 L 2 50 R F MAX M3 2 5 L X 5 Y 50 R F MAX M8 program in pages 6 L 2 5 R F MAX m 7 CC X 0 Y 0 z e F nction Softkey iste Pr 14 PA 45 RR F500 PAGE Ce Go back in the program by one screen c E 150 0000 Y 50 0000 Z 100 000 PAGE A 0000 B 18 000 C 98 0008 Go forward in the program by one screen O es K T o M 5 9 BEGIN PAGE
189. gram Run Full Sequence mode of operation the TNC executes a part program continuously to its end or up to a program stop In the Program Run Single Block mode of operation you must start each block separately by pressing the machine START button O 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 The following TNC functions can be used in the program run modes of operation A 0 0000 B 180 00080 C 90 0000 c 5 or z aon O S A lt q Start program run from a certain block T M 579 t Optional block skip gt gt aT esoe 7 Editing the tool table TOOL T UNE Aer Checking and changing O parameters Superimposing handwheel positioning Functions for graphic simulation Additional status display Running a part program Preparation 1 Clamp the workpiece to the machine table 2 Datum setting 3 Select the necessary tables and pallet files status M 4 Select the part program status M You can adjust the feed rate and spindle speed with the override knobs Program Run Full Sequence Start the part program with the machine START button Program Run Single Block Start each block of the part program individually with the machine START button HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 291 5 cc Bm O Dm A lt q Interrupting machining There are several ways to interrupt a program run Programmed interruptions Machine STOP button Switching to Program Run Single Block If the
190. gramming Examples Program sequence m The contour of the ellipse is approximated by many short lines defined in Q7 The more calculating steps you define for the lines the smoother the curve becomes m The machining direction can be altered by changing the entries for the starting and end angles in the plane Clockwise machining direction starting angle gt end angle Counterclockwise machining direction starting angle lt end angle The tool radius is not taken into account N 76 Center in X axis Center in Y axis Semiaxis in X Semiaxis in Y Starting angle in the plane End angle in the plane Number of calculating steps Rotational position of the ellipse Milling depth Feed rate for plunging Feed rate for milling Setup clearance for pre positioning Define the workpiece blank Define the tool Call the tool Retract the tool Call machining operation Retract in the tool axis end program 10 Programming Q Parameters HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 Subprogram 10 Machining operation Shift datum to center of ellipse Account for rotational position in the plane Calculate angle increment Copy starting angle Set counter Calculate X coordinate for starting point Calculate Y coordinate for starting point Move to starting point in the plane Pre position in tool axis to setup clearance Move to working depth Update the angle Update the counter Calculat
191. gth for slot cycle Radius for circular pocket cycle Feed rate for milling in active fixed cycle Direction of rotation for active fixed cycle Dwell time for active fixed cycle Thread pitch for Cycles 17 18 Milling allowance for active fixed cycle Direction angle for rough out in active fixed cycle 265 ions Funct itiona 10 8 Add ions Funct itiona 10 8 Add Data from the tool table 50 1 2 3 A 5 6 7 8 3 10 11 12 i 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 2 1 22 Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool length Tool radius Tool radius R2 Oversize for tool length DL Oversize for tool radius DR Oversize for tool radius DR2 Tool inhibited O or 1 Number of replacement tool Maximum tool age TIME1 Maximum tool age TIME2 Current tool age CUR TIME PLC status Maximum tooth length LCUTS Maximum plunge angle ANGLE TT Number of teeth CUT TT Wear tolerance for length LTOL TT Wear tolerance for radius RTOL TT Rotational direction DIRECT O positive 1 negative TT Offset for radius R OFFS TT Offset for length LOFFS TT Breakage tolerance in length LBREAK TT Breakage tolerance in radius RBREAK No index Data of the currently active tool Pocket table data 51 1 2 3 4 3 Pocket number of a tool in the t
192. hard disk of your TNC You need only enter the program name if the program you want to call is located in the same directory as the program you are calling it from If the called program is not located in the same directory as the program you are calling it from you must enter the complete path e g TNC VZW35 ROUGH PGM1 H If you want to call an ISO program enter the Tile type after the program name You can also call a program with Cycle 12 PGM CALL 242 9 Programming Subprograms and Program Section Repeats BEGIN PGM A CALL PGM B END PGM A 9 5 Nesting You can nest subprograms and program section repeats in the following ways E Subprograms within a subprogram E Program section repeats within a program section repeat E Subprograms repeated E Program section repeats within a subprogram Nesting depth The nesting depth is the number of successive levels in which program sections or subprograms can call further program sections or subprograms E Maximum nesting depth for subprograms 8 E Maximum nesting depth for calling main programs 4 E You can nest program section repeats as often as desired Subprogram within a subprogram m rad D p D Z O 7 e 2 A HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 Call the subprogram marked with LBL1 Last program block of the main program with M2 Beginning of subprogram 1 Call the subprogram marked with LBL2 End of subprogram 1 Beginn
193. he programming graphics ox BEGIN PGM 1GB MM BEGIN PGM 1GB show the individual steps or you can use a separate screen BLK FORM 0 1 Z 0 Y 0 2 40 Make hole pattern ID 27943KL1 window to prepare your program structure BLK FORM 0 2 X 100 Y 100 2 0 Parameter definition Make hole pattern ID 27943KL1 Make pocket TOOL CALL 1 Z 4500 Rough out 1 3 Modes of Oper Programming and Editing Soft keys for selecting the screen layout CYCL DEF 203 UNIVERSAL BOHREN Make hole pattern 0201 50 TIEFE Pecking 0206 250 sVORSCHUB TIEFENZUST Tapping 0202 0 3ZUSTELL TIEFE END PGM 1GB 0210 0 sVERWEILZEIT OBEN Q203 KOOR OBERFLAECHE Q204 10 2 SICHERHEITS ABST 0212 0 3 ABNAHMEBE TRAG L 2 100 RO F MAX Finishing Program PGM Left program blocks right program structure SECTS Let program bioas right programmino z CECCOLI E graphics GRAPHICS M l Test run mo p In the Test Run mode of operation the TNC checks programs and CYDE CALE F i gp sjeg CYCL DEF 14 0 CONTOUR GEOMETRY program sections for errors such as geometrical incompatibilities sul ie au ol caaralis vageiae 2 missing or incorrect data within the program or violations of the a work space This simulation is supported graphically in different CYCL DEF 14 2 CONTOUR LABEL 11 display modes 12 CYCL DEF 6 0 ROUGH OUT CYCL DEF 6 1 SET UP 26 DEPTH 12 Soft keys for selecting the screen layout r EEP A AA Same as in the Program Run oper
194. ht line for corner 2 Insert radius with R 10 mm feed rate 150 mm min Move to point 3 Starting point of the arc with CR Move to point 4 End point of the arc with CR radius 30 mm Move to point 5 Move to point 6 Move to point 7 End point of the arc radius with tangential connection to point 6 TNC automatically calculates the radius Move to last contour point 1 Depart the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection Retract in the tool axis end program 6 Programming Programming Contours 6 4 Path Contours Coordinates HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 Define the workpiece blank Define the tool tool call Define the circle center Retract the tool Pre position the tool Move to working depth Approach the starting point of the circle on a circular arc with tangential connection Move to the circle end point circle starting point Depart the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection Retract in the tool axis end program Polar Coordinates 6 5 Path Cont 6 5 Path Contours Polar Coordinates With polar coordinates you can define a position in terms of Its angle PA and its distance PR relative to a previously defined pole CC See section 4 1 Fundamentals of NC Polar coordinates are useful with Positions on circular arcs Workpiece drawing dimensions in degrees e g bolt hole circles Overview of path functions with polar coordinates Line LP P Straight line
195. i V e e N Q S lt Lf 12 2 1 Switch on Switch off The reference points need only be traversed if the machine axes are to be Traversing the reference point in a tilted working The TNC memory is automatically checked plane l l The reference point of a tilted coordinate system can be traversed by pressing the machine axis direction buttons The tilting the working plane function see section 2 5 Tilting the Working Switch On moved If you intend only to write edit or test programs you can select the Z Switch on and traversing the reference points can vary Programming and Editing or Test Run yn depending on the individual machine tool Your machine modes of operation immediately after a manual provides more detailed information switching on the control voltage 5 You can then traverse the reference i Switch on the power supply for control and machine points later by pressing the PASS OVER os REFERENCE soft key in the Manual The TNC automatically initiates the following dialog Operation mode v q N TNC message that the power was interrupted Plane must be active in the Manual Operation clear the message mode The TNC then interpolates the corresponding axes The NC START button is not effective Pressing this button may result in an error message The PLC program of the TNC is automatically compiled Wieke sure ihar heanrdevauesentered inthe menu for tilting th
196. ical formulas that include several operations directly into the part program by soft key Entering formulas Press the FORMULA soft key to call the formula functions The TNC displays the following soft keys in several soft key rows Addition Example Q10 Q1 O5 Subtraction Example Q25 Q7 Q108 Multiplication Example Q12 5 O5 Division Example Q25 Q1 Q2 Open parentheses Example Q12 Q1 Q2 Q3 Close parentheses Example Q12 Q1 Q2 Q3 Square Example Q15 SQ 5 Square root Example Q22 SORT 25 ail Sine of an angle Example O44 SIN 45 Cosine of an angle Example 045 COS 45 o O Tangent of an angle Example 046 TAN 45 TAN 270 10 Programming Q Parameters Arc sine Inverse of the sine Determine the angle from the ratio of the opposite side to the hypotenuse Example Q10 ASIN 0 75 Arc cosine Inverse of the cosine Determine the angle from the ratio of the adjacent side to the hypotenuse Example Q11 ACOS 040 ACOS Arc tangent Inverse of the tangent Determine the angle from the ratio of the opposite to the adjacent side Example Q12 ATAN O50 ATAN Powers Example Q15 343 Constant pi 3 14159 e g Q15 Pl Natural logarithm LN of a number Base 2 7183 Example Q15 LN Q11 aa H a Logarithm of a number base 10 Example 033 LOG 022 Bi Exponential function 2 7183n Example Q1 EXP Q12 EXP Negate multiplicatio
197. ies only for Ethernet interface option To connect the Ethernet card to your network refer to Chapter 12 5 Ethernet Interface The TNC logs error messages during network operation see section 12 5 Ethernet Interface If the TNC is connected to a network the directory window displays up to 7 drives A see screen at upper right All the functions described above selecting a drive copying files etc also apply to network drives provided that you have been given the corresponding rights Connecting and disconnecting network drives To select the program management Press the PGM wall MGT key If necessary press the WINDOW soft key to set up the screen as it is shown to the upper right To manage the network drives Press the Network aed soft key In the right hand window 2 the TNC shows the network drives available for access With the following soft keys you can define the connection for each drive Establish network connection If the connection is MOUNT active the TNC shows an M tn the Mnt column DEVICE You can connect up to 7 additional drives with the TNC UNMOUNT Delete network connection SEUEGE Automatically establish connection whenever the AUTO TNC is switched on The TNC show in the Auto TAN column an A if the connection is established automatically Do not network connection automatically when the kA TNC is switched on MOUNT It may take some time to mount a network device At the upper r
198. ighlight to the desired position on the screen Move the highlight from the left to the right window and vice versa Move the highlight up and down within a window ti T Move the highlight one page up or down within a window 1st step select drive Move the highlight to the desired drive in the left window SELECT or free Select drive Press the SELECT soft key Seal or ENT 2nd step select directory Move the highlight to the desired directory in the left window the right window automatically shows all files stored in the highlighted directory HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 43 e c a J Lam LL 4 4 File Management with Additio pt 3rd step select a file O pe SELECT Q Press the SELECT TYPE soft key a TYPE LL SHOL T Press the soft key for the desired file type or gala To display all files press the SHOW ALL soft key or 4 H Sa use wild card characters e g to show all files of the Tile tyoe H that begin with 4 Move the highlight to the desired file in the right window SELECT i i or fie The selected file is opened in the operating mode from which you have the called file manager Press ENT or the SELECT soft key 4 4 File Management with Add To create a new directory only possible on the TNC s hard disk drive Move the highlight in the left window to the directory in which you want to create a subdirectory NEW Enter the
199. ight CLEAR Delete graphic Press CLEAR GRAPHIC soft key GRAPHICS HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 Programming and editing operation BEGIN PGM 3516 MM BLK FORM 1 2 K 30 Y 90 2 40 BLK FORM 2 K 9 Y 90 2 0 TOOL CALL 1 2 81400 L 2 5 RO F MAX CALL LBL 1 L 2 100 RO F MAX M2 LBL 1 L X 0 8 RL F250 FPOL 4 0 Y 0 10 FC DR R80 CC 0 CCY 0 11 FCT DR R 5 12 FCT DR R90 CCK 69 282 CCY 40 13 FSELECT 2 Vorschlag 1 entsprich 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 t nicht der zeichnung BEGIN END PAGE PAGE START RESET 7 I FIND START SINGLE NY oO START START Generate interactive graphic blockwise Generate a complete graphic pe or complete it after RESET START Interrupt interactive graphics This soft key only appears while the TNC generates the interactive graphics Programming and editing operation BEGIN PGM 3516 MM 1 BLK FORM 1 2 K 98 Y 90 2 40 BLK FORM 2 K 9 0 Y 90 2 0 TOOL CALL 1 2 81400 L 2 5 RO F MAX CALL LBL 1 L 2 100 RO F MAX M2 LBL 1 L 4 0 Y 80 RL F250 FPOL 4 0 Y 0 FC DR R80 CC 0 CCY 0 FCT DR R 5 FCT DR R90 CC 69 282 CCY 40 FSELECT 2 3 Vorschlag 1 entsprich t nicht der ichi ger eee C Reog REDRAW CLEAR an Le BLOCK hi GRAPHICS OFFI ea 57 4 6 Interactive Programe Graphics You can select the graphics display by selecting a detail with the frame overlay You can now magnify or reduce the selected detail BEGIN PGM 3516 MM BLK FORM 1 2 K 30 Y 90 2 40 BLK
200. ight of the screen the TNC displays READ DIR to indicate that a connection is being established The maximum data transmission rate lies between 200 and 1000 kilobaud depending on the file type being transmitted 52 Programming and editing operation MOUNT UNMOUNT AUTO NO AUTO DEVICE DEVICE MOUNT MOUNT Printing the file with a network printer If you have defined a network printer see section 12 5 Ethernet Interface you can print the files directly To call the file manager press the PGM MGT key Move the highlight to the file you wish to print Press the COPY soft key Press the PRINT soft key If you have define only one printer the TNC will print the file immediately If you have defined more than one printer the TNC opens a window listing all defined printers Use the arrow keys to select the desired printer then press ENT 4 Programming Fundamentals of NC File Management Programming Aids Pallet Management 4 5 Creating and Writing Programs Organization of an NC program in HEIDENHAIN conversational format A part program consists of a series of program blocks The figure at Block right illustrates the elements of a block The TNC numbers the blocks in ascending sequence 10 L X 10 Y 5 RO F100 M3 The first block of a program is identified by BEGIN PGM the program name and the active unit of measure N z re O O pes A O Path function Words The subsequent blocks
201. in rapid traverse FMAX to set up clearance and from there advances to the first plunging depth at the feed rate for plunging 4 The tool then moves tangentially to the contour of the finished part and using climb milling machines one revolution 5 After this the tool departs the contour tangentially and returns to the starting point in the working plane 6 This process 3 to 5 is repeated until the programmed depth is reached 7 At the end of the cycle the TNC retracts the tool in rapid traverse to set up clearance or If programmed to the 2nd set up clearance and finally to the center of the pocket end position starting position I Before programming note the following The algebraic sign for the depth parameter determines the working direction If you want to clear and finish the pocket with the same tool use a centercut end mill ISO 1641 and enter a low feed rate for plunging Minimum size of the pocket 3 times the tool radius 170 8 Programming Cycles Set up clearance Q200 incremental value Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface Depth Q201 incremental value Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of pocket Feed rate for plunging Q206 Traversing speed of the tool im mm min when moving to depth If you are plunge cutting Into the material enter a value lower than that defined in Q207 Plunging depth Q202 incremental value Infeed per cut enter a val
202. in the file manager for a connected device PATH Directory of the NFS server that you wish to connect to the TNC Be sure to differentiate between small and capital letters when entering the path UID Definition of the user identification under which you access files in the network Ask your network manager for the proper timeout setting GID Definition of the group identification with you access files in the network Ask your network manager for the proper timeout setting HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 307 S e lt ad a am lt co rar LLI LO N J O lt DCM AM Here you enter the rights of access to files on the NFS server see figure at upper right Enter a binary coded value Example 111101000 0 Access not permitted 1 Access permitted Here you enter the rights of access to files on the NFS server see figure at upper right Enter the value in binary coded form Example 111101000 0 Access not permitted 1 Access permitted Definition of whether the TNC upon switch on should automatically connect with the network 0 Do not connect automatically 1 Connect automatically Defining the network printer Press the DEFINE PRINT soft key if you wish to print the files on the network printer directly from the TNC ADDRESS DEVICE NAME PRINTER NAME Address of your server Input four decimal numbers separated by points Ask your network manager for the number
203. ination file To execute conversion press the ENT key Erase a directory together with all its subdirectories and files Move the highlight in the left window onto the directory you want to erase MORE To select the additional functions press the MORE Functions FUNCTIONS key oet P Press DELETE ALL to erase the directory together Eg aL with its subdirectories To confirm press the YES soft key To abort erasure press the NO soft key 4 Programming Fundamentals of NC File Management Programming Aids Pallet Management Data transfer to or from an external data medium Program table editing File name 25 3 Before you can transfer data to an external data medium you must set the interface see Section 12 4 Setting the Data Interfaces e c 2 J 5 LL A H 3516 A H BSP A GRKK3R1 H BSPGB A HERMLE 4 H PAL a TEST H Calling the file manager ARTAR a A Al aH TEST12 aH 11 H FAF H H TEST H 1 I WINDOW Select the screen layout for data transfer press 1GB H 10 I the WINDOW soft key In the left halt of the 28 filets 915072 kbyte vacant 39 filets 915072 kbyte vacant screen the TNC shows all of the 11 files that are stored on the TNC and in the right half of the screen 2 all of the files that are stored on the external data medium PAGE PAGE SELECT COPY SELECT WINDOW Use the arrow keys to highlight the file s that you want to tran
204. include Values from the PLC Tool and spindle data Data on operating status etc Values from the PLC Q100 to Q107 The TNC uses the parameters Q100 to Q107 to transfer values from the PLC to an NC program Active tool radius Q108 The active value of the tool radius is assigned to Q108 Q108 is calculated from Tool radius R Tool table or TOOL DEF block Delta value DR from the tool table Delta value DR from the TOOL CALL block Tool axis Q109 The value of Q109 depends on the current tool axis No tool axis defined Q109 1 X axis 0109 0 Y axis Q109 1 Z axis J109 2 U axis Q109 6 V axis 0109 7 W axis 0109 8 Spindle status Q110 The value of Q110 depends on which M function was last programmed for the spindle No spindle status defined Q110 1 MO3 Spindle ON clockwise Q110 0 M04 Spindle ON counterclockwise Q110 1 M05 after M03 0110 2 MO5 after M04 Q110 3 Coolant on off Q111 M08 Coolant ON O111 1 M09 Coolant OFF Q111 0 HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 273 10 10 Preassigned Q Parameters 10 10 Preassigned Q Parameters Overlap factor Q112 The overlap factor for pocket milling MP7430 is assigned to Q112 Unit of measurement for dimensions in the program Q113 The value of parameter Q113 specifies whether the highest level NC program for nesting with PGM CALL is programmed in millimeters or inches Metric system mm Olle 0 Inch system inches dib 4 Tool length
205. indow where you can select a cutting data table 72 Tool type Tool material Name of cutting data table 5 Programming Tools Editing tool tables The tool table that is active during execution of the part program Is designated as TOOL T You can edit TOOL T in any of the machine operating modes Other tool tables that are used for archiving or test runs are given different file names with the extension T To open the tool table TOOL T Select any machine operating mode aL To select the tool table press the TOOL TABLE soft Set the EDIT soft key to ON EDIT OFF LON To open any other tool table Select the Programming and Editing mode of operation Calling the file manager MGT To select the file type press the SELECT TYPE soft key To show type T files press the SHOW soft key Select a file or enter a new file name Conclude your entry with the ENT key or SELECT soft key When you have opened the tool table you can edit the tool data by moving the cursor to the desired position in the table with the arrow keys or the soft keys see figure at upper right You can overwrite the stored values or enter new values at any position Refer to the table on the next page for additional editing functions If the TNC cannot show all positions in the tool table in one screen page the highlight bar at the top of the table will display the symbol gt gt or lt lt To leave the tool table C
206. ing of subprogram 2 End of subprogram 2 243 O t q p L Program execution 1st step Main program UPGMS is executed up to block 17 2nd step Subprogram 1 is called and executed up to block 39 3rd step Subprogram 2 is called and executed up to block 62 End of subprogram 2 and return jump to the subprogram from which it was called 9 5 Nesting 4th step Subprogram 1 is called and executed from block 40 up to block 45 End of subprogram 1 and return jump to the main program UPGMS 5th step Main program UPGMS is executed from block 18 up to block 35 Return jump to block 1 and end of program Repeating program section repeats Beginning of program section repeat 1 Beginning of program section repeat 2 The program section between this block and LBL 2 block 20 is repeated twice The program section between this block and LBL 1 block 15 is repeated once E u B Q 3 E 3 D Z x D O 8 2 A a o 1st step Main program REPS is executed up to block 27 2nd step Program section between block 27 and block 20 is repeated twice 3rd step Main program REPS is executed from block 28 to block J5 4th step Program section between block 35 and block 15 is repeated once including the program section repeat between 20 and block 27 5th step Main program REPS is executed from block 36 to block 50 end of program N 44 9 Programming Subprograms and P
207. ing thread cutting the feed rate is automatically adjusted The feed rate override knob is disabled The TNC automatically activates and deactivates spindle rotation Do not program M3 or M4 before cycle call Total hole depth f Distance between current tool position and end of thread The algebraic sign for the total hole depth determines the working direction a negative value means a negative working direction in the tool axis PITCH Pitch of the thread The algebraic sign differentiates between right hand and left hand threads right hand thread M3 with negative depth left hand thread M4 with negative depth HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 Example NC blocks 165 8 2 Drilling Cycles 8 2 Drilling Cycles 10 20 80 90 100 Define the workpiece blank Define the tool Call the tool Retract the tool Define cycle Approach hole 1 spindle ON Call the cycle Approach hole 2 call cycle Approach hole 3 call cycle Approach hole 4 call cycle Retract in the tool axis end program 8 Programming Cycles 8 2 Drilling Cycles Program sequence E Program the drilling cycle in the main program E Program the machining operation in a subprogram see section 9 Programming Subprograms and Program Section Repeats L m UO m Z L gt Z Z O is NO O U Z O D Ww O Define the workpiece blank
208. initiate the plain language dialog The TNC asks you successively for all the necessary information and inserts the program block into the part program Example programming a Straight line Initiate the programming dialog here for a Straight line or c LL co re 0 W e aL 10 Enter the coordinates of the straight line end point 5 ENT Select the radius compensation here press the RL soft key the tool moves to the left of the programmed contour 100 Enter the feed rate here 100 mm min and confirm your entry with ENT For programming in inches enter 100 for a feed rate of 10 ipm Move at rapid traverse press the FMAX soft key or Move at automatically calculated speed cutting data table press the FAUTO soft key 3 Enter a miscellaneous function here M3 and terminate the dialog with ENT The part program now contains the following line HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 Positioning Programming and editing ith mdi Miscellaneous function M BLK FORM 1 Z X Y 0 2 48 BLK FORM 2 X 100 Y 100 2 TOOL CALL 1 Z 3500 DL 1 DR 1 L Z 250 R F MAX L X 20 Y 5 R F MAX END PGM NEU MM 95 IONS 6 3 Contour Bi roach and Departure 6 3 Contour Approach and Departure BLK FORM 2 X 100 Y 100 2 Overview Types of paths for contour approach and TOOL CALL 1 Z 3508 L 2 25 R F MAX departure L X 20 Y 50 R F MAX L 2 5 R F20
209. ints X 158 A U 0 y POSITION AXIS MACHINE INPUT PGM LIMITS HELP vane tf 50 Y B 180 Programming and editing operation File MACH1 HLP Line 6 Column 1 INSERT Commands for the tool changer 1111 chain forward 2222 chain backward HENDI PAGE PAGE BEGIN END C INSERT MOVE MOVE WORD WORD fi Il rN iji FIND OVERWRITE gt gt lt lt 315 12 14 Displaying HELP files 12 15 Machining Times imes 7 The machine tool builder can provide further operating Control on 582 58 20 lt time displays Refer to your machine tool manual Machine on 00 08 2 Program run 0 00 00 E The MACHINE TIME soft key enables you to show different T operating time displays Operating time Meaning _ _ _ _ Control ON Operating time of the control since its LO commissioning mag Machine ON Operating time of the machine tool pon ee ow FL IT TL TE dT UT Program Run Duration of controlled operation since initial setup 316 12 MOD Functions 13 1 General User Parameters General user parameters are machine parameters affecting TNC settings that the user may want to change in accordance with his requirements Some examples of user parameters are Dialog language Interface behavior Traversing speeds Sequence of machining Effect of overrides Input possibilities for machine parameters Machine parameters can be programmed as e Son oa
210. irection of the milling path DR climb milling with M3 DR up cut milling with M3 Example NC blocks 8 Programming Cycles CIRCULAR POCKET FINISHING Cycle 214 1 The TNC automatically moves the tool in the tool axis to set up clearance or if programmed to the 2nd set up clearance and subsequently to the center of the pocket 2 From the pocket center the tool moves in the working plane to the starting point for machining The TNC takes the workpiece blank diameter and tool radius into account for calculating the starting point If you enter a workpiece blank diameter of O the TNC plunge cuts into the pocket center 3 If the tool is at the 2nd set up clearance it moves in rapid traverse FMAX to set up clearance and from there advances to the first plunging depth at the feed rate for plunging 4 The tool then moves tangentially to the contour of the finished part and using climb milling machines one revolution 5 After this the tool departs the contour tangentially and returns to the starting point in the working plane 6 This process 3 to 5 is repeated until the programmed depth is reached 7 At the end of the cycle the TNC retracts the tool in FMAX to set up clearance or if programmed to the 2nd set up clearance and finally to the center of the pocket end position starting position E Before programming note the following The algebraic sign for the depth par
211. is end program 10 Programming Q Parameters HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 Subprogram 10 Machining operation Account for allowance and tool based on the cylinder radius Set counter Copy starting angle in space Z X plane Calculate angle increment Shift datum to center of cylinder X axis Account for rotational position in the plane Pre position in the plane to the cylinder center Pre position in the tool axis Set pole in the Z X plane Move to starting position on cylinder plunge cutting obliquely into the material Longitudinal cut in Y direction Update the counter Update solid angle Finished If finished jump to end Move in an approximated arc for the next longitudinal cut Longitudinal cut in Y direction Update the counter Update solid angle Unfinished If not finished return to LBL 1 Reset the rotation Reset the datum shift End of subprogram 279 10 11 Programming Examples 10 11 Programming Examples Program sequence m This program requires an end mill m The contour of the sphere is approximated by many short lines in the Z X plane defined via 014 The smaller you define the angle increment the smoother the curve becomes E You can determine the number of contour cuts through the angle increment in the plane defined in Q18 m The tool moves upward in three dimensional cuts m The tool radius is compensated automatically N 00
212. is process 1 to 4 until the programmed total hole depth is reached 6 After a dwell time at the hole bottom the tool is returned to the Starting position in rapid traverse FMAX for chip breaking L Before programming note the following Program a positioning block for the starting point hole center in the working plane with RADIUS COMPENSATION RO Program a positioning block for the starting point in the tool axis set up clearance above the workpiece surface The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter TOTAL HOLE DEPTH determines the working direction 1 Setup clearance f incremental value Distance between tool tip at starting position and workpiece surface J Total hole depth 2 Depth Q201 incremental value Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of hole tip of drill taper Plunging depth g incremental value Infeed per cut The tool will drill to the total hole depth in one movement if the plunging depth equals the total hole depth the plunging depth is greater than the total hole depth The total hole depth does not have to be a multiple of the plunging depth Dwell time in seconds Amount of time the tool remains at the total hole depth for chip breaking Feed rate F Traversing speed of the tool during drilling in mm min HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 Example NC blocks 155 8 2 Drilling Cycles 8 2 Drilling Cycles DRILLING Cycle 200 1 The TNC posi
213. ith Manual Data Input MDI The straight line function is described in section 6 4 Path Contours Cartesian Coordinates the PECKING cycle in section 8 2 Dril ling Cycles Example 2 Correcting workpiece misalignment on machines with rotary tables Use the 3 D touch probe to rotate the coordinate system See section 12 2 Touch Probe Cycles in the Manual and Electronic Handwheel Modes section Compensating Workpiece Misalignment Write down the Rotation Angle and cancel the Basic Rotation 7 Select operating mode Positioning with MDI Select the axis of the rotary table enter the rotation angle you wrote down previously and set the feed rate For example L C 2 561 F50 G Conclude entry Press the machine START button The rotation of the table corrects the misalignment HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 Setup clearance of the tool above the hole Total hole depth Algebraic sign working direction Depth of each infeed before retraction Dwell time in seconds at the hole bottom Feed rate for pecking Call PECKING cycle Retract tool End of program 25 erations 3 1 Programming and Executing Simple Mach erations 3 1 Programming and Executing Simple Mach Protecting and erasing programs in MDI The MDI file is generally intended for short programs that are only needed temporarily Nevertheless you can store a program if necessary by proceedi
214. itions the tool in the tool axis to the 2nd set up clearance and subsequently to the center of the left circle From there the TNC positions the tool to set up clearance above the workpiece surface 2 The tool moves at the feed rate for milling to the workpiece surface From there the cutter advances in the longitudinal direction of the slot plunge cutting obliquely into the material until it reaches the center of the right circle 3 The tool then moves back to the center of the left circle again with oblique plunge cutting This process is repeated until the programmed milling depth is reached 4 At the milling depth the TNC moves the tool for the purpose of face milling to the other end of the slot and then back to the center of the slot Finishing process 5 The TNC advances the tool from the slot center tangentially to the contour of the finished part The tool subsequently climb mills the contour with M3 6 When the tool reaches the end of the contour it departs the contour tangentially and returns to the center of the slot 7 At the end of the cycle the tool is retracted in rapid traverse FMAX to set up clearance and if programmed to the 2nd set up clearance HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 Example NC blocks 179 e d 2 v c N oa op m ad ae S O 0 O 8 3 Cycle Mo Pockets Studs and Slots 180 a gt Set up clearance Q200
215. k e g If you have narrowed the column width 88 NR NAME TYPE WIDTH DEG ENGLISH to HUNGARIAN 2 1 2 3 4 5 CEND 8 Column number Overview of columns N Numerical input C Alphanumeric input Width of column For type N including algebraic sign comma and decimal places Number of decimal places max 4 effective only for type N Language dependent dialogs max 32 characters Workpiece material Tool material Cutting speed Vc1i Feed rate Fz1 Cutting speed Vc2 Feed rate Fz2 INSERT DELETE NEXT LINE LINE LINE 5 Programming Tools Data transfer from cutting data tables If you output a file type TAB or CDT via an external data interface the TNC also transfers the structural definition of the table The structural definition begins with the line STRUCTBEGIN and ends with the line STRUCTEND The meanings of the individual code words are shown in the table Structure Command see previous page Behind STRUCTEND the TNC saves the actual content of the table Configuration file TNC SYS You must use the configuration file TNC SYS if your cutting data tables are not stored in the standard directory TNC In TNC SYS you must then define the paths in which you have stored your cutting data tables Y The TNC SYS file must be stored in the root directory THCY 5 5 Working wens Data Tables WMAT Path for workpiece material table TMAT Path for cutting material
216. l a separate program for execution How subprograms and program section repeats are used in programming is described in Chapter 9 Programming with Q parameters Instead of programming numerical values in a part program you enter markers called Q parameters You assign the values to the Q parameters separately with the Q parameter functions You can use the Q parameters for programming mathematical functions that control program execution or describe a contour In addition parametric programming enables you to measure with the 3 D touch probe during program run Programming with Q parameters is described in Chapter 10 92 6 Programming Programming Contours 6 2 Fundamentals of Path Functions Programming tool movements for workpiece machining You create a part program by programming the path functions for the individual contour elements in sequence You usually do this by entering the coordinates of the end points of the contour elements given in the production drawing The TNC calculates the actual path of the tool from these coordinates and from the tool data and radius compensation The TNC moves all axes programmed in a single block simultaneously Movement parallel to the machine axes The program block contains only one coordinate The TNC thus moves the tool parallel to the programmed axis Depending on the individual machine tool the part program is executed by movement of either the to
217. l color in the calculator window Addition F Subtraction Multiplication Division Sine 5 Cosine C Tangent T Arc sine AS Arc cosine A Arc tangent A Powers A Square root Q Inversion Parenthetic calculations p 3 14159265359 P Display result If you are writing a program and the programming dialog is active you can use the actual position capture key to transfer the result to the highlight position in the current block HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 ie aa Programming and editing Miscellaneous function M BLK FORM 0 1 2 X 0 Y 0 2 40 BLK FORM 0 2 X 100 Y 100 2 0 TOOL CALL 1 2 3500 DL 1 DR 1 L 2 250 RO F MAX L X 20 Y 50 R F MAX END PGM NEU MM 0 RC SIN COS TAN X Y SOR 1 X 63 Oo ou x gt Q wa 4 10 Integrated or Messages S O e 2 le oer Oo 4 11 HELP for NC error messages The TNC automatically generates error messages when it detects problems such as Incorrect data Logical errors in the program Contour elements that are impossible to machine Incorrect use of the touch probe system An error message that contains a program block number was caused by an error in the indicated block or in the preceding block The TNC error messages can be canceled with the CE key after the cause of the error has been removed If you require more information on a particular error message press the HELP key A window is then superimpos
218. lative data are based the TNC will display an error message Change the program first before you clear this message Coordinate relative to an end point of block N Change in the polar coordinate radius relative to block N Change in the polar coordinate angle relative to block N Angle between a straight line and another element Straight line parallel to another contour element Distance from a Straight line to a parallel contour element Coordinates relative to an end point of block N Change in the polar coordinate radius relative to block N Change in the polar coordinate angle relative to block N Angle between the entry tangent of the arc and another contour element HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 123 O Sms Oo Som 0 Sums Oo q ba Oo 6 6 Path Contours FK Free C 6 6 Path Contours FK i ntour Programming CC coordinates relative to an end point of block N Change in the polar coordinate radius relative to block N Change in the polar coordinate angle relative to block N Example NC blocks The known coordinates are relative to block N see figure at upper right The known direction and the known distance from the contour element are relative to block N see figure at center right The known circle center coordinates are relative to block N see figure at lower right 24 6 Programming Programming
219. lays the current value of the Q parameter 14 FSELECT 1 ae ap c pt S i jm If you wish to change the value enter a new value confirm it with the ENT key and conclude your entry with the END key To leave the value unchanged terminate the dialog with the END key hecking and Changing Q Parameters q 260 10 Programming Q Parameters 10 8 Additional Functions Press the DIVERSE FUNCTION soft key to call the additional functions The TNC then displays the following soft keys FN14 ERROR Display error messages FN15 PRINT Unformatted output of texts or Q parameter values FN16 FPRINT Formatted output of texts or Q parameter values FN18 SYS DATUM READ Read system data FN19 PLC Transfer values to the PLC FN20 WAIT FOR NC and PLC synchronization FN25 FRESET Datum setting during program run FN14 ERROR Display error messages FN14 ERROR FN15 PRINT FN16 F PRINT FN25 DATUM With the function FN14 ERROR you can call messages under program control The messages were preprogrammed by the machine tool builder or by HEIDENHAIN If the TNC encounters a block with FN 14 during program run It will interrupt the run and display an error message The program must then be restarted For error numbers see the table on the following page Example NC block The TNC is to display the text stored under error number 254 HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 10
220. le 1 to 254 e J4 0 Ss e _ C Som g i o q HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 325 e q4 lt 0 Sums 7e mD Sou g i m q Configure tool table To omit from the table enter 0 Column number in the tool table for MP7266 0 MP7266 1 MP7266 2 MP7266 3 MP7266 4 MP7266 5 MP7266 6 MP7266 7 MP7266 8 MP7266 9 MP7266 10 MP7266 11 MP7266 12 MP7266 13 MP7266 14 MP7266 15 MP7266 16 MP7266 17 MP7266 18 MP7266 19 MP7266 20 MP7266 21 MP7266 22 MP7266 23 MP7266 24 MP7266 25 MP7266 26 326 Tool name NAME 0 to 27 column width 16 characters Tool length L 0 to 27 column width 11 characters Tool radius R 0 to 27 column width 11 characters Tool radius 2 R2 0 to 27 column width 11 characters Oversize length DL 0 to27 column width 8 characters Oversize radius DR 0 to27 column width 8 characters Oversize radius 2 DR2 0 to 27 column width 8 characters Tool locked TL 0 to27 column width 2 characters Replacement tool RT 0 to27 column width 3 characters Maximum tool life TIME1 0 to27 column width 5 characters Maximum tool life for TOOL CALL TIME2 0 to 27 column width 5 characters Current tool life CUR TIME 0 to 27 column width 8 characters Tool comment DOC 0 to 27 column width 16 characters Number of teeth CUT 0 to 27 column
221. learance in FMAX E Before programming note the following Program a positioning block for the starting point hole center in the working plane with RADIUS COMPENSATION RO The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter TOTAL HOLE DEPTH determines the working direction After the cycle is completed the TNC restores the coolant and spindle conditions that were active before the cycle call 202 Set up clearance Q200 incremental value Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface Depth Q201 incremental value Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of hole Feed rate for plunging Q206 Traversing speed of the tool during boring in mm min Dwell time at depth Q211 Time in seconds that the tool remains at the hole bottom Retraction feed rate Q208 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min when retracting from the hole If you enter Q208 0 the tool retracts at feed rate for plunging Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute value Coordinate of the workpiece surface 2nd set up clearance Q204 incremental value Coordinate in the tool axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece clamping devices can occur 158 Example NC blocks 8 Programming Cycles Disengaging direction 0 1 2 3 4 Q214 Determine the direction in which the TNC retracts the tool at the hole bottom after spindle orientation Do not retract tool Retract tool in the negative main axis direction Retract tool in the
222. lling operation Set label for program section repeat Rotate by 45 incremental Call milling operation Return jump to LBL 10 execute the milling operation six times Reset the rotation Reset the datum shift Retract in the tool axis end program 233 rdinate Transformation Cycles efine milling operation ubprogram 1 nO S9JDAd UOIJEWUNOJSURJ B JEUIPIOOD 9 8 Programming Cycles 34 N 8 8 Special Cycles DWELL TIME Cycle 9 This cycle causes the execution of the next block within a running program to be delayed by the programmed dwell time A dwell time can be used for such purposes as chip breaking Effect Cycle 9 becomes effective as soon as it is defined in the program Modal conditions such as spindle rotation are not affected Dwell time in seconds Enter the dwell time in seconds Input range O to 3600 s 1 hour in 0 001 s steps Example NC blocks PROGRAM CALL Cycle 12 Routines that you have programmed such as special drilling cycles or geometrical modules can be written as main programs and then called like fixed cycles IE Before programming note the following If the program you are defining to be a cycle is located in the same directory as the program you are calling it from you need only to enter the program name If the program you are defining to be a cycle is not located in the same directory as the program you are calling it from you must enter the complete p
223. lly tangential arc The tool then clears the finishing allowance remaining from rough out 23 Feed rate for plunging Traversing speed of the tool ay during penetration Feed rate for milling Q12 Traversing speed for milling Example NC blocks SIDE FINISHING Cycle 24 The subcontours are approached and departed on a tangential arc Each subcontour is finish milled separately f Before programming note the following The sum of allowance for side 014 and the radius of the finish mill must be smaller than the sum of allowance for side Q3 Cycle 20 and the radius of the rough mill This calculation also holds if you run Cycle 24 without having roughed out with Cycle 22 in this case enter 0 for the radius of the rough mill The TNC automatically calculates the starting point for finishing The starting point depends on the available space in the pocket TA Direction of rotation Clockwise 1 Q9 Direction of machining 1 Counterclockwise 1 Clockwise Plunging depth Q10 incremental value Dimension by which the tool plunges in each infeed Feed rate for plunging Q11 Traversing speed of the tool during penetration Feed rate for milling Q12 Traversing speed for milling Finishing allowance for side Q14 incremental value Enter the allowed material for several finish milling operations If you enter Q14 O the remaining finishing allowance will be cleared HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430
224. loor finishing 199 FNxx See O Parameter Programming Formula entry 270 Full circle 105 Fundamentals 28 Generating L blocks 312 Graphic simulation 288 Graphics detail magnification 58 during programming 5 7 Graphics detail magnification 286 views 284 Handwheel positioning superimposing 143 Hard disk 33 Helical interpolation 114 Helix 114 HELP files displaying 313 Help with error messages Hole patterns circular 186 linear 187 overview 185 Insert rounding arc between straight lines M112 139 Keyboard 5 Laser cutting machines miscellaneous functions 149 Look ahead 142 M functions See Miscellaneous functions Machine parameters for 3 D touch probes 318 for external data transfer 317 for TNC displays and TNC editor 321 Machine referenced coordinates M91 M92 135 Machining time counting 288 Machining interruption of 292 Main axes 29 Mid program startup 294 Mirroring 224 MOD functions exiting 298 selecting 298 Modes of operation 5 Moving the machine axes 15 with incremental jog positioning 17 with the electronic handwheel 16 with the machine axis direction buttons 15 NC error messages 64 Nesting 243 Network connection 52 Network printer 52 306 Network settings 304 Open contours M98 140 Operating time 314 Option number 299 Index Pallet table executing 66 Parameter programming See Q parameter programming Parenthetic calculations 270 Part families 254 Path c
225. lso contain the components NX NY and NZ of the surface normal vector see figure below right The straight line end point and the surface normal vector are calculated by a CAD system The 3 D compensation enables you to use tools that have other dimensions than the ones you originally programmed Tool shapes The available tool shapes see the upper two illustrations at right are defined by the tool radii R and R2 TOOL RADIUS R Distance from the tool center to the tool circumference TOOL RADIUS 2 R2 Radius of the curvature between tool tip and tool circumference The ratio of R to R2 determines the shape of the tool AZ 0 End mill RaR Toroid cutter O lt R2 lt R Spherical cutter These data also specify the coordinates of the tool datum Py You enter the values for TOOL RADIUS and TOOL RADIUS 2 in the tool table Surface normal vectors Definition of surface normal vectors A surface normal vector is a mathematical quantity with a magnitude here the distance between the workpiece surface and the tool datum P and a direction End mill and radius mill perpendicular to the workpiece surface to be machined toward the tool datum Py Toroid cutter through Py or Pq respectively The magnitude and direction of a surface normal vector is determined by the components NX NY and NZ 82 WE IY 5 Programming Tools Ya The coordinates for the X Y Z positions and the surface
226. lt O teen 2 Q O or Q c Q Q c oo O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 O 1 2 a A UON gt OO OONO OOOAAOUN gt 13 2 Pi HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 335 out and Connecting Cable for the Data Interfaces N a q Ethernet interface RJ45 socket option Maximum cable length Unshielded 100 m Shielded 400 m 1 TX Transmit Data 2 TX Transmit Data 3 REC Receive Data 4 Vacant 5 Vacant 6 REC Receive Data 7 Vacant 8 Vacant Ethernet interface BNC socket option Maximum cable length 180 m 1 Data RXI TXO Inner conductor core 2 GND Shielding 336 13 Tables and Overviews 13 3 Technical Information TNC features Description Contouring control for machines with up to 9 axes plus oriented and integrated current controller Components Visual display unit with soft keys Data interfaces Simultaneous axis control for contour elements Look Ahead Defined rounding of discontinuous contour transitions Such as for Background programming One part program can be edited while the TNC runs another program Graphics File types system files HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 spindle stop The TNC 426 CB and TNC 430 CA feature analog speed control the TNC 426 PB and TNC 430 PB feature digital speed control Logic unit Keyboard unit RS 232 V 24 RX 422 V 11 Ethernet interface option Expanded data interface with LSV 2 protocol for remo
227. m E Call the group of holes subprogram 1 E Program the group of holes only once in subprogram 1 IL m J m Z L J gt Z Z O SX NO O U Z O i Ww O 100 Define the tool Call the tool Retract the tool Cycle definition drilling Move to starting point for group 1 Call the subprogram for the group Move to starting point for group 2 Call the subprogram for the group Move to starting point for group 3 Call the subprogram for the group End of main program 247 9 6 Programming Examples 9 6 Programming Examples H Call the entire hole pattern subprogram 1 m Approach the group of holes in subprogram 1 call group of holes subprogram 2 E Program the group of holes only once in subprogram 2 N 48 Beginning of subprogram 1 Group of holes 1st hole Move to 2nd hole call cycle Move to 3rd hole call cycle Move to 4th hole call cycle End of subprogram 1 Define tool center drill Tool definition drill Define tool reamer Call tool center drill Retract the tool 9 Programming Subprograms and Program Section Repeats HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 Cycle definition Centering Call subprogram 1 for the entire hole pattern Tool change Call the drilling tool New depth for drilling New plunging depth for drilling Call subprogram 1 for the entire hole pattern Tool change Tool call reamer Cycle definition REAMING Call s
228. machine dependent i lt function The standard functional range will be described 12359 in the following Refer to your machine manual for more PGM TNC DRILL PA35 H ded PGM TNC MILLSSLII365 1 CG N PGM TNC SMILLSFK35 H A Pallet tables are used for machining centers with pallet changer PAL 123510 The pallet table calls the part programs that are required for the PGM TNC 5DRILL gt 0ST35 H different pallets and activates datum shifts or datum tables POM INGE RELE S164 123511 You can also use pallet tables to run in succession several programs TNC CYCLESMILLINGSC210 H that have different datums eae ee 12 pa sl Bie lial INSERT DELETE NEXT APPEND select with ENT or NO ENT NAME entry obligatory Pallet or program name The machine tool builder determines the pallet name see Machine Manual The program name must be stored in the same directory as the Function Softkey pallet table Otherwise you must enter the full path name for the es program DATUM entry optional Name of the datum table The datum table must be stored in the same directory as the pallet table Otherwise you must enter the full path name for the datum table Datums from the datum table can be activated in the NC program Select previous page in table with Cycle 7 DATUM SHIFT X Y Z entry optional other axes also possible For pallet names the programmed coordinates are referenced to the machine datum For NC programs the programmed
229. mapper NFS2 lt Device name gt E ERROR FROM MOUNTSERVER The TNC has received implausible data from the mountserver NFS2 lt Device name gt E CANT GET ROOTDIRECTORY The mount server does not permit a connection with the directory defined in DEFINE MOUNT PATH NFS2 lt Device name gt E UID OR GID 0 NOT ALLOWED You entered 0 for DEFINE MOUNT UID or GID 0 The input value O is reserved for the system administrator 310 12 MOD Functions 12 6 Configuring PGM MGT With this function you can determine the features of the Tile manager Standard Simple file management without directory display Expanded range File management with additional functions and directory display cS See also section 4 3 Standard File Management and Section 4 4 File Management with Additional PUMCHOmMen Changing the setting Select the file manager in the Programming and Editing mode of operation press the PGM MGT key Select the MOD function Press the MOD key Select the PGM MGT setting using the arrow keys move the highlight onto the PGM MGT setting and use the ENT key to switch between STANDARD and ENHANCED 12 7 Machine Specific User Parameters 7 The machine tool builder can assign functions to up to 16 user parameters Your machine manual provides more detailed information 12 8 Showing the Workpiece in the ersten Test run Working Space an This MOD function enables you to graphically check the position of th
230. mming Three dimensional tool radius compensation For changing tool data without having to recalculate the program Program jumps Subprograms Program section repeats Program as Subprogram Fixed cycles Drilling cycles for drilling pecking reaming boring tapping with a floating tap holder rigid tapping Milling and finishing rectangular and circular pockets Cycles for milling linear and circular slots Linear and circular hole patterns Cycles for multipass milling of flat and twisted surfaces Milling pockets and islands from a list of subcontour elements Cylindrical surface interpolation 338 13 Tables and Overviews Coordinate transformations Datum shift Mirroring Rotation Scaling Tilting the working plane 3 D touch probe applications Touch probe functions for compensating workpiece misalignment Touch probe functions for setting datums Touch probe functions for automatic workpiece measurement Digitizing 3 D surfaces with the measuring touch probe optional Digitizing 3 D surfaces with the triggering touch probe optional Automatic tool measurement with the TT 120 Mathematical functions Basic arithmetic x and Trigonometry sin cos tan arcsin arccos arctan Square root Va and root sum of squares Va2 b2 Squaring SQ Powers 4 Constant PI 3 14 Logarithms Exponential functions Negation NEG Forming an integer INT Forming an absolute number ABS Truncating values before the decimal point FRAC Function
231. n CDT and confirm a FRAES_1 CDT UMAT TMATVc1 gt F1 with ENT n BOHREN CDT WMAT TMATVc1 F1 O On the right half of the screen the TNC displays various table pre O formats machine dependent see example in figure at right O Lsve S These tables differ from each other in the number of cutting O HE k ar speed feed rate combinations they allow Use the arrow keys to SA i a NK move the highlight onto the table format you wish to select and j O DIGI confirm with ENT The TNC generates a new empty cutting data Giesi table SELECT s ft fen Data required for the tool table Tool radius under R DR Number of teeth only with tools for milling under CUT Tool type under TYPE The tool type influences the calculation of the feed rate Tools for milling F S fz07 All other tools F Sefy S spindle speed fz feed rate per tooth fy feed rate per revolution Z no of teeth 3 D X O LO To Tool cutting material under TMAT Name of the cutting data table for which this tool will be used under CDT In the tool table select the tool type tool cutting material and the name of the cutting data table via soft key see 5 2 Tool Data HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 87 Data Tables ing ing wi orn 5 5 Work Working with automatic speed feed rate calculation Al If it has not already been entered enter the type of workpiece material in the file WWMAT TAB 2
232. n column L status L F Fixed tool number The tool is always returned to the Fixed pocket same pocket in the tool magazine Yes ENT No NO ENT L Locked pocket see also column ST Pocket locked Yes ENT No NO ENT PLG Information on this tool pocket that is to be sent to PLC status the PLC BEGIN Select beginning of table Select end of table Es D Qo m Select previous page in table v D ify m Select next page in table RESET Reset pocket table POCKET i i i NEXT Go to the beginning of the next line LINE RESET Reset tool number column T COLUMN m Oo Move to end of line LINE HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 75 _ 5 2 Tool Data mn 5 2 Tool Data Calling tool data A TOOL CALL block in the part program is defined with the following data Select the tool call function with the TOOL CALL key 07 10 Tool number Enter the number or name of the tool The tool must already be defined in a TOOL DEF block or in the tool table To call a tool by the tool name enter the name in quotation marks The tool name always refers to the entry in the active tool table TOOL T Working spindle axis X Y Z Enter the tool axis Spindle speed S Enter the spindle speed directly or allow the TNC to calculate the spindle speed if you are working with cutting data tables Press the S CALCULATE AUTOMAT soft key The TNC limits the spindle speed to the maximum value set in MP 3515 Feed rate F En
233. n fDuring this movement the TNC also offsets the tool by its radius to the left and upward 2 The tool then moves in FMAX in the tool axis to set up clearance From there it approaches the programmed starting position in the tool axis at the feed rate for plunging 3 The tool subsequently advances to the stopping point 2 at the feed rate for milling 2The stopping point is calculated from the programmed starting point the programmed length and the tool radius 4 The TNC offsets the tool to the starting point in the next pass at the stepover feed rate The offset is calculated from the programmed width and the number of cuts 5 The tool then returns in the negative direction of the first axis 6 Multipass milling is repeated until the programmed surface has been completed 7 At the end of the cycle the tool is retracted in FMAX to set up clearance 214 8 Programming Cycles iE Before programming note the following From the current position the TNC positions the tool at the starting point 1 first in the working plane and then in the tool axis MOE 0207 Pre position the tool in such a way that no collision between tool and clamping devices can occur Q219 230 g Starting point in 1st axis Q225 absolute value Min oF point coordinate of the surface to be multipass milled in the main axis of the working plane Starting point in 2nd axis Q226 absolute value Min point coordinate of the sur
234. n press the ENT key D To terminate the dialog press the END key 5 Programming Tools Radius compensation Machining corners Outside corners If you program radius compensation the TNC moves the tool around outside corners either on a transitional arc or on a spline selectable via MP7680 If necessary the TNC reduces the feed rate at outside corners to reduce machine stress for example at very great changes of direction Inside corners The TNC calculates the intersection of the tool center paths at inside corners under radius compensation From this point it then starts the next contour element This prevents damage to the workpiece The permissible tool radius therefore is limited by the geometry of the programmed contour Machining corners without radius compensation If you program the tool movement without radius compensation you can change the tool path and feed rate at workpiece corners with the miscellaneous function M90 see section 74 Miscellaneous Functions for Contouring Behavior HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 81 c J e c Oo Q Compensation c 2 N E 5 4 Three D 5 4 Three Dimensional Tool Compensation The TNC can carry out a three dimensional tool compensation 3 D compensation for straight line blocks Apart from the X Y and Z coordinates of the straight line end point these blocks must a
235. n by 1 Example Q2 NEG Q1 Drop places after the decimal point form an integer Example Q3 INT 042 Absolute value Example 04 ABS 022 Drop places before the decimal point form a fraction Example O5 FRAC 023 FRAC HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 Rules for formulas Mathematical formulas are programmed according to the following rules Higher level operations are performed first multiplication and division before addition and subtraction 1st step Calculation step 5 3 15 2nd step Calculation step 2 10 20 3rd step 15 20 35 13 02 Se Ist step 102 100 2nd step 33 27 3rd step 100 27 73 Distributive law for calculating with parentheses a b ch a b t a c 271 10 9 Entering Formulas Directly 10 9 Entering Formulas Directly Programming example Calculate an angle with arc tangent as opposite side Q12 and adjacent side Q13 then store in Q25 Q To select the formula entering function press the Q key and FORMULA soft key 25 Enter the parameter number o Shift the soft key row and select the arc tangent function E Shift the soft key row and open parentheses O 12 Enter Q parameter number 12 Select division Q 13 Enter Q parameter number 13 a Close parentheses and conclude formula entry Example NC block 10 Programming Q Parameters 10 10 Preassigned Q Parameters The Q parameters Q100 to Q122 are assigned values by the TNC These values
236. nd plunging depth 1 52 8 Programming Cycles Calling the Cycle Working with the secondary axes U V W The TNC performs infeed movements in the axis that was defined in the TOOL CALL block as the spindle axis It performs movements in the working plane only in the principle axes X Y or Z Exceptions E You program secondary axes for the side lengths in cycles 3 SLOT MILLING and 4 POCKET MILLING E You program secondary axes in the contour geometry subprogram of an SL cycle The following cycles become effective automatically as soon as they are defined in the part program These cycles cannot and must N gt Oo J e u Sen b not be called a m Cycles for circular and linear hole patterns E SL cycle CONTOUR GEOMETRY m SL cycle CONTOUR DATA m Cycle 32 TOLERANCE Coordinate transformation cycles m DWELL TIME cycle All other cycles are called as described below If the TNC is to execute the cycle once after the last programmed block program the cycle call with the miscellaneous function M99 or with CYCL CALL To program the cycle call press the CYCL CALL key CALL Enter a miscellaneous function for example for coolant supply If the TNC is to execute the cycle automatically after every positioning block program the cycle call with M89 depending on machine parameter 7440 To cancel M89 enter E M99 or m CYCL CALL or m CYCL DEF
237. nd point Py The position Py lies outside of the contour and results from your input in the DEP block If the DEP block also contains a Z axis coordinate the TNC will first move the tool to Py in the working plane and then move it to the entered depth in the tool axis 96 6 Programming Programming Contours You can enter the position data in absolute or incremental Abbreviation Meaning coordinates and in Cartesian or polar coordinates APPR Approach The TNC does not check whether the programmed contour will be i k DEP Departure damaged when moving from the actual position to the auxiliary i F point Py Use the test graphics to simulate approach and departure me before executing the part program Circle T Tangential When approaching the contour allow sufficient distance between E the starting point Ps and the first contour point Pa to assure that the _ __ V V TNC will reach the programmed feed rate for machining N Normal perpendicular The TNC moves the tool from the actual position to the auxiliary point Py at the feed rate that was last programmed Radius compensation The tool radius compensation is programmed together with the first contour point Pa in the APPR block The DEP blocks automatically remove the tool radius compensation Som J u m a os S Oo Sms Contour approach without radius compensation If you program the APPR block with R
238. ne tenth of the effective value Spindle speed S feed rate F and active M functions Program run started Axis locked Axis can be moved with the handwheel Axes are moving in a tilted working plain S S e 4 Axes are moving under a basic rotation Additional status displays The additional status displays contain detailed information on the program run They can be called in all operating modes except in the Programming and Editing mode of operation To switch on the additional status display O Call the soft key row for screen layout el Select the layout option for the additional status STATUS display 8 1 Introduction You can choose between several additional status displays with the following soft keys Shift the soft key rows until the STATUS soft keys appear STATUS Select the desired additional status display PGM e g general program information cy General inf ti PGM program in orma ion Programs Name of main program Active programs Active machining cycle Circle center CC pole Operating time wo 27 5000 Y 35 506 Dwell time counter Positions and coordinates 1 Position display 2 Type of position display e g actual positions E Tilt angle of the working plane 4 Angle of a basic rotation 46 ORILLING 7 DWELL A Q 00 09 54 8 GGG A 8 8806 B 188 6006 30 000G KR Basic rotation 8 0000 HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 2 A e
239. ng 49 8669 31 3103 E Mail service nc ogm heidenhain de PLC programming 49 8669 31 3102 E Mail service plc heidenhain de Lathe controls gt 49 711 952803 0 E Mail service hsf heidenhain de www heidenhain de 322 938 24 7 99 pdf Printed in Germany Subject to change without notice
240. ng 98 Approach Ps without radius compensation Pa with radius comp RR End point of the first contour element Next contour element 6 Programming Programming Contours Example NC blocks Approach Ps without radius compensation PA with radius comp RR Radius R 10 End point of the first contour element Next contour element Approaching on a circular arc with tangential connection from a straight line to the contour APPR LCT The tool moves on a straight line from the starting point Ps to an auxiliary point Py It then moves from Py to the first contour point Pa on a circular arc proach and Departure The arc is connected tangentially both to the line Ps Py as well as to the first contour element Once these lines are known the radius then suffices to completely define the tool path Use any path function to approach the starting point Ps Initiate the dialog with the APPR DEP key and APPR LCT soft key Coordinates of the first contour point Pa Sms Oo oa c Oo Q e Radius R of the arc Always enter R as a positive value Radius compensation for machining Example NC blocks Approach Ps without radius compensation Pa with radius compensation RR radius R 10 End point of the first contour element Next contour element HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 99 Departing tangentially on a straight line DEP LT The TNC move the tool on a straight line
241. ng as described below Select operating mode Programming and Editing To call the file manager press the PGM MGT id key program management Move the highlight to the MDI file COPY Select Copy file Press the COPY soft key BOREHOLE Enter the name under which you want to save the current contents of the MDI file EXECUTE Copy the file To close the file manager press the END soft key Erasing the contents of the MDI file is done in a similar way Instead of copying the contents however you erase them with the DELETE soft key The next time you select the Positioning with MDI operating mode the TNC will display an empty MDI file If you wish to delete MDI then you must not have selected the Positioning with MDI mode not even in the background you must not have selected the MDI file in the Programming and Editing mode For further information refer to section 4 2 File Management 26 3 Positioning with Manual Data Input MDI i i i i J M Fog r Pa i af i i i i F r j f 4 1 pun ntas of NC 4 1 Fundamentals of NC Position encoders and reference marks The machine axes are equipped with position encoders that register the positions of the machine table or tool When a machine axis moves the corresponding position encoder generates an electrical signal The TNC evaluates this signal and calculates the precise actual
242. ning 152 groups 152 Cylinder 279 Cylinder surface 202 Data interface assignment 301 connector layout 331 setup 300 Data interface connector layout 331 Data security 33 Data transfer software 302 Data transfer speed 300 Datum setting 18 without 3 D touch probe 18 Datum shift in the program 220 with datum tables 221 Defining the workpiece material 85 86 Dialog 55 Digitized data execution 212 Directory 40 copying 45 creating 44 Drilling 156 Drilling cycles 154 Dwell time 235 Elliose 277 Ellipse 281 Error messages 64 helo with 64 output 261 Ethernet interface configuration 304 connecting and disconnecting network drives 52 connection possibilities 303 Exchanging the buffer battery 338 Index Index Feed rate 17 changing 18 for rotary axes M116 144 Feed rate factor 141 Feed rate factor for plunging M103 141 File management calling 34 42 configuring via MOD 309 copying a table 45 copying files 35 45 deleting files 35 46 Directory copying 45 creating 44 Enhanced 40 overview 41 external data transfer 36 49 file name 33 file type 33 marking files 47 overwriting files 51 protecting files 39 48 renaming files 38 47 selecting files 34 44 Standard 34 File status 34 42 FK programming 118 auxiliary points 122 circular paths 120 closed contours 125 dialog initiation 119 FK program conversion 125 fundamentals 118 graphics 118 relative data 123 Straight lines 120 F
243. nnection Helical interpolation Depart the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection Retract in the tool axis end program Identify beginning of program section repeat Enter the thread pitch as an incremental IZ dimension Program the number of repeats thread revolutions 117 6 5 Path Sor Polar Coordinates 6 6 Path Contours FK P ontour Programming 6 6 Path Contours FK Free Contour Programming Fundamentals Workpiece drawings that are not dimensioned for NC often contain unconventional coordinate data that cannot be entered with the gray path function keys You may for example have only the following data on a specific contour element Known coordinates on the contour element or in its proximity Coordinate data that are referenced to another contour element Directional data and data regarding the course of the contour You can enter such dimensional data directly by using the FK free contour programming function The TNC derives the contour from the known coordinate data and supports the programming dialog with the interactive programming graphics The figure to the upper right shows a workpiece drawing for which FK programming is the most convenient programming method If you wish to run FK programs on old TNC models use the conversion function see 4 3 Standard File Management Converting an FK program into HEIDENHAIN conversational format Graphics during FK programming If you wish to u
244. normal components NX NY NZ must be in the same sequence in the NC block 3 D compensation with surface normal vectors is only effective for coordinates in the main axes X Y Z If you insert a tool with oversize positive delta value the TNC outputs an error message You can suppress the error message with the M function M107 see section 5 2 Tool Data Tool Change The TNC will not display an error message if an entered tool oversize would cause damage to the contour Machine parameter 7680 defines whether the CAD system has calculated the tool length compensation ON lie csmt Cl Sones OF line Oui Sls ei ie PASE a Using other tools delta values If you want to use tools that have different dimensions than the ones you originally programmed you can enter the difference between the tool lengths and radii as delta values in the tool table or TOOL CALL Positive delta value DL DR DR2 The tool is larger than the original tool oversize Negative delta value DL DR DR2 The tool is smaller than the original tool undersize The TNC corrects the tool position by the delta values and the Surface normal vector Example Program block with a surface normal vector LN Straight line with 3 D compensation Ke Get Compensated coordinates of the straight line end point NX NY NZ Components of the surface normal vector F Feed rate M Miscellaneous function The feed rate F and miscellaneous function M can be entere
245. nstallation instruction supplied with the Ethernet card 304 12 MOD Functions Connection Possibilities You can connect the Ethernet card in your TNC to your network through a BNC connection X26 coax cable 10Base2 or through the RJ45 connection X25 10BaselT You can only use one of the two connections at one time Both connections are metallically isolated from the control electronics BNC connection X26 coaxial cable 10Base2 see figure at upper right The 10Base2 connection is also commonly known as Thin Ethernet or CheaperNet For the 10Base2 cable you need a BNC T connector to connect the TNC to your network RJ45 connection X25 10BaseT see figure at center right For a 10Basel connection you need a Twisted Pair cable to connect the TNC to your network HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 i f i _ tom oe _ om A wu M 5 e 8 eN i MU pi L PC 10BaseT 12 5 Ethernet Interface Configuring the TNC Hanus Network configuration Internet address of TNC Make sure that the person configuring your TNC is a network specialist NR ADDRESS MASK ROUTER 2 YEREL 255 255 0 0 CEND In the Programming and Editing mode of operation press the MOD key Enter the code word NET123 The TNC will then display the main screen for network configuration General network settings Pres
246. nt simply flios over see figure at lower right If the datum lies outside the contour to be mirrored the element also jumps to another location see figure at lower right Mirror image axis Enter the axis to be mirrored You lt gt can mirror all axes including rotary axes except for the spindle axis and its auxiliary axes Example NC blocks 79 CYCL DEF 8 0 MIRROR IMAGE 222 80 CYCL DEF 8 1 XY Cancellation Program the MIRROR IMAGE cycle once again with NO ENT 8 Programming Cycles ROTATION Cycle 10 The TNC can rotate the coordinate system about the active datum in the working plane within a program Effect The ROTATION cycle becomes effective as soon as it is defined in the program It is also effective in the Positioning with MDI mode of operation The active rotation angle is shown in the additional Status display Reference axis for the rotation angle X Y plane Xaxis Y Z plane Y axis Z X plane Spindle axis I Before programming note the following An active radius compensation is canceled by defining Cycle 10 and must therefore be reprogrammed if necessary After defining Cycle 10 you must move both axes of the working plane to activate rotation for all axes 10 Rotation Enter the rotation angle in degrees Input 2a range 360 to 360 absolute or incremental Example NC blocks 81 CYCL DEF 10 0 ROTATION gt 82 CYCL DEF 10 1 ROT 12
247. nts If you do not yet wish to select a green contour element press the EDIT soft key to continue the FK dialog The machine tool builder may use other colors for the FK graphics NC blocks from a program that you called with PGM CALL are displayed in another color Initiating the FK dialog If you press the gray FK button the TNC displays the soft keys you can use to Initiate an FK dialog See table on the right Press the FK button a second time to deselect the soft keys If you Initiate the FK dialog with one of these soft keys the TNC shows additional soft key rows that you can use for entering known coordinates directional data and data regarding the course of the contour EE The following prerequisites for FK programming must be observed The FK free contour programming feature can only be used for programming contour elements that lie in the working plane The working plane is defined in the first BLK FORM block of the part program You must enter all available data for every contour element Even the data that does not change must be entered in every block otherwise it will not be recognized Q parameters are permissible in all FK elements except in elements with relative references e g RX or RAN or in elements that are referenced to other NC blocks If both FK blocks and conventional blocks are entered in a program the FK contour must be fully defined before you can return to conventional programming
248. nts of the circle must be stored in Parameter Q30 and in the following seven parameters here to Q37 The TNC then stores the circle center of the reference axis X with spindle axis Z in Parameter Q20 the circle center of the minor axis Y with spindle axis Z in Parameter Q21 and the circle radius in Parameter Q22 C Note that FN23 and FN24 beside the resulting parameter also overwrite the two following parameters 258 10 Programming Q Parameters 10 6 If Then Decisions with Q Parameters The TNC can make logical If Then decisions by comparing a Q parameter with another O parameter or with a numerical value It the condition is fulfilled the TNC continues the program at the label that is programmed after the condition for information on labels see section 9 Subprograms and Program Section Repeats If it is not fulfilled the TNC continues with the next block To call another program as a subprogram enter PGM CALL after the block with the target label Unconditional jumps An unconditional jump is programmed by entering a conditional jump whose condition is always true Example FN9 IF 10 EQU 10 GOTO LBL1 Programming If Then decisions Press the JUMP soft key to call the if then conditions The TNC then displays the following soft keys FN9 IF EQUAL JUMP Example FN9 IF 01 EQU 03 GOTO LBL 5 If the two values or parameters are equal jump to the given label D cie amo 6 lt FN10 IF NOT EQUA
249. numbers TNC 426 CB TNC 426 PB 280 472 xx TNC 426 CFE TNC 426 PF 280 473 xx TNC 430 CA TNC 430 PA 280 472 xx TNC 430 CE TNC 430 PE 280 473 xx The suffixes E and F indicate the export versions of the TNC which have the following limitations Linear movement Is possible in no more than 4 axes simultaneously The machine tool builder adapts the useable features of the TNC to his machine by setting machine parameters Some of the functions described in this manual may not be among the features provided by your machine tool TNC functions that may not be available on your machine include Probing function for the 3 D touch probe Digitizing option Tool measurement with the TT 120 Rigid tapping Returning to the contour after an interruption Please contact your machine tool builder to become familiar with the individual implementation of the control on your machine Many machine manufacturers as well as HEIDENHAIN offer programming courses for the TNCs We recommend these courses as an effective way of improving your programming skill and sharing information and ideas with other TNC users User s Manual Touch Probe Cycles All of the touch probe functions are described in a separate manual Please contact HEIDENHAIN if you require a copy of this User s Manual Id Nr 329 203 xx Location of use The TNC complies with the limits for a Class A device in accordance with the specifications in EN 55022 and is intended for u
250. o 14 Move to contour point 15 Machine small contour step 15 to 16 Move to contour point 17 HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 139 IOr Behavi ing oe ead O Q Rm O offen 7 4 Miscellaneous Functions Machining open contours M98 Standard behavior The TNC calculates the intersections of the cutter paths at inside corners and moves the tool in the new direction at those points If the contour is open at the corners however this will result in incomplete machining see figure at upper right Behavior with M98 With the miscellaneous function M98 the TNC temporarily suspends radius compensation to ensure that both corners are completely machined see figure at lower right Effect M98 is effective only in the blocks in which it is programmed with M98 M98 becomes effective at the end of block Example NC blocks Move to the contour points 10 11 and 12 in succession 7 Programming Miscellaneous functions Feed rate factor for plunging movements M103 Standard behavior The TNC moves the tool at the last programmed feed rate regardless of the direction of traverse Behavior with M103 The TNC reduces the feed rate when the tool moves in the negati ve direction of the tool axis The feed rate for plunging FZMAX is calculated from the last programmed feed rate FPROG and a factor F FZMAX FPROG x F Programming M103 If you enter M103 in a positioning block the TN
251. o an angle that has been set in a machine parameter see your machine manual 13 4 Angle of orientation Enter the angle according to the reference axis of the working plane Inout range O to 360 Input resolution 0 17 Example NC blocks 8 Programming Cycles TOLERANCE Cycle 32 Fast contour milling is adapted to suit both the TNC and Q your machine by the machine manufacturer Your machine manual provides more detailed information The TNC automatically smoothens the contour between two path elements whether compensated or not The tool has constant contact with the workpiece surface If necessary the TNC automatically reduces the programmed feed rate so that the program can be machined at the fastest possible speed without jerk As a result the surface quality is improved and the machine is protected A contour deviation results from the smoothing out The size of this deviation tolerance value is set In a machine parameter by the machine manufacturer You can change the pre set tolerance value with Cycle 32 see figure at top right Before programming note the following Cycle 32 is DEF active which means that it becomes effective as soon as it is defined in the part program You can reset Cycle 32 by defining it again and confirming the dialog question after the TOLERANCE VALUE with NO ENT Resetting Cycle 32 reactivates the pre set tolerance Tolerance value Permissible contour deviation
252. oach starting point in the working plane Move to set up clearance above the workpiece surface spindle axis 2 From this position the TNC executes the last defined fixed cycle 3 The tool then approaches the starting point for the next machining operation in the positive main axis direction at set up clearance or 2nd set up clearance 4 This process 1 to 3 is repeated until all machining operations on the first line have been executed The tool is located above the last point on the first line 5 The tool subsequently moves to the last point on the second line where it carries out the machining operation 6 From this position the tool approaches the starting point for the next machining operation in the negative main axis direction 7 This process 6 is repeated until all machining operations in the second line have been executed HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 187 Point Patterns ining ol om Bon e Pi 8 The tool then moves to the starting point of the next line 9 All subsequent lines are processed In a reciprocating movement 221109 6 Bi 20 9 188 Starting point 1st axis Q225 absolute value Coordinate of the starting point in the main axis of the working plane gt Starting point 2nd axis Q226 absolute value Coordinate of the starting point in the secondary axis of the working plane gt Spacing in 1st axis Q237 incremental value Spacing between the Individual points on a
253. of an angle in degrees and assign it to a parameter FN COS gt FN8 ROOT SUM OF SQUARES Example FN8 Q10 5 LEN 4 Calculate and assign length from two values FN8 H LEN FN13 ANGLE Example FN13 Q20 10 ANG O1 Calculate the angle from the arc tangent of two sides or from the sine and cosine of the angle 0 lt angle lt 360 and assign It to a parameter FN13 x ANG Y 257 10 4 Trigonometric Functions les ing circ 10 5 Calculat 10 5 Calculating Circles The TNC can use the functions for calculating circles to calculate the circle center and the circle radius from three or four given points on the circle The calculation is more accurate If four points are used Application These functions can be used if you wish to determine the location and size of a bore hole or a pitch circle using the programmable probing function FN23 Determining the CIRCLE DATA from three points raz e g FN23 Q20 CDATA Q30 OF CIRCLE The coordinate pairs for three points of the circle must be stored in Parameter Q30 and in the following five parameters here to Q35 The TNC then stores the circle center of the reference axis X with spindle axis Z in Parameter Q20 the circle center of the minor axis Y with spindle axis Z in Parameter Q21 and the circle radius in Parameter 022 FN24 Determining the CIRCLE DATA from four points rza e g FN24 Q20 CDATA Q30 OF CIRCLE The coordinate pairs for four poi
254. of rotation sz Ihe machine tool builder determines whether Cycle 19 lt positions the axes of rotation automatically or whether they must be pre positioned in the program Your machine manual provides more detailed information If the axes are positioned automatically in Cycle 19 The TNC can position only controlled axes In order for the tilted axes to be positioned you must enter a feed rate and a set up clearance in addition to the tilting angles during cycle definition You can use only preset tools with the full tool length defined in the TOOL DEF block or in the tool table The position of the tool tip as referenced to the workpiece Surface remains nearly unchanged after tilting The TNC tilts the working plane at the last programmed feed rate The maximum feed rate that can be reached depends on the complexity of the swivel head or tilting table If the axes are not positioned automatically in Cycle 19 position them before defining the cycle for example with an L block Example NC blocks Positioning an axis of rotation Define the angle for calculation of the compensation Activate compensation for the tool axis Activate compensation for the working plane HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 229 8 7 Transformation Cycles 8 7 wm nate Transformation Cycles Position display in the tilted system On activation of Cycle 19 the displayed positions ACTL and NOML and the datum indicated in the additional status displ
255. ojection in three planes 3 D view 286 0 C4 o START RESET ill KY SINGLE START OFF LON o START MAGN 99 59 59 WINDOW TRANSFER BLK FORM DETAIL 11 Test Run and Program Run The graphic simulation must first have been stopped A detail magnification is always effective in all display modes Shift the soft key row in the Test Run mode of operation until the following soft keys appear Select the left right workpiece surface Select the front back workpiece surface Select the top bottom workpiece surface Shift the sectional plane to reduce or magnify the blank form Select the isolated detail To change the detail magnification The soft keys are listed in the table above Interrupt the graphic simulation if necessary Select the workpiece surface with the corresponding soft key see table To reduce or magnify the blank form press and hold the minus or plus soft key respectively To select the isolated detail press the TRANSFER DETAIL soft key Restart the test run or program run by pressing the START soft key RESET START returns the workpiece blank to its original state Cursor position during detail magnification During detail magnification the TNC displays the coordinates of the axis that is currently being isolated The coordinates describe the area determined for magnification To the left of the slash is the smallest coordinate of the detail MIN point to the left is
256. ol or the machine table on which the workpiece is clamped Nevertheless you always pro gram path contours as if the tool moves and the workpiece remains stationary Example L Path function for straight line X 100 Coordinate of the end point The tool retains the Y and Z coordinates and moves to the position X 100 See figure at upper right Movement in the main planes The program block contains two coordinates The TNC thus moves the tool in the programmed plane Example The tool retains the Z coordinate and moves in the XY plane to the position X 0 Y 50 See figure at center right Three dimensional movement The program block contains three coordinates The TNC thus moves the tool in space to the programmed position Example See figure at lower right HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 100 50 93 IONS or c LL co re 0 W O aL Is of Path Functions xo z 5 L N Te Entering more than three coordinates Machining with 5 axes for example moves 3 linear and 2 rotary axes simultaneously Such programs are too complex to program at the machine however and are usually created with a CAD system Example L X 20 Y 10 Z 2 A 15 C 6 RO F100 M3 22 E The TNC graphics cannot simulate movements in more than three axes Circles and circular arcs The TNC moves two axes simultaneously in a circular path relative to th
257. on The soft key row shows the available groups of cycles Overview of all cycles available in the TNC Enter the cycle number or use the cursor key to select the number from the list Then confirm your entry or selection with ENT Example NC blocks Cycles for peck drilling reaming boring counterboring tapping and thread cutting Cycles for milling pockets studs and slots Cycles for producing hole patterns such as circular or linear patterns SL Subcontour List cycles which allow the contourparallel machining of relatively complex contours consisting of several overlapping subcontours cylinder surface interpolation Cycles for face milling of flat or twisted surfaces Coordinate transformation cycles which enable datum shift rotation mirror image enlarging and reducing for various contours Special cycles such as dwell time program call oriented spindle stop and tolerance Y If you use indirect parameter assignments in fixed cycles with DRILLING POCKETS STUDS SLOTS PATTERN MULTIPASS MILLING COORD TRANSF SPECIAL CYCLES numbers greater than 200 e g Q210 Q1 any change in the assigned parameter e g Q1 will have no effect after the cycle definition Define the cycle parameter e g Q210 directly in such cases In order to be able to run cycles 1 to 17 on older TNC models you must program an additional negative sign before the values for safety clearance a
258. on the icon in the program group HEIDENHAIN Applications Windows 95 Click on lt Start gt lt Programs gt lt HEIDENHAIN Applications gt lt TNCremo gt When you start TNCremo for the first time you will be asked for the type of control you have connected the interface COM1 or COM2 and the data transfer soeed Enter the necessary information 302 12 MOD Functions Data transfer between the TNC and TNCremo Ensure that m The TNC is connected to the correct serial port on your PC m The data transfer speed set on the TNC for LSV2 operation is the same as that set on TNCremo m The TNC is connected to the correct serial port on your PC Once you have started TNCremo you will see a list of all of the files that are stored in the active directory on the left of main window M Using the menu items lt Directory gt lt Change gt you can change the active directory or select another directory on your PC To establish the connection with your TNC select the items lt Connect gt lt Link LSV 2 gt The TNCremo now receives the file and directory structure from the TNC and displays this at the bottom left of the main window 2 To transfer a file from the TNC to the PC select the file in the TNC window highlighted with a mouse click and activate the functions lt File gt lt Transfer gt To transfer a file from the PC to the TNC select the file in the PC window and activate the functions lt File gt lt Transf
259. ons and the total height of the helix For calculating a helix that is to be cut in a upward direction you need the following data Thread revolutions n Thread revolutions thread overrun at the start and end of the thread Total height h Thread pitch P x thread revolutions n Incremental Thread revolutions x 360 angle for total angle IPA beginning of thread angle for thread overrun Starting coordinate Z Thread pitch P x thread revolutions thread overrun at start of thread 14 6 Programming Programming Contours Shape of the helix The table below illustrates in which way the shape of the helix is determined by the work direction direction of rotation and radius compensation 6 5 Path Cor Polar Coordinates Right handed Z DR RL Left handed Z DR RR Right handed Z DR RR Left handed Z DR RL External thread Right handed Z DR RR Left handed Z DR RL Right handed Z DR RL Left handed Z DR RR Programming a helix E Always enter the same algebraic sign for the direction of rotation DR and the incremental total angle IPA The tool may otherwise move in a wrong path and damage the contour For the total angle IPA you can enter a value from 5400 to 5400 If the thread has of more than 15 revolutions program the helix in a program section repeat see section 9 2 Program Section Repeats cd P Polar coordinates angle Enter the total
260. ontour transitions The contour of the transitional element depends on the acceleration the rate of acceleration jerk and the defined tolerance for contour deviation Behavior with M134 The moves the tool during positioning with rotary axes so as to perform an exact stop at nontangential contour transitions Effect M134 becomes effective at the start of block M135 at the end of block You can reset M134 with M135 The TNC also resets M134 if you select a new program in a program run operating mode 148 7 Programming Miscellaneous functions 7 6 Miscellaneous Functions for Laser Cutting Machines The TNC can control the cutting efficiency of a laser by transferring voltage values through the S analog output You can influence laser efficiency during program run through the miscellaneous functions M200 to M204 Entering miscellaneous functions for laser cutting machines If you enter an M function for laser cutting machines in a positioning block the TNC continues the dialog by asking you the required parameters for the programmed function All miscellaneous functions for laser cutting machines become effective at the start of block Output the programmed voltage directly M200 The TNC outputs the value programmed after M200 as the voltage V Input range O to 9 999 V Effect M200 remains in effect until a new voltage is output through M200 M201 M202 M203 or M204 Output voltage as a function of distance M201
261. ontours 102 Cartesian coordinates 102 circular path around circular center 105 circular path with defined radius 106 circular path with tangential connection 107 overview 102 Straight line 103 FK free contour programming See FK programming Polar coordinates 112 circular path around pole CC 113 circular path with tangential connection 114 overview 112 Straight line 113 Path functions 93 fundamentals 93 circles and circular arcs 94 pre positioning 95 Paths 40 Peck drilling 155 Plan view 285 PLC and NC synchronization 269 Pocket calculator 63 Pocket table 75 Polar coordinates fundamentals 30 setting the pole 30 HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 Positioning in tilted working plane 137 with manual data input 24 Program creating 54 editing 56 structure 53 structuring programs 58 Program call calling any program as subprogram 242 via cycle 235 Program management See File management Program name See File management File name Program Run execution 291 interrupting 292 mid program Startup 294 overview 291 resuming after an interruption 293 Skipping blocks 296 Program section repeat 241 calling 242 operating sequence 241 programming 242 programming notes 241 Programming graphics 57 Projection in 3 planes 285 Q parameters 262 checking 260 formatted output 263 preassigned 273 transferring values to the PLC 269 unformatted output 262 Q parameter programming 252 ad
262. ool pocket table 52 1 Immediately after TOOL CALL programmed position 70 1 2 2 2 3 Active tool compensation 200 1 2 266 Pocket number Pocket number Pocket number Pocket number Pocket number Tool no W N j Tool number Special tool O no 1 yes Fixed pocket O no 1 yes Locket pocket O no 1 yes PLC status Pocket number Position valid invalid 1 0 X axis Y axis Z axis Programmed feed rate 1 no feed rate programmed Tool radius including delta values Tool length including delta values 10 Programming Q Parameters Active transformations 210 Programmed rotation with Cycle 10 0 mirroring not active 4 Z axis mirrored 64 U axis mirrored Combinations sum of individual axes Active scaling factor in X axis Active scaling factor in Z axis Active scaling factor in U axis Active scaling factor in W axis 3D ROT C axis Tilted working plane active inactive 1 0 Active datum shift 220 Traverse range 230 Axes 1 to 9 Nominal position in the REF system 240 Index 7 U axis 8 V axis 9 W axis Nominal positions in the input system 270 Triggering touch probe 350 Effective ball radius Center misalignment in main axis Center misalignment in secondary axis Direction of center misalignment compared with 0 position HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 1 2 3 Oo 0l O17 O17 BYP HB HBR RL BLA 10 11 12 13 14 19 GW NR CO CO NI GW NO
263. or example if you machine the contour clockwise with radius compensation RR The TNC recognizes an island if the tool path lies outside the contour for example if you machine the contour clockwise with radius compensation RL The subprograms must not contain tool axis coordinates The working plane is defined in the first coordinate block of the subprogram The secondary axes U V W are permitted Characteristics of the fixed cycles The TNC automatically positions the tool to set up clearance before a cycle Each level of infeed depth is milled without interruptions since the cutter traverses around islands instead of over them The radius of inside corners can be programmed the tool keeps moving to prevent surface blemishes at inside corners this applies for the outermost pass in the Rough out and Side Finishing cycles The contour is approached in a tangential arc for side finishing For floor finishing the tool again approaches the workpiece in a tangential arc for tool axis Z for example the arc may be in the Z X plane The contour is machined throughout in either climb or up cut milling With MP7420 you can determine where the tool is positioned at the end of Cycles 21 to 24 HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 191 8 5 SL Cycles 8 5 SL Cycles The machining data such as milling depth finishing allowance and setup clearance are entered as CONTOUR DATA in Cycle 20 Overview of SL cycles im
264. orarily store a character CHAR Insert a line or word from temporary IER storage WORD Programming and editing operation File 3516 4 BEGIN PGM 3516 MM BLK FORM 1 2 K 30 Y 90 2 48 BLK FORM 2 X 9 Y 90 2 0 TOOL DEF 5 TOOL CALL 1 2 81400 L 2 50 RO F MAX L 4 0 Y 100 RO F MAX M3 L 2 20 RO F MAX L 4 0 8 RL F250 FPOL X 10 FC DR R80 CCK CCY OH 11 FCT DR R 5 12 FCT DR R9 CCK 69 282 CCY 40 13 FSELECT 2 SELECT DELETE INSERT COPY APPEND READ BLOCK BLOCK BLOCK BLOCK TO FILE FILE 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 61 N LL O 4 9 N Ta O 4 9 To transfer the selected text to a different file Select the text block as described previously APPEND Press the APPEND TO FILE soft key the TNC TO FILE displays the dialog prompt Destination file Enter the path and name of the target file The TNC appends the selected text to the end of the specified file If no target file with the specified name is found the TNC creates a new file with the selected text To insert another file at the cursor position Move the cursor to the location in the text where you wish to insert another file READ Press the READ FILE soft key The TNC displays the dialog prompt File name Enter the path and name of the file you want to insert Finding text sections With the text editor you can search for words or character strings in a text Two functions are av
265. ordinate transformations Define cycles for basic behavior with a new value such as scaling factor 1 0 Execute a miscellaneous function M02 M30 or an END PGM block depending on machine parameter 7300 Select a new program HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 219 8 7 Transformation Cycles ordinate Transformation Cycles DATUM SHIFT Cycle 7 A datum shift allows machining operations to be repeated at various locations on the workpiece Effect When the DATUM SHIFT cycle is defined all coordinate data is based on the new datum The TNC displays the datum shift in each axis in the additional status display Input of rotary axes is also permitted Datum shift Enter the coordinates of the new datum t Absolute values are referenced to the manually set workpiece datum Incremental values are always referenced to the datum which was last valid this can be a datum which has already been shifted Example NC blocks Cancellation A datum shift is canceled by entering the datum shift coordinates X 0 Y 0 and Z 0 Graphics If you program a new BLK FORM after a datum shift you can use machine parameter 7310 to determine whether the BLK FORM is referenced to the current datum or to the original datum Referencing a new BLK FORM to the current datum enables you to display each part in a program in which several pallets are machined Status Displays The actual position values are referenced to the active shifted da
266. ou can set PRINT and PRINT TEST as follows Output data via RS 232 AOZOZ Gan Output data via RS 422 RAAZ cc Save data to the TNC s hard disk TNC Save data in directory in which the program with FN15 FN16 or the program with the digitizing cycles is located vacant File names Digitizing data Program Run Defined in the RANGE cycle Values with FN15 Program Run FNISRUN A Values with FN15 Test run FN15SIM A Values with FN16 Program Run FNI6RUN A Values with FN16 Test run FNI6SIM A HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 301 12 4 Setting the Data Interfaces Software for data transfer For transfer of files to and from the TNC we recommend using the HEIDENHAIN TNCremo data transfer software With TNCremo data transfer is possible with all HEIDENHAIN controls via serial interface i Please contact your HEIDENHAIN agent if you would like to receive the TNCremo data transfer software for a nominal fee System requirements for TNCremo AT personal computer or compatible system 640 KB working memory 1 MB free memory space on your hard disk One free serial interface Operating system MS DOS PC DOS 3 00 or later Windows 3 1 or later OS 2 A Microsoft compatible mouse for ease of operation not essential Installation underWindows Start the SETUPEXE installation program in the file manager explorer Follow the instructions of the setup program Starting TNCremo underWindows Windows 3 1 3 11 NT Double click
267. p to 16 characters Information on this tool that is to be sent to the PLC HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 You must use tool tables if your machine tool has an automatic tool changer you want to measure tools automatically with the TT 120 touch probe see the new Touch Probe Cycles User s Manual Chapter 4 you want to rough mill the contour with Cycle 22 see section 8 5 SL Cycles ROUGH OUT you want to work with automatic cutting data calculations Tool name Tool length Tool radius Tool radius 2 Tool length oversize Tool radius oversize Tool radius oversize 2 Tool length in the tool axis Maximum plunge angle Tool locked Yes ENT No NO ENT Replacement tool Maximum tool age Maximum tool age for TOOL CALL Current tool life Tool description PLC status 71 _ 5 2 Tool Data 5 2 Tool Data Tool table Tool data required for automatic tool measurement For a description of the cycles governing automatic tool measurement see the new Touch Probe Cycles Manual Chapter 4 CUT Number of teeth 20 teeth maximum LTOL Permissible deviation from tool length L for wear detection If the entered value is exceeded the TNC locks the tool status L Input range O to 0 9999 mm RTOL Permissible deviation from tool radius R for wear detection If the entered value is exceeded the TNC locks the tool status L Input range O to 0 9999 mm DIRECT Cutting direction of the
268. piece in a tilted system automatically The TNC stores the measured data in O parameters for further processing for example for printout 230 8 Programming Cycles Procedure for working with Cycle 19 WORKING PLANE 1 Write the program Define the tool not required when TOOL T is active and enter the full tool length Call the tool Retract the tool in the tool axis to a position where there is no danger of collision with the workpiece clamping devices during tilting If required position the tilt axis or axes with an L block to the appropriate angular value s depending on a machine parameter Activate datum shift if required Define Cycle 19 WORKING PLANE enter the angular values for the tilt axes Traverse all main axes X Y Z to activate compensation Write the program as if the machining process were to be executed in a non tilted plane Reset Cycle 19 WORKING PLANE program 0 for all tilt axes Disable the WORKING PLANE function redefine Cycle 19 and answer the dialog question with NO ENT Reset datum shift if required Position the tilt axes to the 0 position if required 2 Clamp the workpiece 3 Preparations in the operating mode Positioning with MDI Pre position the tilt axis axes to the corresponding angular value s for setting the datum The angular value depends on the selected reference plane on the workpiece 4 Preparations in the operating mode Manual Operation Use
269. position of the machine axis If there is an interruption of power the calculated position will no longer correspond to the actual position of the machine slide The CNC can re establish this relationship with the aid of reference marks when power is returned The scales of the position encoders contain one or more reference marks that transmit a signal to the TNC when they are crossed over From the signal the TNC identities that position as the machine axis reference point and can re establish the assignment of displayed positions to machine axis positions Linear encoders are generally used for linear axes Rotary tables and tilt axes have angle encoders If the position encoders feature distance coded reference marks you only need to move each axis a maximum of 20 mm 0 8 in for linear encoders and 20 for angle encoders to re establish the assignment of the displayed positions to machine axis positions Ad Mi X Z Y 28 4 Programming Fundamentals of NC File Management Programming Aids Pallet Management Reference system A reference system is required to define positions in a plane or in space The position data are always referenced to a predetermined point and are described through coordinates The Cartesian coordinate system a rectangular coordinate system is based on three coordinate axes X Y and Z The axes are mutually perpendicular and intersect at one point called the
270. r tilting the working plane are coordinate transformations in which the working plane is always perpendicular to the direction of the tool axis When tilting the working plane the TNC differentiates between two machine types Machines with tilting tables You must tilt the workpiece into the desired position for machining by positioning the tilting table for example with an L block The position of the transformed tool axis does not change in relation to the machine based coordinate system Thus if you rotate the table and therefore the workpiece by 90 for example the coordinate system does not rotate If you press the Z axis direction button in the Manual Operation mode the tool moves in Z direction In calculating the transformed coordinate system the TNC considers only the mechanically influenced offsets of the particular tilting table the so called translational components Machines with swivel heads You must bring the tool into the desired position for machining by positioning the swivel head for example with an L block The position of the transtormed tool axis changes in relation to the machine based coordinate system Thus if you rotate the swivel head and therefore the tool in the B axis by 90 for example the coordinate system rotates also f you press the Z axis direction button in the Manual Operation mode the tool moves in X direction of the machine based coordinate system In
271. r and test one program while the TNC is running another Compatibility The TNC can execute all part programs that were written on HEIDENHAIN controls TNC 150 B and later 1 Introduction 1 2 Visual Display Unit and Keyboard Visual display unit The TNC is available with either a color CRT screen BC 120 or a TFT flat panel display BF 120 The figures at right show the keys and controls on the BC 120 upper right and the BF 120 middle right 7 Header When the TNC is on the selected operating modes are shown in the screen header the machining mode at the left and the programming mode at right The currently active mode is displayed in the larger box where the dialog prompts and TNC messages also appear unless the TNC is showing only graphics 2 Soft keys In the footer the TNC indicates additional functions in a soft key row You can select these functions by pressing the keys immediately below them 8 The lines immediately above the sott key row indicate the number of soft key rows that can be called with the black arrow keys to the right and left The line representing the active soft key row is highlighted Soft key selector keys Switching the soft key rows Setting the screen layout Shift key for switchover between machining and programming modes Keys on BC 120 only Screen demagnetization Exit main menu for screen settings 8 Select main menu for screen settings In the main menu Move highlight downwa
272. r downwards The positions of the sectional planes are visible during shifting Coordinates of the line of intersection At the bottom of the graphics window the TNC displays the coordinates of the line of intersection referenced to the workpiece datum Only the coordinates of the working plane are shown This function is activated with machine parameter 7310 HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 KX 70 4 Y 55 5 RESET STORE ADD a ii BLK p 7 a 00 285 11 1 Graphics N Q g 3 D view The workpiece is displayed in three dimensions and can be rotated about the vertical axis The workpiece is displayed in three dimensions and can be rotated about the vertical axis The shape of the workpiece blank can be depicted by a frame overlay at the beginning of the graphic simulation In the Test Run mode of operation you can Isolate details for magnification see Magnitying details Press the soft key for plan view To rotate the 3 D view Shift the soft key row until the following soft keys appear Rotate the workpiece in 27 steps about the vertical axis Switch the frame overlay display for the workpiece blank on off Show the frame overlay with SHOW BLK FORM Omit the frame overlay with OMIT BLK FORM Magnifying details You can magnify details in the Test Run mode of operation in the following display modes provided that the graphic simulation is stopped Pr
273. r enter the thickness d of the shim In the tool axis offset the tool radius Repeat the process for the remaining axes If you are using a preset tool set the display of the tool axis to the length L of the tool or enter the sum Z L d 2 5 Tilting the Working Plane 7 The functions for tilting the working plane are interfaced lt to the TNC and the machine tool by the machine tool builder With specific swivel heads and tilting tables the machine tool builder determines whether the entered angles are interpreted as coordinates of the tilt axes or as solid angles Your machine manual provides more detailed information The TNC supports the tilting functions on machine tools with swivel heads and or tilting tables Typical applications are for example oblique holes or contours in an oblique plane The working plane is always tilted around the active datum The program is written as usual In a main plane such as the X Y plane but is executed In a plane that is tilted relative to the main plane HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 19 2 5 Tilting the Noria i i i me O iam Lo N There are two functions available for tilting the working plane 3 D ROT soft key in the Manual mode and Electronic Handwheel mode described below Tilting under program control Cycle 19 WORKING PLANE in the part program see 8 7 Coordinate Transformation Cycles The TNC functions fo
274. r in this chapter All of the cutting data tables must be stored in the same directory If the directory is not the standard directory TNC then behind the code word PCDT you must enter the path in which your cutting data is stored 86 jone Table editing Cutting material File TMAT TAB JR NAME DOC HC P35 HM beschichtet HSS HSSE Co5 HSS Kobalt HSSE C08 HSS Kobalt HSSE Co8 TiN HSS Kobalt HSSE TiCN TiCN beschichtet HSSE TiN TiN beschichtet HT P15 Cermet 10 HIJ K15 HM unbeschichtet HIJ K25 HM unbeschichtet 12 HM unbeschichtet 13 HIJ P35 HM unbeschichtet 14 Hartmetall Yollhartmetall BEGIN END PAGE PAGE i q i INSERT DELETE NEXT ORDER NY LINE LINE LINE 2 3 4 5 6 gt 8 9 ie A Sesame Cutting speed Vc1 HSS Co 8 HSS Co 10 HSS Co 8 HSS Co 8 HSS Co 10 TiCn Tin Yollhartm 12 BEGIN END PAGE PAGE i ft i INSERT DELETE NEXT ORDER NY LINE LINE LINE 5 Programming Tools Creating a new cutting data table preme PEOST AMM NG and editing N Select the Programming and Editing mode of operation Select table format E RS232 s 2 To select the file manager press the Taste PGM MGT key E R5422 Pormat elds K m WMAT gt TMAT gt YC1 gt F1 YC2 F2 YC3 F3 Select the directory where the cutting data table is to be stored cin FRAES_4 CDT WMAT2TMAT Vc1 F1 Vc2 F22VC32F3 VC4F4 f me FRAES_2 CDT WMATsTMAT Vc1 F12Vc2 F2 oe Enter any file name with file name extensio
275. ramming note the following Cycle 220 is DEF active which means that Cycle 220 y automatically calls the last defined fixed cycle If you combine Cycle 220 with one of the fixed cycles 200 to 204 and 212 to 215 the set up clearance workpiece surface and 2nd set up clearance that you defined in Cycle 220 will be effective for the selected fixed cycle Q217 Center in 1st axis Q216 absolute value Center of the pitch circle in the main axis of the working plane gt Center in 2nd axis Q217 absolute value Center of the pitch circle in the secondary axis of the working plane Pitch circle diameter Q244 Diameter of the pitch circle X Q216 Starting angle Q245 absolute value Angle between the main axis of the working plane and the starting point for the first machining operation on the pitch circle gt Stopping angle 0246 absolute value Angle between the main axis of the working plane and the starting point for the last machining operation on the pitch circle does not apply to complete circles Do not enter the same value for the stopping angle and starting angle If you enter the stopping angle greater than the starting angle machining will be carried out counterclockwise otherwise machining will be clockwise ANGLE STEP 0247 incremental Angle between two machining operations on a pitch circle If you enter an ANGLE STEP of 0 the TNC will calculate the ANGLE STEP from th
276. rance height Q7 absolute value Absolute height at which the tool cannot collide with the workpiece Position for tool retraction at the end of the cycle Plunging depth Q10 incremental value Dimension by which the tool plunges in each infeed Feed rate for plunging Q11 Traversing speed of the tool in the tool axis Feed rate for milling Q12 Traversing speed of the tool in the working plane Climb or up cut Up cut 1 Q15 Climb milling Input value 1 Conventional up cut milling Input value 1 To enable climb milling and up cut milling alternately in several infeeds Input value O Example NC blocks HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 201 8 5 SL Cycles 8 5 SL Cycles CYLINDER SURFACE Cycle 27 7 The TNC and the machine tool must be specially prepared by the machine tool builder for the use of Cycle 27 This cycle enables you to program a contour in two dimensions and then roll it onto a cylindrical surface for 3 D machining The contour is described in a subprogram identified in Cycle 14 CONTOUR GEOMETRY The subprogram contains coordinates in a rotary axis and in Its parallel axis The rotary axis C for example is parallel to the Z axis The path functions L CHF CR RND are available The dimensions in the rotary axis can be entered as desired either in degrees or in mm or inches You can select the desired dimension type in the cycle definition EE Before programming
277. rating mode Positioning with Manual Data Input is particularly convenient for simple machining operations or pre positioning of the tool It enables you to write a short program in HEIDENHAIN conversational programming or in ISO format and execute It immediately You can also call TNC cycles The program is Stored in the file MDI In the operating mode Positioning with MDI the additional status displays can also be activated Select the Positioning with MDI mode of operation Program the file MDI as you wish 1 To start program run press the machine START button Limitation FK free contour programming programming graphics and program run graphics cannot be used The MDI file must not contain a program call PGM CALL Example 1 A hole with a depth of 20 mm is to be drilled into a single workpiece After clamping and aligning the workpiece and setting the datum you can program and execute the drilling operation in a few lines First you pre position the tool in L blocks straight line blocks to the hole center coordinates at a setup clearance of 5 mm above the workpiece surface Then drill the hole with Cycle 1 PECKING N 4 Define tool zero tool radius 5 Call tool tool axis Z Spindle speed 2000 rpm Retract tool F MAX rapid traverse Move the tool at FMAX to a position above the borehole spindle on Position tool to 5 mm above hole Define PECKING cycle 3 Positioning w
278. rc DEP CT The tool moves on a circular arc from the last contour point Pe to the end point Py The arc is tangentially connected to the last contour element Program the last contour element with the end point Pe and radius Compensation Initiate the dialog with the APPR DEP key and DEP CT soft key Radius R of the circular arc If the tool should depart the workpiece in the direction of the radius compensation i e to the right with RR or to the left with RL Enter R as a positive value If the tool should depart the workpiece on the direction opposite to the radius compensation Enter R as a negative value Center angle CCA of the arc Example NC blocks Departing on a circular arc tangentially connecting the contour and a straight line DEP LCT The tool moves on a circular arc from the last contour point Pe to an auxiliary point Py It then moves on a straight line to the end point Py The arc is tangentially connected both to the last contour element and to the line from Py to Py Once these lines are known the radius R then suffices to completely define the tool path Program the last contour element with the end point Pe and radius compensation Initiate the dialog with the APPR DEP key and DEP LCT soft key Enter the coordinates of the end point Py Radius R of the arc Always enter R as a positive value Example NC blocks HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 Last contour element Pe
279. rd In the submenu Reduce value Move picture to the left or downward 9 In the main menu Move highlight upward In the submenu Increase value Move picture to the right or upward 10 In the main menu Select submenu In the submenu Exit Submenu See next page for the screen settings HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 HEIDENHAIN HEIDENHAIN m SRI E 7 Con SINGLE Z OFF U hes seprrapempa munan denra nimaan a rei aaa a aii o 1 2 Visual Display Unit and ovoji 1 2 Visual Display Unit and cou BRIGHTNESS Adjust brightness CONTRAST Adjust contrast H POSITION Adjust horizontal position H SIZE Adjust picture width V POSITION Adjust vertical position VESIZE Adjust picture height SIDE PIN Correct barrel shaped distortion TRAPEZOID Correct trapezoidal distortion ROTATION Correct tilting COLORTEMP Adjust color temperature R GAIN Adjust strength of red color B GAIN Adjust strength of blue color RECALL No function The BC 120 is sensitive to magnetic and electromagnetic noise which can distort the position and geometry of the picture Alternating fields can cause the picture to shift periodically or to become distorted Screen layout You select the screen layout yourself In the PROGRAMMING AND EDITING mode of operation for example you can have the TNC show program blocks in the left window while the right window displays programming graphics You could also display the program structure in the right
280. reached F MAX is only effective in the block in which it is programmed After the block with F MAX is executed the feed rate will return to the last feed rate entered as a numerical value Changing during program run You can adjust the feed rate during program run with the feed rate override knob Spindle speed S The spindle speed S is entered in revolutions per minute rpm in a TOOL CALL block Programmed change In the part program you can change the spindle speed in a TOOL CALL block by entering the spindle speed only To program a tool call press the TOOL CALL key 07 1 E Ignore the dialog question for Tool number with the NO ENT key Ignore the dialog question for Working spindle axis X Y Z with the NO ENT key Enter the new spindle speed for the dialog question Spindle speed S and confirm with END Changing during program run You can adjust the spindle speed during program run with the spindle speed override knob 68 5 Programming Tools 5 2 Tool Data You usually program the coordinates of path contours as they are dimensioned in the workpiece drawing To allow the TNC to calculate the tool center path i e the tool compensation you must also enter the length and radius of each tool you are using Tool data can be entered either directly in the part program with TOOL DEF or separately in a tool table In a tool table you can also enter additional data on
281. rectory and can contain as many material names as you want see figure at upper right The name of the cutting material tyoe can have a max of 16 characters including spaces The TNC displays the NAME column when you are defining the tool cutting material in the TOOL T tool table E If you change the standard tool cutting material table you must copy it into a new directory Otherwise your changes will be overwritten during a software update by the HEIDENHAIN standard data Define the path in the TNC SYS file with the code word TMAT see Configuration File TNC SYS later in this chapter To avoid losing data save the TMAT TAB file at regular intervals Table for cutting data Define the workpiece material cutting material combinations with the corresponding cutting data in a file table with the file name extension CDT see figure at center right You can freely configure that entries in the cutting data table Besides the obligatory columns NR WMAT and TMAT the TNC can also manage up to four cutting speed Vc feed rate F combinations The standard cutting data table FRAES_2 CDT is stored in the directory TNC You can edit FRAES_2 CDT or add as many new cutting data tables as you wish es f you change the standard cutting data table you must copy it into a new directory Otherwise your changes will be overwritten during a software update by the HEIDEN HAIN standard data see Configuration File TNC SYS late
282. ress the soft key DEFINE MOUNT to enter the network setting for a specific device see figure at upper right You can define any number of network settings but you can manage only seven at one time ADDRESS Address of your server Input four decimal numbers separated by points Ask your network manager for the number of your address e g 160 1 13 4 RS Packet size in bytes for data reception Input range 512 to 4096 Input 0 The TNC uses the optimal packet size as reported by the server WS Packet size in bytes for data transmission Input range 512 to 4096 Input 0 The TNC uses the optimal packet size as reported by the server TIMEOUT Time in ms after which the TNC repeats a Remote Procedure Call Input range O to 100 000 Standard input 0 which corresponds to a TIMEOUT of 7 seconds Use higher values only if the TNC must communicate with the server through several routers Ask your network manager for the proper timeout setting HM Definition of whether the TNC should repeat the Remote Procedure Call until the NFS server answers 0 Always repeat the Remote Procedure Call 1 Do not repeat the Remote Procedure Call LE o 160 1 247 3 2 1 LINUX 2 So O O O O O O O O OO O O O O O O O O OOOO O Dl o O O O O O O O O O e lt oe am lt Ea rar LLI LO N q 12 BEGIN END PAGE PAGE INSERT DELETE NEXT tt J tf iji LINE LINE LINE DEVICENAME Name that the TNC shows
283. rogram Section Repeats Repeating a subprogram Example NC blocks Program execution 1st step Main program UPGREP is executed up to block 11 2nd step Subprogram 2 is called and executed 3rd step Program section between block 12 and block 10 is repeated twice This means that subprogram 2 is repeated twice Ath step Main program UPGREP is executed from block 13 to block 19 End of program HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 Beginning of the program section repeat Subprogram call The program section between this block and LBL1 block 10 is repeated twice Last program block of the main program with M2 Beginning of subprogram End of subprogram 245 O t J p L 9 6 Programming Examples Program sequence E Pre position the tool to the workpiece surface E Enter the infeed depth in incremental values E Mill the contour E Repeat downfeed and contourmilling N DA Define the tool Call the tool Retract the tool Pre position in the working plane Pre position to the workpiece surface Set label for program section repeat Infeed depth in incremental values in the open Approach contour Contour Depart contour Retract tool Return jump to LBL 1 section is repeated a total of 4 times Retract in the tool axis end program 9 Programming Subprograms and Program Section Repeats Program sequence m Approach the groups of holes in the main progra
284. s of measured position data You can then output the program to a PC for further processing with the SUSA evaluation software This evaluation software enables you to calculate male female transformations or correct the program to account for special tool shapes and radii that differ from the shape of the stylus tip If the tool has the same radius as the stylus tip you can run these programs immediately TT 120 tool touch probe for tool measurement The TT 120 is a triggering 3 D touch probe for tool measurement and inspection Your TNC provides three cycles for this touch probe with which you can measure the tool length and radius automatically either with the spindle rotating or stopped The TT 120 features a particularly rugged design and a high degree of protection which make it insensitive to coolants and swarf The triggering signal is generated by a wearresistant and highly reliable optical switch HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 11 1 5 Accessories HEIDENHAIN 3 D Touch Probes and Electronic andwa HR electronic handwheels Electronic handwheels facilitate moving the axis slides precisely by hand A wide range of traverses per handwheel revolution is available Apart from the HR 130 and HR 150 integral handwheels HEIDENHAIN also offers the HR 410 portable handwheel see figure at right c ale c O Sos J4 S se Lu c N 2 O oon 0 f Q m Z lt a LL A LLJ a
285. s the DEFINE NET soft key to enter the general network settings see figure at upper right and enter the following information ADDRESS Address that your network manager must assign to the TNC Input four decimal numbers separated by points e g 160 1 180 20 MASK The SUBNET MASK for expanding the number of available addresses within your network Input four decimal numbers separated by points Ask your network manager for the number of your address e g 255 255 0 0 ROUTER Internet address of your default router Enter the Internet address only if your network consists of several parts Input four decimal numbers separated by points Ask your network manager for the number of your subnet mask e g 160 2 0 2 PROT Definition of the transmission protocol RFC Transmission protocol according to RFC 894 IEEE Transmission protocol according to IEE 802 2 802 3 HW Definition of the connection used 10BASET for use of 10BaseT 10BASE2 for use of 10Base2 HOST Name under which the TNC identifies itself in the network If you are using a host name you must enter the Fully Qualified Hostname here If you do not enter a name here the TNC uses the so called null authentication The UID GID DCM and FCM settings specific to the device see next page are then ignored by the TNC S a lt Pw a jam lt co rar LLI LO N 306 12 MOD Functions Network settings specific to the device P
286. se graphic support during FK programming select the PGM GRAPHICS screen layout see 1 3 Modes of Operation Soft keys for selecting the screen layout Incomplete coordinate data often are not sufficient to fully define a workpiece contour In this case the TNC indicates the possible solutions in the FK graphic You can then select the contour that matches the drawing The FK graphic displays the elements of the workpiece contour in different colors White The contour element is fully defined Green The entered data describe a limited number of possible solutions select the correct one Red The entered data are not sufficient to determine the contour element enter further data If the entered data permit a limited number of possible solutions and the contour element is displayed in green select the correct contour element as follows Press the SHOW soft key repeatedly until the correct aaah contour element is displayed If the displayed contour element matches the elk drawing select the contour element with FSELECT 118 Programming and editing operation RND R2 5 FL AN 0 975 FCT DR R1 5 CCX CCY FLT AN 89 025 FCT DR R2 5 CLSD END PGM 35071 MM SHOW SELECT START END SINGLE SOLUTION SOLUTION m SELECT 6 Programming Programming Contours Select the green contour elements as soon as possible with the FSELECT soft key In this way you can reduce the ambiguity of subsequent eleme
287. se primarily in industrially zoned areas Contents HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 lanual Operation and Setup ositioning with Manual Data Input MDI rogramming Fundamentals of NC ile Management Programming Aids Programming Tool rogramming Programming Contours rogramming Miscellaneous Functions rogramming Cycles rogramming Subprograms and rogram Section Repeats rogramming O Parameters Test Run and Program Run Mop Functions lables and Overviews Contents 1 1The TNC 426 B the TNC 430 2 1 2 Visual Display Unit and Keyboard 3 1 3 Modes of Operation 5 1 4 Status Displays 7 1 5 Accessories HEIDENHAIN 3 DTouch Probes and Electronic Handwheels 11 2 1 Switch on Switch off 14 2 2 Moving the Machine Axes 15 2 3 Spindle Speed S Feed Rate F and Miscellaneous Functions M 17 2 4 Datum Setting Without a 3 DTouch Probe 18 2 5 Tilting theWorking Plane 19 3 1 Programming and Executing Simple Machining Operations 24 4 1 Fundamentals of NC 28 4 2 File Management Fundamentals 33 4 3 Standard File Management 34 4 4 File Management with Additional Functions 40 4 5 Creating andWriting Programs 53 4 6 Interactive Programming Graphics 57 4 7 Structuring Programs 58 4 8 Adding Comments 59 4 9 Creating Text Files 60 4 10 Integrated Pocket Calculator
288. see Chapter 12 8 Showing the Workpiece in the Working Space 7 Programming Miscellaneous functions Moving to position in an non tilted coordinate system with a tilted working plane M130 Standard behavior with a tilted working plane The TNC places the coordinates in the positioning blocks in the tilted coordinate system Behavior with M130 The TNC places coordinates in straight line blocks in the untilted coordinate system The TNC then positions the tilted tool to the programmed coordinates of the untilted system Effect M130 functions only in straight line blocks without tool radius compensationand in blocks in which M130 is programmed HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 137 7 3 Miscellaneous _ for Coordinate Data 7 4 Miscellaneous runc for Contouring Behavior 7 4 Miscellaneous Functions for Contouring Behavior Smoothing corners M90 Standard behavior The TNC stops the tool briefly in positioning blocks without tool radius compensation This is called an accurate stop In program blocks with radius compensation RR RL the TNC automatically inserts a transition arc at outside corners Behavior with M90 The tool moves at corners with constant speed This provides a smoother more continuous surface Machining time is also reduced See figure at center right Example application Surface consisting of a series of straight line segments Effect M90 is effective only in the blocks in
289. separated from the first contour point Pa by the distance LEN plus the tool radius Use any path function to approach the starting point Ps Initiate the dialog with the APPR DEP key and APPR LN soft key Coordinates of the first contour point Pa Length Distance to the auxiliary point P Always enter LEN as a positive value Radius compensation RR RL for machining Example NC blocks Approaching on a circular arc with tangential connection APPR CT The tool moves on a Straight line from the starting point Ps to an auxiliary point Py It then moves from Py to the first contour point Pa following a circular arc that is tangential to the first contour element The arc from Py to Pa is determined through the radius R and the center angle CCA The direction of rotation of the circular arc is automatically derived from the tool path for the first contour element Use any path function to approach the starting point Ps Initiate the dialog with the APPR DEP key and APPR CT soft key Coordinates of the first contour point Pa Radius R of the circular arc If the tool should approach the workpiece in the direction defined by the radius compensation Enter R as a positive value If the tool should approach the workpiece opposite to the radius compensation Enter R as a negative value Center angle CCA of the arc CCA can be entered only as a positive value Maximum input value 360 Radius compensation RR RL for machini
290. set M109 M110 Automatic compensation of machine geometry when working with tilted axes Reset M114 Feed rate for angular axes in mm min Reset M116 Superimpose handwheel positioning during program run Pre calculate radius compensated contour LOOK AHEAD Shorterpath traverse of rotary axes Reset M126 Maintain the position of the tool tip when positioning with tilted axes TCPM Reset M128 Moving to position in an untilted coordinate system with a tilted working plane Exact stop at nontangential contour transitions when positioning with rotary axes Reset M134 Laser cutting Output programmed voltage directly Laser cutting Output voltage as a function of distance Laser cutting Output voltage as a function of speed Laser cutting Output voltage as a function of time ramp Laser cutting Output voltage as a function of time pulse 135 135 135 135 135 135 135 153 138 135 135 145 139 140 153 77 141 330 77 142 146 144 143 142 144 147 137 148 149 Miscellaneous functions HEIDENHAIN DR JOHANNES HEIDENHAIN GmbH Dr Johannes Heldenhain Strafge 5 83301 Traunreut Germany 49 8669 31 0 49 8669 5061 E Mail info heidenhain de Technical support 49 8669 31 1000 E Mail service heidenhain de Measuring systems amp 49 8669 31 3104 E Mail service ms support heidenhain de TNC support gt 49 8669 31 3101 E Mail service nc support heidenhain de NC programmi
291. sfer Move the highlight up and down within a window Move the highlight from the left to the right window and vice versa If you are transferring from the TNC to the external medium move the highlight in the left window onto the file that is to be transferred 4 4 File Management with Additio If you are transferring from the external medium to the TNC move the highlight in the right window onto the file that is to be transferred Be Transfer a single file Press the COPY soft key or To transfer several files use the ig TAG soft key in the second soft key row see also Tagging functions earlier on in this chapter or TNC EXT transfer all files by pressing the TNC EXT soft D 0 key HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 49 4 4 File Management with A Functions Confirm with the EXECUTE or with the ENT key A status window appears on the TNC informing about the copying progress or If you wish to transfer more than one file or longer files press the PARALLEL EXECUTE soft key The TNC then copies the file in the background WINDOW To end data transfer move the highlight into left aE E window and then press the WINDOW soft key The standard file manager window is displayed again To select another directory press the PATH soft key and then select the desired directory using the arrow keys and the ENT key 50 4 Programming Fundamentals of NC File Management Programming Aids Pallet Management Cop
292. sferred to an L block To generate a separate L block press the ACTUALPOSITION CAPTURE soft key The axes are selected by bit oriented definition similar to programming the machine parameters Axis selection 11111 Transfer the X Y Z IV and V axes Axis selection 01111 Transfer the X Y Z IV axes Axis selection 00111 Transfer the X Y and Z axes Axis selection 00011 Transfer the X and Y Axis selection 00001 Transfer the X axis 12 13 Axis Traverse Limits Datum Display The AXIS LIMIT mod function allows you to set limits to axis traverse within the machine s actual working envelope Possible application to protect an indexing fixture against tool collision The maximum range of traverse of the machine tool is defined by software limit switches This range can be additionally limited through the AXIS LIMIT mod function With this function you can enter the maximum and minimum traverse positions for each axis referenced to the machine datum If several traverse ranges are possible on your machine you can set the limits for each range separately using the soft keys LIMIT SWITCH 1 to LIMIT SWITCH 3 314 12 MOD Functions Working without additional traverse limits To allow a machine axis to use its full range of traverse enter the maximum traverse of the TNC 99999 mm as the AXIS LIMIT To find and enter the maximum traverse Set the Position display mod function to REF Move the spindle to
293. stablish the network connection but had to correct settings in order to do so Error messages are indicated with E Error messages occur when the TNC was unable to establish a network connection LL W CONNECTION xxxxx UNKNOWN USING DEFAULT 10BASET LL E PROTOCOL xxxxx UNKNOWN IP4 E INTERFACE NOT PRESENT IP4 E INTERNETADDRESS NOT VALID IP4 E SUBNETMASK NOT VALID IP4 E SUBNETMASK OR HOST ID NOT VALID IP4 E SUBNETMASK OR SUBNET ID NOT VALID IP4 E DEFAULTROUTERADRESS NOT VALID IP4 E CAN NOT USE DEFAULTROUTER IP4 E LAM NOT A ROUTER MOUNT lt Device name gt E DEVICENAME NOT VALID MOUNT lt device name gt E DEVICENAME ALREADY ASSIGNED MOUNT lt Device name gt E DEVICETABLE OVERFLOW NFS2 lt Device name gt W READSIZE SMALLER THEN x SET TO x NFS2 lt Device name gt W READSIZE LARGER THEN x SET TO x HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 The name you entered in DEFINE NET HW was incorrect The name you entered in DEFINE NET PROT was incorrect The TNC was unable to find an Ethernet card You used an invalid Internet address for the TNG The SUBNET MASK does not match the Internet address of the TNC You used an invalid Internet address for the TNC or you entered an incorrect SUBNET MASK or you set all of the HostID bits to O 1 All bits of the SUBNET ID are O or 1 You used an invalid Internet address for the router The default router does not have the same net ID or subnet ID
294. t tT eve SELECT or Select a file Press the SELECT soft key or ENT HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 37 J c O c 4 3 Standard Renaming a file Calling the file manager Use the arrow keys to move the highlight to the file you wish to rename Move the highlight up or down RENAME apd xv2 To rename the file press the RENAME key Enter the name of the new file and confirm your entry with the ENT key or EXECUTE soft key Convert an FK program into HEIDENHAIN conversational format Calling the file manager Use the arrow keys to move the highlight to the file you wish to convert Move the highlight up or down CONVERT Press the CONVERT FK gt H FK gt H to select the convert function Enter the name of the new file and confirm your entry with the ENT key or EXECUTE soft key 128 8 4 Programming Fundamentals of NC File Management Programming Aids Pallet Management Protect file Cancel file protection Calling the file manager Use the arrow keys to move the highlight to the file you wish to protect or whose protection you wish to cancel Move the highlight up or down Press the PROTECT soft key to enable file Li protection The file now has status P or SEEE To cancel file protection press the UNPROTECT N soft key The P status is canceled HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 39 q4 a O c 4
295. t ON M14 Spindle ON counterclockwise Block start Coolant ON M30 Same as M02 Block end 73 Miscellaneous Functions for Coordinate Data Programming machine referenced coordinates M91 M92 Scale reference point On the scale a reference mark indicates the position of the scale reference point Machine datum The machine datum is required for the following tasks Defining the limits of traverse software limit switches Moving to machine referenced positions such as tool change positions Setting the workpiece datum HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 hA Mi YA X Z Y 135 te Data ina rol Spindle and Coolant for Coord ions funct 7 3 Miscellaneous 7 2 Miscellaneous functions for Program Run te Data ina for Coord 7 3 Miscellaneous Ful The distance in each axis from the scale reference point to the machine datum is defined by the machine tool builder in a machine parameter Standard behavior The TNC references coordinates to the workpiece datum see Datum setting Behavior with M91 Machine datum If you want the coordinates in a positioning block to be referenced to the machine datum end the block with M91 The coordinate values on the TNC screen are referenced to the machine datum Switch the display of coordinates in the status display to REF see section 1 4 Status Displays Behavior with M92 Additional machine datum 7
296. t coordinate for the X axis 5 Enter the target coordinate for the Y axis and go to the next question with ENT Enter No radius compensation and go to the next question with ENT 100 Enter a feed rate of 100 mm min for this path contour go to the next question with ENT Enter the miscellaneous function M3 spindle ON pressing the ENT key will terminate this dialog i The program blocks window will display the following line HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 Program begin name unit of measure Tool axis MIN point coordinates MAX point coordinates Program end name unit of measure Positioning Programming and editing nith mdi Miscellaneous function M BLK FORM 1 Z X Y 0 2 40 BLK FORM 2 X 100 Y 100 2 TOOL CALL 1 Z 3500 DL 1 DR 1 L Z 250 R F MAX L X 20 Y 5 R F MAX END PGM NEU MM 4 5 Creating and Ignore the dialog question End the dialog immediately E Abort the dialog and erase the block Rapid traverse F MAX Traverse feed rate automatically calculated in TOOL CALL block aii 55 N re O pe A O 4 5 Creating and Editing program lines While you are creating or editing a part program you can select any desired line in the program or individual words in a block with the arrow keys or the soft keys see table at right Looking for the same words in different blocks Set the AUTO DRAW soft key to OFF To select a word in a block
297. tables 7 The behavior of the TNC during datum setting depends Son the machine Your machine manual provides more detailed information The TNC automatically shifts the datum if you rotate the table and the tilted working plane function is active MP 7500 bit 3 0 To calculate the datum the TNC uses the difference between the REF coordinate during datum setting and the REF coordinate of the tilting axis after tilting The method of calculation is to be used when you have clamped your workpiece in proper alignment when the rotary table is in the 0 position REF value MP 7500 bit 3 1 If you rotate the table to align a workpiece that has been clamped in an unaligned position the TNC must no longer calculate the offset of the datum from the difference of the REF coordinates Instead of the difference from the 0 position the TNC uses the REF value of the tilting table after tilting In other words it assumes that you have properly aligned the workpiece before tilting HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 Position display in a tilted system The positions displayed in the status window ACTL and NOML are referenced to the tilted coordinate system Limitations on working with the tilting function The touch probe function Basic Rotation cannot be used PLC positioning determined by the machine tool builder is not possible Positioning blocks with M91 M92 are not permitted 21 2 5 Tilting the wona ii en To
298. tain file types MP7224 1 Do not disable editor 0 Disable editor for HEIDENHAIN programs 1 ISO programs 2 Tool table 4 Datum tables 8 Pallet tables 16 Text files 32 Pallet tables 64 Ys If a particular file type is inhibited the TNC will erase all files of this type e ad aos 0 Sus e mD C Som c g ae m Configure pallet files MP7226 0 Pallet table inactive 0 Number of pallets per pallet table 1 to 255 Configure datum files MP7226 1 Datum table inactive 0 Number of datums per datum table 1 to 255 Program length for program check MP7229 0 Blocks 100 to 9 999 Program length up to which FK blocks are permitted MP7229 1 Blocks 100 to 9 999 Dialog language MP7230 English 0 Swedish 7 German 1 Danish 8 Czech 2 Finnish 9 French 3 Dutch 10 Italian 4 Polish 11 Spanish 5 Hungarian 12 Portuguese 6 324 13 Tables and Overviews Internal clock of the TNC MP7235 Universal time Greenwich Mean Time 0 Central European Time CET 1 Central European Summertime 2 Time difference to universal time 23 to 23 hours Configure tool tables MP7260 Inactive 0 Number of tools generated by the TNC when a new tool table is opened 1 to 254 If you require more than 254 tools you can expand the tool table with the function APPEND N LINES see also 5 2 Tool Data Configure pocket tables MP7261 Inactive 0 Number of pockets per pocket tab
299. tapping 164 with a floating tap holder 163 Teach in 103 Test run execution 290 overview 289 up to a defined block 290 Text Tiles editing functions 60 erasing functions 61 exiting 60 finding text sections 62 opening 60 Thread cutting 165 Tilting axes 146 Tilting the working plane 19 228 Tilting the working plane 19 cycle 228 manual 19 procedure 231 TNC 426 B TNC 430 2 TNCremo 302 Tool change 77 automatic 77 Tool compensation length 78 radius 79 three dimensional 82 Tool cutting material 86 Tool data calling 76 delta values 70 entering into tables 71 entering into the program 70 Index Tool length 69 Universal drilling 159 Tool measurement 72 User parameters 309 Tool movements general programming 55 for 3 D touch probes and Toolnane 89 digitizing 318 Tor namber Go i als data transfer Tool radius 70 _ for machining and program Tool table run 327 available input data 71 editing 73 editing functions 74 for TNC displays TNC editor 321 machine specific 309 leaving 73 Tool type selecting 72 Traversing the reference points 14 Trigonometric functions 257 Trigonometry 257 HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 Visual display unit 3 WMAT TAB 85 Working space monitoring 290 309 Workpiece positions absolute 31 incremental 31 relative 31 Index MOO M02 M03 M04 M05 M06 M08 M09 M13 M14 M30 M89 M90 M91 M92 M94 M97 M98 M99 M101 M102 M103 M105 M106 M107 M108 M109
300. te F If you enter F 0 then the lowest feed rate from MP1020 is effective F is not lost during a power interruption Changing the spindle speed and feed rate With the override knobs you can vary the spindle speed S and feed rate F from 0 to 150 of the set value s Ihe knob for spindle speed override is effective only on machines with an infinitely variable spindle drive The machine tool builder determines which miscellaneous functions M are available on your TNC and what effects they have 2 4 Datum Setting Without a 3 D Touch Probe For datum setting with a 3 D touch probe refer to the new Touch Probe Cycles Manual You fix a datum by setting the TNC position display to the coordinates of a known position on the workpiece Preparation Clamp and align the workpiece Insert the zero tool with known radius into the spindle Ensure that the TNC is showing the actual position values 2 Manual Operation and Setup Datum setting Fragile workpiece If the workpiece surface must not be scratched you can lay a metal shim of know thickness d on it Then enter a tool axis datum value that is larger than the desired datum by the value d D Select the Manual Operation mode Y Move the tool slowly until it touches the workpiece surface z Select an axis all axes can also be selected via the ASCII keyboard o TE Zero tool in spindle axis Set the display to a known workpiece position here 0 o
301. te operation of the TNC through the data interface with HEIDENHAIN software TNCremo Straight lines up to 5 axis Export versions TNC 426 CF TNC 426 PF TNC 430 CE TNC 430 PE 4 axes Circles up to 3 axes with tilted working plane Helixes 3 axes 3 D surfaces Collision prevention with the SL cycle for open contours Geometry precalculation of radius compensated positions for feed rate adaptation Interactive programming graphics Test run graphics Program run graphics HEIDENHAIN conversational programming ISO programming Tool tables Cutting data tables Datum tables Point tables Pallet files Text files 337 c a O i co D mM m q Program memory Hard disk with 1500 MB for NC programs No limit on number of files Tool definitions Up to 254 tools in the program or any number in tables Programming support Functions for approaching and departing the contour On screen pocket calculator Structuring long programs Comment blocks Direct help on output error messages context sensitive Programmable functions Contour elements Straight line Chamfer Circular arc Circle center Circle radius Tangentially connecting circle Corner rounding Straight lines and circular arcs for contour approach and departure B spline c a O O 2 Lam E D M m FK free contour programming For all contour elements not dimensioned for conventional NC progra
302. ted by the NC 1 HR 130 without additional keys 2 HR 330 with additional keys the handwheel keys for traverse direction and rapid traverse are evaluated by the PLC 3 HR 332 with twelve additional keys 4 Multi axis handwheel with additional keys 5 HR 410 with auxiliary functions 6 Interpolation factor MP7641 Interpolation factor is entered on the keyboard 0 Interpolation factor is set by the PLC 1 e lt q4 lt 0 Sums 7o _ Sou g m Machine parameters that can be set for the handwheel by the machine tool builder MP 7645 0 0 to 255 MP 7645 1 0 to 255 MP 7645 2 0 to 255 MP 7645 3 0 to 255 MP 7645 4 0 to 255 MP 7645 5 0 to 255 MP 7645 6 0 to 255 MP 7645 7 0 to 255 332 13 Tables and Overviews 13 2 Pin Layout and Connecting Cable for the Data Interfaces RS 232 C V 24 Interface HEIDENHAIN devices HEIDENHAIN devices External HEIDENHAIN RS 422 Adapter HEIDENHAIN device standard cable block connecting cable 3m max 17 m e g FE E a a ET Id Nr 274 545 01 Id Nr 239 758 01 Id Nr 239 760 Chassis Receive Data Transmit Data Clear To Send Request To Send Data Terminal Ready Signal Ground ONOoaRWN gt ONOoa1wRWHN gt o N ogogoGAaAUN gt ONoOoOnaRWHN gt rp S e bh J J OA a om dad aa 2 Q O 1 2 d 3 D A f am 5 6 e 7 Q A OT f am a DSR Data Set
303. ter the feed rate directly or allow the TNC to calculate the feed rate if you are working with cutting data tables Press the F CALCULATE AUTO MAT soft key The TNC limits the feed rate to the maximum feed rate of the longest axis set in MP 1010 F is effective until you program a new feed rate in a positioning block or a TOOL CALL block Tool length oversize Enter the delta value for the tool length Tool radius oversize Enter the delta value for the tool radius Tool radius oversize 2 Enter the delta value for the tool radius 2 Example Call tool number 5 in the tool axis Z with a spindle speed 2500 rpm and a feed rate of 350 mm min The tool length is to be programmed with an oversize of 0 2 mm the tool radius 2 with an oversize of 0 05 mm and the tool radius with an undersize of 1 MM The character D preceding L and R designates delta values Tool preselection with tool tables If you are working with tool tables use TOOL DEF to preselect the next tool Simply enter the tool number or a corresponding Q parameter or type the tool name in quotation marks 76 5 Programming Tools Tool change 7 The tool change function can vary depending on the lt individual machine tool Refer to your machine tool manual Tool change position A tool change position must be approachable without collision With the miscellaneous functions M91 and M92 you can enter machine referenced rather than workpiece referen
304. th L from the TOOL DEF block or tool table DLooLcaL is the oversize for length DL in the TOOL CALL block not taken into account by the position display DLiap is the oversize for length DL in the tool table 78 5 Programming Tools Tool radius compensation The NC block for programming a tool movement contains m RL or RR for compensation in the tool radius m R or R for radius compensation in single axis movements m RO if no radius compensation is required Radius compensation becomes effective as soon as a tool is called and is moved in the working plane with RL or RR For tool radius compensation the TNC takes the delta values from both the TOOL CALL block and the tool table into account Compensation value R DRroot cat DRtag where R is the tool radius R from the TOOL DEF block or tool table DRrooicat is the oversize for radius DR in the TOOL CALL block not taken into account by the position display DRrap is the oversize for radius DR in the tool table Tool movements without radius compensation RO The tool center moves in the working plane to the programmed path or coordinates Applications Drilling and boring pre positioning see figure at right Tool movements with radius compensation RR and RL RR The tool moves to the right of the programmed contour RL The tool moves to the left of the programmed contour The tool center moves along the contour at a distance equal to the radius Right or
305. th defined radius 106 Circular path CT with tangential connection 107 Corner Rounding RND 108 Example Linear movements and chamfers with Cartesian coordinates 109 Example Circular movements with Cartesian coordinates 110 Example Full circle with Cartesian coordinates 111 HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 Contents Contents 6 5 Path Contours Polar Coordinates 112 Polar coordinate origin Pole CC 112 Straight line LP 113 Circular path CP around pole CC 113 Circular path CTP with tangential connection 114 Helical interpolation 114 Example Linear movement with polar coordinates 116 Example Helix 117 6 6 Path Contours FK Free Contour Programming 118 Fundamentals 118 Graphics during FK programming 118 Initiating the FK dialog 119 Free programming of straight lines 120 Free programming of circular arcs 120 Auxiliary points 122 Relative data 123 Closed contours 125 Converting FK programs 125 Example FK programming 1 126 Example FK programming 2 127 Example FK programming 3 128 6 7 Path Contours Spline Interpolation 130 Contents 7 1 Entering Miscellaneous Functions M and STOP 134 7 2 Miscellaneous Functions for Program Run Control Spindle and Coolant 135 7 3 Miscellaneous Functions for Coordinate Data 135 7 4 Miscellaneous Functions for Con
306. than tool axis coordinate of point p for slightly inclined surfaces a drawing cut tool axis coordinate of point 1 less than tool axis coordinate of point 2 for steep surfaces When milling twisted surfaces program the main cutting direction from point Hi to point 2 parallel to the direction of the steeper inclination See figure at center right If you are using a spherical cutter for the machining operation you can optimize the surface finish in the following way When milling twisted surfaces program the main cutting direction from point li to point 2 perpendicular to the direction of the steeper inclination See figure at lower right 216 8 Programming Cycles E Before programming note the following From the current position the TNC positions the tool in a linear 3 D movement to the starting point 1 Pre position the tool in such a way that no collision between tool and clamping devices can occur The TNC moves the tool with radius compensation RO to the programmed positions If required use a centercut end mill ISO 1641 a Starting point in 1st axis Q225 absolute value eV Starting point coordinate of the surface to be multipass milled in the main axis of the working plane Starting point in 2nd axis Q226 absolute value Starting point coordinate of the surface to be multipass milled in the secondary axis of the working plane Starting point in 3rd axis Q227 a
307. the largest MAX point If a graphic display is magnified this is indicates with MAGN at the lower right of the graphics window If the workpiece blank cannot be further enlarged or reduced the TNC displays an error message in the graphics window To clear the error message enlarge or reduce the workpiece blank HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 287 N i Q Q N Q Q Repeating graphic simulation A part program can be graphically simulated as often as desired either with the complete workpiece or with a detail of it Restore workpiece blank to the detail Ty magnification in which it was last shown FORM Reset detail magnification so that the machined TA workpiece or workpiece blank is displayed as it FORM was programmed with BLK FORM With the WINDOW BLK FORM soft key you return the displayed workpiece blank to its originally programmed dimensions even after isolating a detail without TRANSFER DETAIL Program run modes of operation The timer counts and displays the time from program start to program end The timer stops whenever machining is interrupted BEGIN PGM 3DJOINT MM BLK FORM 0 1 Z X 0 Y 0 2 52 BLK FORM 0 2 X 100 Y 100 2 0 TOOL DEF 1 L R 10 TOOL CALL 1 2 L 2 20 RO F MAK MG CYCL DEF 7 0 DATUM SHIFT CYCL DEF 7 1 K 18 CALL LBL 1 CYCL DEF 7 0 DATUM SHIFT CYCL DEF 7 1 K CALL LBL 1 CYCL DEF 7 0 DATUM SHIFT To activate the stopwatch
308. the 3D ROT soft key to set the function TILT WORKING PLANE to ACTIVE in the Manual Operation mode Enter the angular values for the tilt axes into the menu if the axes are not controlled If the axes are not controlled the angular values entered in the menu must correspond to the actual position s of the tilted axis or axes respectively The TNC will otherwise calculate a wrong datum HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 231 8 7 i Transformation Cycles 8 7 Transformation Cycles 5 Setting the datum Manually by touching the workpiece with the tool in the non tilted coordinate system see section 2 4 Setting the Datum Without a 3 D Touch Probe Automatically by using a HEIDENHAIN 3 D touch probe see the new Touch Probe Cycles Manual chapter 2 6 Start the part program in the operating mode Program Run Full Sequence 7 Manual Operation mode Use the 3D ROT soft key to set the function TILT WORKING PLANE to INACTIVE Enter an angular value of 0 for each axis in the menu see section 2 5 Tilting the Working Plane 232 8 Programming Cycles main program E Program the machining operation in subprogram 1 see section 9 Programming Subprograms and Program Section Repeats L m J m Z L J gt Z Z O INS NO O U Z O D Ww O 130 65 65 130 Define the workpiece blank Define the tool Call the tool Retract the tool Shift datum to center Call mi
309. the position display in the additional status display 12 10 Unit of Measurement This MOD function determines whether the coordinates are displayed in millimeters metric system or Inches To select the metric system e g X 15 789 mm set the Change mm inches function to mm The value is displayed with 3 digits after the decimal point To select the inch system e g X 0 6216 inch set the Change mm inches function to inches The value is displayed to 4 decimal places If you would like to activate the inch display the TNC shows the feed rate in inch min In an inch program you must enter the feed rate large by a factor of 10 HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 ACTL LAG ri 313 lay Types 12 10 Unit of Measurement isp D c 2 ing L Blocks ts Datum Display imi the Axis for Generat ing 12 13 Axis Traverse L 2 12 Select 12 11 Programming Language for SMDI 1 12 11 Programming Language for MDI The Program input mod function lets you decide whether to program the MDI file in HEIDENHAIN conversational dialog or in ISO format To program the MDI H file in conversational dialog set the Program input function to HEIDENHAIN To program the MDI I file according to ISO set the Program input function to ISO 12 12 Selecting the Axes for Generating L Blocks The axis selection input field enables you to define the current tool position coordinates that are tran
310. the positive and negative end positions of the X Y and Z axes Write down the values including the algebraic sign To select the MOD functions press the MOD key Enter the limits for axis traverse Press the LIMIT ill SWITCH soft key and enter the values that you wrote down as limits in the corresponding axes To exit the MOD function press the END soft key I The tool radius is not automatically compensated in the axis traverse limit value The traverse range limits and software limit switches become active as soon as the reference points are traversed Datum display The values shown at the lower left of the screen are the manually set datums referenced to the machine datum They cannot be changed in the menu 12 14 Displaying HELP files Help files can aid you in situations in which you need clear instructions before you can continue for example to retract the tool after an interruption of power The miscellaneous functions may also be explained in a help file The figure at right shows the screen display of a help file 7 HELP files are not provided on every machine Refer to 2 your machine tool builder for more information Selecting HELP files Select the MOD function Press the MOD key To select the last active HELP file press the HELP soft key Call the file manager PGM MGT key and select a different help file if necessary HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 Manual operation and editing Datum po
311. then outputs the file PROT1 TXT through the serial interface I If you use FN 16 several times in the program the TNC saves all texts in the file that you have defined with the first FN 16 function The file is not output until the TNC reads the END PGM block or you press the NC stop button 10 Programming Q Parameters FN18 SYS DATUM READ Read system data With the function FN 18 SYS DATUM READ you can read system data and store them in O parameters You select the system data through a group number ID number and additionally through a number and an index Program information 10 1 J Machine status 20 1 Co Cycle parameter 30 CO NIO OI AI WI NM gt l A a ee Ss A a j O 0l AIOI NM gt 00 HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 MM inch condition Overlap factor for pocket milling Number of active fixed cycle Active tool number Prepared tool number Active tool axis Dax 127 222 0 U 73V W Programmed spindle rom Active spindle status 1 undefined 0 M3 active 1 M4 active 2 Mb5 after M3 3 Mb5 after M4 Coolant status O off 1 0n Active feed rate Setup clearance of active fixed cycle Drilling depth milling depth of active fixed cycle Plunging depth of active fixed cycle Feed rate for pecking in active fixed cycle 1st side length for rectangular pocket cycle 2nd side length for rectangular pocket cycle 1st side length for slot cycle 2nd side len
312. tion M Full circle For a full circle program two CR blocks in succession The end point of the first semicircle is the starting point of the second The end point of the second semicircle is the starting point of the first See figure at upper right Central angle CCA and arc radius R The starting and end points on the contour can be connected with four arcs of the same radius Smaller arc CCA lt 180 Enter the radius with a positive sign R gt 0 Larger arc CCA gt 180 Enter the radius with a negative sign R lt 0 The direction of rotation determines whether the arc is curving outward convex or curving Inward concave Convex Direction of rotation DR with radius compensation RL Concave Direction of rotation DR with radius compensation RL Example NC blocks See figures at middle and lower right O O r Please observe the notes on the next page 06 6 Programming Programming Contours I The distance from the starting and end points of the arc diameter cannot be greater than the diameter of the arc The maximum possible radius is 99 9999 m You can also enter rotary axes A B and C Circular path CT with tangential connection The tool moves on an arc that starts at a tangent with the previously programmed contour element A transition between two contour elements is called tangential when there is no kink or corner at the intersection be
313. tions the tool in the tool axis at rapid traverse FMAX to set up clearance above the workpiece surface 2 The tool drills to the first plunging depth at the programmed feed rate F 3 The TNC returns the tool at FMAX to the setup clearance dwells there if a dwell time was entered and then moves at FMAX to the setup clearance above the first plunging depth 4 The tool then drills deeper by the plunging depth at the programmed feed rate F 5 The TNC repeats this process 2 to 4 until the programmed total hole depth is reached 6 At the hole bottom the tool is retraced to set up clearance or If programmed to the 2nd set up clearance in rapid traverse FMAX f Before programming note the following Program a positioning block for the starting point hole center in the working plane with RADIUS COMPENSATION RO The algebraic sign for the depth parameter determines the working direction Set up clearance Q200 incremental value Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface Enter a positive value N m Ns Depth Q201 incremental value Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of hole tip of drill taper Feed rate for plunging Q206 Traversing speed of the tool during drilling in mm min Plunging depth Q202 incremental value Infeed per cut The TNC will go to depth in one movement if the plunging depth is equal to the depth the plunging depth is greater than the depth The depth does not
314. to be less than the diameter of the finished part Finished part dia Q223 Diameter of the finished pocket Enter the diameter of the finished part to be greater than the workpiece blank diameter CIRCULAR STUD FINISHING Cycle 215 1 The TNC automatically moves the tool in the tool axis to set up clearance or if programmed to the 2nd set up clearance and subsequently to the center of the stud 2 From the stud center the tool moves in the working plane to the Starting point for machining The starting point lies to the right of the stud by a distance approx 3 5 times the tool radius 3 If the tool is at the 2nd set up clearance it moves in rapid traverse FMAX to set up clearance and from there advances to the first plunging depth at the feed rate for plunging 4 The tool then moves tangentially to the contour of the finished part and using climb milling machines one revolution 5 After this the tool departs the contour tangentially and returns to the starting point in the working plane 6 This process 3 to 5 is repeated until the programmed depth is reached 7 At the end of the cycle the TNC retracts the tool in FMAX to set up clearance or If programmed to the 2nd set up clearance and finally to the center of the pocket end position starting position 176 8 Programming Cycles Before programming note the following The algebraic sign for the depth parameter det
315. to move 350 0000 the machine axes manually with the HR electronic handwheel l A 0 0000 B 180 0000 Soft keys for selecting the screen layout C 90 0000 select as described previously Positions o l POSITION Left positions Right status display ne S F Touch DATUM INCRE 3D ROT s MENT PROBE SET OEA ON R TABLE HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 5 Pada aeia temic a iain e This mode of operation is used for programming simple traversing BEGIN PGM MDI MM movements such as for face milling or pre positioning You can also 1 CYCL DEF 204 COUNTERBORE BACK define point tables for setting the digitizing range in this mode 0 0000 Q20G 2 SET UP CLEARANCE 0 0000 Q249 5 sDEPTH OF COUNTERBORE 0 000A 0 0000 0 0000 0250 20 MATERIAL THICKNESS Soft keys for selecting the screen layout 9251 3 5 sOFF CENTER DISTANCE Q252 15 TOOL EDGE HIGHT A 0 0000 A 2 Ie B 180 0000 0254 200 F COUNTERBORING Basic rotation 12 3570 Program OO 150 0000 Y 50 0000 Z 100 000 PGM A 0 000 B 180 9008 C 90 0000 Left program blocks right status display Pane KAT ao STATUS STATUS STATUS Alila Deh piit TOOL PGM POS TOOL TRANSF PROBE TABLE In this mode of operation you can write your part programs The FK free programming feature the various cycles and the Q parameter manual a and a functions help you with programming and add necessary operat ion information If desired you can have t
316. touring Behavior 138 Smoothing corners M90 138 Insert rounding arc between straight lines M112 139 Machining small contour steps M97 139 Machining open contours M98 140 Feed rate factor for plunging movements M103 141 Feed rate at circular arcs M109 M110 M 111 142 Calculating the radius compensated path in advance LOOK AHEAD M120 142 Superimposing handwheel positioning during program run M118 143 7 5 Miscellaneous Functions for Rotary Axes 144 Feed rate in mm min on rotary axes A B C M116 144 Shorter path traverse of rotary axes M126 144 Reducing display of a rotary axis to a value less than 360 M94 145 Automatic compensation of machine geometry when working with tilted axes M114 146 Maintaining the position of the tool tip when positioning with tilted axes TCPM M128 147 Exact stop at corners with nontangential transitions M134 148 7 6 Miscellaneous Functions for Laser Cutting Machines 149 HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 Vil Contents Contents Vill 8 1 General Information on Cycles 152 8 2 Drilling Cycles 154 PECKING Cycle 1 154 DRILLING Cycle 200 156 REAMING Cycle 201 157 BORING Cycle 202 158 UNIVERSAL DRILLING Cycle 203 159 BACK BORING Cycle 204 161 TAPPING with a floating tap holder Cycle 2 163 RIGIDTAPPING Cycle 17 164 THREAD CUTTING
317. tum All of the position values shown in the additional status display are referenced to the manually set datum 220 8 Programming Cycles DATUM SHIFT with datum tables Cycle 7 CEP If you are using the interactive programming graphics with the datum tables you must select the desired datum table status S in the TEST RUN mode of operation before starting the programming graphics If you are working with only one datum table be sure to activate the correct datum in the program run modes of operation Datums from a datum table can be referenced either to the current datum or to the machine datum depending on machine parameter 7475 The coordinate values from datum tables are only effective with absolute coordinate values New lines can only be inserted at the end of the table Application Datum tables are used for frequently recurring machining sequences at various locations on the workpiece frequent use of the same datum shift Within a program you can either program datum points directly in the cycle definition or call them from a datum table Datum shift Enter the number of the datum from the datum table or a Q parameter If you enter a Q parameter the TNC activates the datum number found in the Q parameter Example NC blocks Cancellation Call a datum shift to the coordinates X 0 Y 0 etc from a datum table Execute a datum shift to the coordinates X 0 Y 0
318. tum 0 Display new BLK FORM in Cycle 7 DATUM SHIFT referenced to the new datum 4 Do not show cursor position during projection in three planes 0 Show cursor position during projection in three planes 8 Graphic simulation without programmed tool axis Tool radius MP7315 0 to 99 999 9999 mm Graphic simulation without programmed tool axis Penetration depth MP7316 0 to 99 999 9999 mm Graphic simulation without programmed tool axis M function for start MP7317 0 0 to 88 0 Function inactive Graphic simulation without programmed tool axis M function for end MP7317 1 0 to 88 0 Function inactive Screen saver Enter the time after which the TNC should start the screen saver MP7392 0 to 99 min 0 Function inactive Machining and program run Cycle 17 Oriented spindle stop at beginning of cycle MP7160 Oriented spindle stop 0 No oriented spindle stop 1 Effect of Cycle 11 SCALING FACTOR MP7410 SCALING FACTOR effective in 3 axes 0 SCALING FACTOR effective in the working plane only 1 Tool data in programmable probe cycle TOUCH PROBE 0 MP7411 Overwrite current tool data by the calibrated data from the 3 D touch probe system 0 Current tool data are retained 1 HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 e aa 4 S 0 Ss e _ So c g am m q e q4 lt 0 Sums e _ Sou Lam g ae m SL Cycles MP7420 Mill
319. tween the two contours the transition is smooth The contour element to which the tangential arc connects must be programmed immediately before the CT block This requires at least two positioning blocks yi Enter the coordinates of the arc end point Further entries if necessary Feed rate F Miscellaneous function M Example NC blocks A tangential arc is a two dimensional operation the coordinates in the CT block and in the contour element preceding it must be in the same plane of the arc HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 107 6 4 Path Contours _ Coordinates 6 4 Path Contours BP ian Coordinates Corner Rounding RND The RND function is used for rounding off corners The tool moves on an arc that is tangentially connected to both the preceding and subsequent contour elements The rounding arc must be large enough to accommodate the tool Rounding off radius Enter the radius of the arc Further entries if necessary Feed rate F only effective in RND block Example NC blocks Ya In the preceding and subsequent contour elements both coordinates must lie in the plane of the rounding arc If you machine the contour without tool radius compensation you must program both coordinates in the working plane The corner point is cut off by the rounding arc and is not part of the contour A feed rate programmed in the RND block is effective only in that block After the RND block the previous fee
320. ubprogram 1 for the entire hole pattern End of main program Beginning of subprogram 1 Entire hole pattern Move to starting point for group 1 Call subprogram 2 for the group Move to starting point for group 2 Call subprogram 2 for the group Move to starting point for group 3 Call subprogram 2 for the group End of subprogram 1 Beginning of subprogram 2 Group of holes 1st hole with active fixed cycle Move to 2nd hole call cycle Move to 3rd hole call cycle Move to 4th hole call cycle End of subprogram 2 249 9 6 Programming Examples 10 1 Principle and Overview 10 1 Principle and Overview You can program an entire family of parts in a single part program You do this by entering variables called O parameters instead of fixed numerical values Q parameters can represent information such as Coordinate values Feed rates RPM Cycle data Q parameters also enable you to program contours that are defined through mathematical functions You can also use O parameters to make the execution of machining steps depend on logical conditions In conjunction with FK programming you can also combine contours that do not have NC compatible dimensions with Q parameters Q parameters are designated by the letter Q and a number between O and 299 They are grouped according to three ranges Freely applicable parameters global QO to 099 for all programs in the TNC memory Parameters for special TNC functions Q100 to Q199
321. ue Value by which the TNC decreases the plunging depth after each infeed Nr of breaks before retracting Q213 Number of chip breaks after which the TNC is to withdraw the tool from the hole for chip release For chip breaking the TNC retracts the tool each time by the setup clearance Q200 Minimum plunging depth Q205 incremental value If you have entered a decrement the TNC limits the plunging depth to the value entered with Q205 Dwell time at depth Q211 Time in seconds that the tool remains at the hole bottom Retraction feed rate Q208 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min when retracting from the hole If you enter Q208 0 the tool retracts at the feed rate in Q206 160 8 Programming Cycles BACK BORING Cycle 204 This cycle allows holes to be bored from the underside of the workpiece 1 The TNC positions the tool in the tool axis at rapid traverse FMAX to set up clearance above the workpiece surface 2 The TNC then orients the spindle to the 0 position with an oriented spindle stop and displaces the tool by the off center distance 3 The tool is then plunged into the already bored hole at the feed rate for pre positioning until the tooth has reached set up clearance on the underside of the workpiece 4 The TNC then centers the tool again over the bore hole switches on the spindle and the coolant and moves at the feed rate for boring to the depth of bore 5 If
322. ue greater than 0 Feed rate for milling Q207 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min while milling Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute value Coordinate of the workpiece surface 2nd set up clearance Q204 incremental value Coordinate in the tool axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece clamping devices can occur illing Pockets Studs and Slots Center in 1st axis Q216 absolute value Center of the pocket in the main axis of the working plane Center in 2nd axis Q217 absolute value Center of the pocket In the secondary axis of the working plane First side length Q218 incremental value Pocket length parallel to the main axis of the working plane Second side length Q219 incremental value Pocket length parallel to the secondary axis of the working plane Corner radius Q220 Radius of the pocket corner If you make no entry here the TNC assumes that the corner radius is equal to the tool radius Q216 Q221 Allowance in 1st axis Q221 incremental value Allowance in the main axis of the working plane referenced to the length of the pocket HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 e ma op c e a v m ma ae S O 0 O STUD FINISHING Cycle 213 1 The TNC moves the tool in the tool axis to set up clearance or if programmed to the 2nd set up clearance and subsequently to the center of the
323. ughing finishing cycle with automatic pre positioning and reciprocating plunge cut 168 8 Programming Cycles POCKET MILLING Cycle 4 1 The tool penetrates the workpiece at the starting position pocket center and advances to the first plunging depth 2 The cutter begins milling in the positive axis direction of the longer side on square pockets always starting in the positive Y direction and then roughs out the pocket from the inside out 3 This process 1 to 2 is repeated until the depth is reached 4 At the end of the cycle the TNC retracts the tool to the starting position Before programming note the following Program a positioning block for the starting point pocket center in the working plane with RADIUS COMPENSATION RO Program a positioning block for the starting point in the tool axis set up clearance above the workpiece surface The algebraic sign for the depth parameter determines the working direction This cycle requires a centercut end mill ISO 1641 or pilot drilling at the pocket center The following condition must be met for the second line length 2nd side length greater than 2 x rounding off radius stepover factor k Setup clearance f incremental value Distance between tool tip at starting position and workpiece surface Milling depth P incremental value Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of pocket Plunging depth g incremental value Infeed per cut
324. ute value Center of the slot in the secondary axis of the working plane gt Pitch circle diameter Q244 Enter the diameter of the pitch circle Second side length Q219 Enter the slot width If you enter a slot width that equals the tool diameter the TNC will carry out the roughing process only slot milling Starting angle Q245 absolute value Enter the polar angle of the starting point gt Angular length Q248 incremental value Enter the angular length of the slot Q217 Q216 8 Programming Cycles IL m J m Z L J gt Z Z O Rs NO O U Z O D Ww O 40 30 20 Define the workpiece blank Define the tool for roughing finishing Define slotting mill Call tool for roughing finishing Retract the tool Define cycle for machining the contour outside Call cycle for machining the contour outside 183 e ad op xe c N oa v m q a S Oo 0 O 8 3 Cycle Si ine Pockets Studs and Slots 84 Define CIRCULAR POCKET MILLING cycle Call CIRCULAR POCKET MILLING cycle Tool change Call slotting mill Define cycle for slot 1 Call cycle for slot 1 New starting angle for slot 2 Call cycle for slot 2 Retract in the tool axis end program 8 Programming Cycles 8 4 Cycles for Machining Hole Patterns
325. ware numbers of the NC and PLC are displayed in the MOD function opening screen Directly below them are the code numbers for the installed options OPT No option OPT 00000000 Option for digitizing with triggering touch probe OPT 00000001 Option for digitizing with measuring touch probe OPT 00000011 12 3 Code Number A code number is required for access to the following function Select user parameters t23 Configuring an Ethernet card NET123 Enable special functions 555343 HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 Manual operation and editing Position display 1 Position display 2 DIST Change MM INCH MM Program input HEIDENHAIN Axis selection 20000A 280472 BOM NC software number PLC OPT POSITION AXIS MACHINE INPUT PGM LIMITS HEEE Twe D software number O0000011 299 Sms 2 Oo Oo Q A N q P i te a lt J Q O a e 12 2 Software 12 4 Setting the Data Interfaces 12 4 Setting the Data Interfaces To setup the data interfaces press the RS 232 RS 422 SETUP soft key to call a menu for setting the data Interfaces Setting the RS 232 interface The mode of operation and baud rates for the RS 232 interface are entered in the upper left of the screen Setting the RS 422 interface The mode of operation and baud rates for the RS 422 interface are entered in the upper right of the screen Setting the OPERATING MOD
326. which it is programmed with M90 M90 becomes effective at the start of block Operation with servo lag must be active 138 444 7 A Th A L 7 Programming Miscellaneous functions Insert rounding arc between straight lines M112 For reasons of compatibility the M112 function is still available y However to define the tolerance for fast contour milling HEIDEN HAIN recommends the use of the TOLERANCE cycle see section 8 8 Special Cycles Machining small contour steps M97 Standard behavior The TNC inserts a transition arc at outside corners If the contour steps are very small however the tool would damage the contour See figure at upper right In such cases the TNC interrupts program run and generates the error message Tool radius too large X im Q gt E aa O Q ed am oe Q im i Behavior with M97 The TNC calculates the intersection of the contour elements as at inside corners and moves the tool over this point See figure at lower right Program M97 in the same block as the outside corner Y Effect M97 is effective only in the blocks in which it is programmed with M97 A corner machined with M97 will not be completely finished You may wish to rework the contour with a smaller tool Example NC blocks Large tool radius Move to contour point 13 Machine small contour step 13 t
327. width 4 characters Tolerance for wear detection in tool length LTOL 0 to 27 column width 6 characters Tolerance for wear detection in tool radius RTOL 0 to 27 column width 6 characters Cutting direction DIRECT 0 to 27 column width 7 characters PLC status PLC 0 to 27 column width 9 characters Offset of the tool in the tool axis in addition to MP6530 TT LOFFS 0 to 27 column width 11 characters Offset of the tool between stylus center and tool center TT R OFFS 0 to 27 column width 11 characters Tolerance for break detection in tool length LBREAK 0 to 27 column width 6 characters Tolerance for break detection in tool radius RBREAK 0 to 27 column width 6 characters Tooth length Cycle 22 LCUTS 0 to 27 column width 11 characters maximum plunge angle Cycle 22 ANGLE 0 to 27 column width 7 characters Tool type TYPE 0 to 27 column width 5 characters Tool material TMAT 0 to 27 column width 16 characters Cutting data table CDT 0 to 27 column width 16 characters 13 Tables and Overviews Configure pocket tables to omit from table enter 0 Column number in the tool table for Manual Operation mode Display of feed rate Decimal character Position display in the tool axis Display step for the X axis Display step for the Y axis Display step for the Z axis Display step for the IVth axis Display step for the V axis HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430
328. with radius compensation Center angle 180 arc radius 10 mm Retract in Z return to block 1 end program Last contour element Pe with radius compensation Coordinates Py arc radius 10 mm Retract in Z return to block 1 end program 101 proach and Departure Sms oe q Oo Q Line L CHamFer Circle Center Circle Circle by Radius 6 4 Path Contours B sion Coordinates Circle Tangential Circle Tangential Corner RouNDing FK Free Contour Programming 102 2 Overview of path functions 6 4 Path Contours Cartesian Coordinates Straight line Chamfer between two straight lines No tool movement Circular arc around a circle center CC to an arc end point Circular arc with a certain radius Circular arc with tangential connection to the preceding contour element Circular arc with tangential connection to the preceding and subsequent contour elements Straight line or circular path with any connection to the preceding contour element Coordinates of the straight line end point Chamfer side length Coordinates of the circle center or pole Coordinates of the arc end point direction of rotation Coordinates of the arc end point arc radius direction of rotation Coordinates of the arc end point Rounding off radius R See section 6 6 6 Programming Programming Contours Straight line L The TNC moves the tool in a straight line from its
329. with the PARALLEL EXECUTE soft key The file will now be copied in the background so you can continue to work while the TNC is copying HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 35 _ a O c 4 3 Standard J4 c O c 4 3 Standard Data transfer to or from an external data medium Before you can transfer data to an external data medium you must set the interface see Section 12 4 Setting the Data Interfaces PGM MGT Calling the file manager Activate data transfer press the EXT soft key In eT the left half of the screen the TNC shows all of the 1 files that are stored on the TNC and in the right half of the screen 2 all of the files that are stored on the external data medium Use the arrow keys to highlight the file s that you want to transfer If you are transferring from the TNC to the external medium move the highlight in the left window onto the file that is to be transferred Move the highlight up and down within a window Move the highlight trom the left to the right window and vice versa If you are transferring from the external medium to the TNC move the highlight in the right window onto the file that is to be transferred COPY a Programming and editing File name RS232 CNO DIRI TCHPRNT A CVREPORT A FRAESEN A 7570 GFB30 A 245K FRAESEN CDT 6580 MDI 332 11 F 192 E G E SSS e y E eS 112 12 123
330. xt editor is an information headline which displays the file name and the location and writing mode of the Go to the next screen page cursor Go to the previous screen page File Name of the text file EN Line Line in which the cursor is presently located Go to beginning of file Column Column in which the cursor is presently located END E Go to end of file Insert Insert new text pushing the existing text to the right Overwrite Write over the existing text erasing it where it is replaced with the new text Editing functions Key The text is inserted or overwritten at the location of the cursor You can move the cursor to any desired position in the text file by pressing the arrow keys Begin a new line RET Erase the character to the left The line in which the cursor is presently located is depicted in a of the cursor different color A line can have up to 77 characters To start a new line press the RET key or the ENT key Insert a blank space PACE E e Switch between upper and lower HIFT case letters 60 4 Programming Fundamentals of NC File Management Programming Aids Pallet Management Erasing and inserting characters words and lines With the text editor you can erase words and even lines and insert them at any desired location in the text See the table at right To move a word or line to a different location Move the cursor to the word or line you wish to erase and Insert at a different place in the
331. y Untag all files ALE COPY TAG Copy all tagged files TAG aie Tag a file by pressing the TAG FILE soft key Move the highlight to the next file you wish to tag TAG You can tag several files in this way as desired FILE COPY TAG To copy the tagged files press the COPY TAG soft key or DELETE Delete the tagged files by END 6 pressing END to end the marking function and then DELETE to delete the tagged files Renaming a file Move the highlight to the file you wish to rename RENAME Select the renaming function Ape xv2 Enter the new file name the file type cannot be changed To execute renaming press the ENT key HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 47 4 4 File Management with adie Functions 48 Additional Functions Protecting a file Canceling file protection Move the highlight to the file you want to protect MORE To select the additional functions press the MORE Functions FUNCTIONS key PROTECT To enable file protection press the PROTECT soft key The file now has status P To cancel file protection proceed in the same way using the UNPROTECT soft key Converting an FK program into HEIDENHAIN conversational format Move the highlight to the file you want to convert MORE To select the additional functions press the MORE Functions FUNCTIONS key Sanden To select the converting function press the CONVERT FK gt H FK gt H soft key Enter the name of the dest
332. y sequence and as often as desired END PGM A subprogram cannot call itself Write subprograms at the end of the main program behind the block with M2 or M30 If subprograms are located before the block with M02 or M30 they will be executed at least once even if they are not called 240 9 Programming Subprograms and Program Section Repeats Programming a subprogram To mark the beginning press the LBL SET key and Sau enter a label number Enter the subprogram To mark the end press the LBL SET key and enter the label number 0 Calling asubprogram To call a subprogram press the LBL CALL key 07 EE Label number Enter the label number of the Subprogram you wish to call Repeat REP Ignore the dialog question with the NO ENT key Repeat REP is used only for program section repeats CALL LBL O is not permitted label O is only used to mark the end of a subprogram 9 3 Program Section Repeats The beginning of a program section repeat is marked by the label LBL The end of a program section repeat is identified by CALL LBL REP Operating sequence 1 The TNC executes the part program up to the end of the program section CALL LBL REP 2 Then the program section between the called LBL and the label call is repeated the number of times entered after REP 3 The TNC then resumes the part program after the last repetition Programming notes You can repeat a program section up to 65 534 times in
333. ying files into another directory Select the screen layout with the two equally sized windows To display directories in both windows press the PATH soft key In the right window Move the highlight to the directory into which you wish to copy the files and display the Tiles in this directory with the ENT key In the left window Select the directory with the files that you wish to copy and press ENT to display them Display the file tagging functions TAG ine Move the highlight to the file you want to copy and FILE tag it You can tag several files in this way as desired copy Tas gt Copy the tagged files into the target directory For additional tagging functions see lagging files If you have marked files in the left and right windows the TNC copies from the directory in which the highlight is located Overwriting files If you copy files into a directory in which other files are stored under the same name the TNC will ask whether the files in the target directory should be overwritten Press the YES soft key to overwrite all files or Press the NO soft key if no file is to be overwritten To contirm each file separately before overwriting it press the CONFIRM key If you wish to overwrite a protected file this must also be confirmed or aborted separately HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 B TNC 430 51 4 4 File Management with Ai i Functions 4 4 File Management with mF Functions The TNC in a network appl

32293824 - heidenhain

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents